530244

Skoda Octavia Manual

316
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/316
Next page
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaOctavia
OWNER´ S MANUAL
How you can contribute to a cleaner environment
The fuel consumption of your Škoda - and thus the level of pollutants contained
in the exhaust - is also determined by how you drive.
The noise level and wear and tear are also influenced by how you personally
handle your vehicle. This Owner ´s Manual tells you how to drive your Škoda to
achieve the minimum impact on the environment, and how to save money at
the same time. Look up „Environment“ in the Index to find out more.
Please also refer to all the texts identified with a ❀
in this Owner ´s Manual.
Make your contribution - for the sake of the environment.
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Octavia anglicky 05.05
S64.5610.03.20
1Z0 012 003 AL
Octavia anglicky 05.05 S64.5610.03.20
A5_19_01_06.indd 1A5_19_01_06.indd 1 3.7.2006 14:25:423.7.2006 14:25:42
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaService
ŠkodaGenuine Parts
ŠkodaGenuine Accessories
A5_19_01_06.indd 2A5_19_01_06.indd 2 3.7.2006 14:26:343.7.2006 14:26:34
Introduction
You have opted for a Škoda - our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
Your new Škoda offers you a vehicle featuring the most modern engineering and a wide range of equipment
which you will undoubtedly wish to use to the full during your daily motoring. That is why, we recommend
that you read this Owner's Manual attentively to enable you to become familiar with your car and all that it
offers as quickly as possible.
Please do not hesitate to contact your specialist garage or importer should you have any further questions
or any problems regarding your vehicle which may arise. He will be ready at any time to receive your ques-
tions, suggestions and criticisms.
Any national legal provisions which vary from the information contained in this Owner's Manual take prec-
edence over the information contained herein.
We wish you much pleasure with your Škoda and pleasant motoring at all times.
Your Škoda Auto
s24s
.
book
Page
1
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Introduction2
On-board literature
The on-board literature for your vehicle consists of this “Owner's
Manual” as well as the brochures “Brief instruction”, “Service
schedule”, “Technical data” and “Help on the road”. There can
also be a variety of other additional operating manuals and
instructions on-board (e.g. an operating manual for the radio)
depending on the vehicle model and equipment.
If one of the publications listed above is missing, please contact
a Škoda dealer immediately, where one will be glad to assist you
in such matters.
One should note that the details given in the vehicle's
papers always take precedence over those in the Owner's
Manual.
Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual describes the current scope of equip-
ment. Certain items of equipment listed are only installed later on
and only envisaged for particular markets. The illustrations can
differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended for
general information.
In addition to information regarding all the controls and equip-
ment, the Owner's Manual also contains important information
regarding care and operation for your safety and also to retain the
value of your vehicle. To provide you with valuable tips and aids.
You can learn how you can operate your vehicle safely,
economically and in an environmentally conscious way.
For safety reasons, please also pay attention to the informa-
tion on accessories, modifications and replacement of parts
⇒ page 270.
The other chapters of the Owner's Manual are also important,
however, for proper treatment of your car - in addition to regular
care and maintenance - helps to retain its value and in many
cases is also one of the conditions for possible warranty claims.
The Brief instruction
includes an overview of the most important controls of your
vehicle.
The Service schedule
contains:
• Vehicle data,
• Service intervals,
• Overview of the service work,
• Service proof,
• Confirmation of mobility warranty,
• important information on the warranty.
The confirmations of the carried out service work are one of the
conditions for possible warranty claims.
Please always present the Service schedule when you take your
car to a Škoda dealer.
If the Service schedule is missing or worn, please contact your
Škoda dealer, where your car is serviced regularly. You will
receive a duplicate, in which the previously carried out service
work are confirmed.
Help on the road
contains the addresses and telephone numbers of Škoda
Importers.
s24s
.
book
Page
2
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Introduction 3
Technical Data
includes the most important identification data of your vehicle.
s24s
.
book
Page
3
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Introduction4
s24s
.
book
Page
4
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Contents 5
Contents
Layout of this Owner's Manual
(explanations)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
An overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights
General view of the instrument cluster . . . . . .
Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Interval Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer)*
Information display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Check Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key with light* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the battery of the radio remote
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchonisation of the remote control . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . .
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting front seats electrically* . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating the front seats* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Net partition (Estate)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter*, power sockets . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating and air conditioning system . . . . .
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatic* (semi-automatic air conditioning
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning) . . . .
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
ventilation)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting-off and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting steering wheel position . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching the engine off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-speed automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox DSG* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal telephone preinstallation with voice
control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Phonebook* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth™* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems . .
The CD changer* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The physical principle of a frontal collision . .
8
9
11
11
13
13
14
14
14
15
15
16
17
18
23
25
26
26
28
30
42
42
43
44
45
45
46
52
53
54
56
59
63
63
70
72
75
79
82
82
84
87
88
89
91
92
99
102
103
104
105
106
108
119
119
123
128
134
138
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
149
149
156
156
163
163
165
171
173
175
176
177
177
177
179
183
183
184
s24s
.
book
Page
5
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Contents6
Important safety information regarding the use
of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are seat belts correctly fastened? . . . . .
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the airbag system . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What you should know about transporting
children! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching child seat using the “ISOFIX” system
Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic stability programme (ESP)* . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uphill-Start off-Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromechanical power steering . . . . . . . . .
Tyre inflation pressure-control system* . . . . .
Driving and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . .
The first 1 500 kilometres and then afterwards
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in an economical and environmentally
conscious manner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detachable ball head* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the exterior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the interior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspecting and Replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen Wiper and Washer System . . . .
Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, changes and replacement of
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and replacement parts . . . . . . .
Technical changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . .
Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid box* and warning triangle* (Octavia)
First-aid box* and warning triangle* (Estate
car) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fire extinguisher* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow-starting and towing vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
185
186
188
190
190
192
195
197
199
202
202
206
210
213
213
213
216
217
218
218
219
219
220
221
221
222
223
227
228
228
229
229
231
233
233
233
233
239
242
242
242
245
247
247
250
253
256
258
262
263
263
270
270
270
273
273
273
273
274
274
275
275
276
281
283
288
288
294
303
303
303
305
s24s
.
book
Page
6
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Contents 7
s24s
.
book
Page
7
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)8
Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)
The Owner's Manual has been systematically designed, in order to make
it easy for you to find and absorb the information you require.
Chapters, table of contents and subject index
The text of the manual are divided into relatively short sections which are
combined into easy-to-read chapters. The chapter you are reading at any
particular moment is highlighted at the bottom right of the page.
The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the
detailed Subject index at the end of the Owner's Manual helps you to
rapidly find the information you are looking for.
Sections
The majority of Sections apply to all models.
Since there is a wide range of different equipment and options available it
is clearly unavoidable, despite dividing the contents into sections, that
mention may be made of equipment which is not fitted to your vehicle.
Equipment which is marked * is only standard on certain vehicle model
versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
Brief information and instructions
Each section has a Heading.
This is followed by Brief information (in large italic lettering), which tells
you the subject which is dealt with in this section.
Most of the illustrations are accompanied by an Instruction (in relatively
large letters) which explains to you in a straightforward way the action you
have to take. Work steps which have to be carried out are illustrated with
a hyphen.
Notes
All four kinds of notes, which are used in the text, are always stated at the
end of the respective section.
WARNING
The most important notes are marked with the heading Warning.
These Warning notes draw your attention to a serious risk of acci-
dent or injury. While reading the text you will frequently encounter
a double arrow followed by a small warning symbol. This symbol is
intended to draw your attention to a Warning note at the end of the
section to which you must pay careful attention.
Caution
A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your
vehicle (e.g. damage to gearbox), or points out general risks of an acci-
dent .
For the sake of the environment
An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection
aspects. This is where you will, for example, find tips aimed at reducing
your fuel consumption.
Note
A normal Note draws your attention in a general way to important informa-
tion.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the
direction of travel of the vehicle.
s24s
.
book
Page
8
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
9
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Using the system
s24s
.
book
Page
9
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Cockpit10
Fig. 1 Certain items of equipment shown in the illustration are only fitted to particular model versions or are optional items of equipment.
s24s
.
book
Page
10
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Cockpit 11
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Cockpit
An overview
This general view is designed to help you to quickly
become familiar with the instruments, gauges and
controls.
Electric power-operated window* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric exterior mirror adjustment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for the multi-functional switch:
− Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight
flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Speed regulating system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel:
− with horn
− with driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− with pushbuttons for radio and mobile phone* . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster: Instruments and indicator lights . . . . . .
Lever for the multi-functional switch:
− Multi-functional indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control dial for heating on the driver's seat* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio*
Control dial for heating on the front passenger seat* . . . . .
Storage compartment on the front passenger side . . . . . . .
Switch for the front passenger airbag* (in front passenger
stowage compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse carrier (on side of dash panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control dial for the instrument lighting and control dial for the
headlight beam range regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Operating controls for the heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Operating controls for Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Operating controls for Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Switch for the ESP* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Switch for TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Selector lever (6-speed automatic gearbox)* . . . . . . . . .
− Selector lever (automatic DSG)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre inflation pressure-control system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Rear ashtray - high centre console* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
1
56
A
2
80
A
3
122
A
4
68
146
A
5
192
163
A
6
13
A
7
18
75
A
8
88
A
9
122
A
10
68
A
11
110
A
12
A
13
88
A
14
108
A
15
200
A
16
192
A
17
288
A
18
63
A
19
67, 67
A
20
247
A
21
109
A
22
138
A
23
139
A
24
119
123
128
A
25
213
215
A
26
145
A
27
142
150
157
A
28
220
A
29
106
s24s
.
book
Page
11
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Cockpit12
− Storage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger
airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note
• Equipment which is marked * is only standard on certain vehicle model
versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
• Vehicles with factory-fitted radio, mobile phone, navigation system,
CD player etc. are supplied with separate instructions for operating such
equipment.
• The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of
some items on right-hand drive models may differ from that shown in
⇒ page 10, fig. 1. The symbols on the controls and switches are the same
as for left-hand drive models.
108
A
30
200
s24s
.
book
Page
12
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 13
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights
General view of the instrument cluster
Engine revolutions counter ⇒ page 14
Coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 14
Fuel gauge ⇒ page 14
Speedometer
Display:
− with counter for distance driven ⇒ page 15
− with Service Interval Display ⇒ page 16
− with digital clock ⇒ page 17
− with Multi-functional indicator* ⇒ page 18
− with Information display* ⇒ page 23
Clock-set button / reset button
When the lights are switched on, the instrument cluster is illuminated.
Fig. 2 Instrument cluster
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
s24s
.
book
Page
13
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights14
Engine revolutions counter
The start of the red zone in the revolutions counter ⇒ page 13, fig. 2
indicates the maximum permissible engine speed for all gears for an
engine which has been run in and operating at a normal temperature. You
should shift into the next higher gear before this red zone is reached, or
move the selector lever into position D if your car is fitted with an automatic
gearbox.
One should shift to the next lower gear at the latest when the engine is no
longer running smoothly.
Avoid high engine speeds during the running-in period ⇒ page 221.
Caution
The needle of the revolutions counter must on no account move into the
red zone of the scale - risk of engine damage!
For the sake of the environment
Shifting up early helps you save fuel and reduce the operating noise of
your vehicle.
Coolant temperature gauge
The coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 13, fig. 2 operates only when
the ignition is switched on.
In order to avoid any damage to the engine, please pay attention to the
following notes regarding the temperature ranges:
Cold range
If the pointer is still in the left-hand area of the scale it means that the
engine has not yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid running at
high engine speeds, at full throttle and at severe engine loads.
The operating range
The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer
moves into the mid-range of the scale. The pointer may also move further
to the right at high engine loads and high outside temperatures. This is not
critical provided the warning symbol in the instrument cluster does not
flash.
If the symbol in the instrument cluster flashes it means that either the
coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. Please
refer to the guidelines ⇒ page 35, “Coolant temperature/coolant level ”.
WARNING
Pay attention to the warning notes ⇒ page 248, “Working in the
engine compartment” before opening the bonnet and inspecting
the coolant level.
Caution
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh
air inlet impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant. There is then a risk of
the engine overheating at high outside temperatures and high engine
loads!
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge ⇒ page 13, fig. 2 only operates when the ignition is
switched on.
A
1
A
2
A
3
s24s
.
book
Page
14
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 15
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres (on vehicles with four-wheel
drive approx. 60 litres). The warning symbol in the instrument cluster
lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve marking. There are now
about 8 litres of fuel remaining in the tank. This symbol is a reminder for
you, that you must refuel.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
Please refuel! (Please refuel!)
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
Caution
Never run the fuel tank completely empty! An irregular fuel supply can
result in poor ignition or misfiring. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust
system and damage the catalytic converter.
Speedometer
Warning against excessive speeds*
An acoustic warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds
120 kilometres per hour. The acoustic warning signal will switch off again
when the vehicle speed goes below this speed limit.
Note
This function is only valid for some countries.
Counter for distance driven
The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in kilom-
eters (km). On certain model versions, the readout is shown in “miles”.
The kilometer counter for distance driven is shown on the display when
the ignition is switched off. The trip counter for distance driven is shown
on the display after switching on the ignition. You can then switch over to
the counter display with the reset button.
Reset button
By briefly pressing the reset button ⇒ page 13, fig. 2 you can switch
over from the trip counter to the kilometer counter. In order to recognize
which counter for the distance driven is shown on the display at that
moment, trip ⇒ fig. 3 appears after the trip counter.
If you hold the reset button pressed for about 1 second, the trip counter
is set back to zero.
If you hold the reset button pressed for longer than 2 seconds when
the ignition is switched on, a display regarding the kilometers still to be
Fig. 3 Display: Trip
counter for distance
driven
A
6
A
6
A
6
s24s
.
book
Page
15
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights16
driven and the days until the following service interval (for this the trip
counter is not set back) appears ⇒ page 16.
Counter for distance driven (trip)
The counter for distance driven indicates the total distance in kilometers
or miles which the vehicle has been driven.
Trip counter for distance driven
The trip counter indicates the distance which you have driven since this
counter was last reset - in steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile.
Fault display
dEF will appear as a constant text in the display if there is a fault in the
instrument cluster. Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by a
specialist workshop.
WARNING
Never seek to adjust the trip counter for distance driven while
driving for safety reasons!
Note
On vehicles without multi-functional indicator or information display, both
counts of the counters are shown simultaneously on the display.
Service Interval Display
Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, the text can differ
slightly on the display.
Service Interval Display
A key symbol
appears in the counter display for distance driven about
15 days before reaching the due date for the service ⇒ fig. 4. The
remaining distance to be driven will be indicated for 10 seconds next to
the key symbol and then the remaining number of days to the due date for
the service inspection.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
Service in ... km or... days
The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km
or days until the service due date is reached.
The following text appears as a flashing key symbol
as soon as the
due date for the service is reached.
Fig. 4 Service Interval
Display: Note
s24s
.
book
Page
16
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 17
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
Service now!
The display disappears within 20 seconds after switching on the ignition.
The trip counter is also displayed after pressing the reset button for the trip
counter (for more than 1 second).
Display regarding the distance and days until the following service
interval
You can have the distance still to be driven and the days until the following
service interval displayed at any time as follows:
• Switch on the ignition and press the reset button ⇒ page 13, fig. 2
for more than 2 seconds.
A key symbol is displayed on the display of the counter for the
distance driven. The remaining distance to be driven will be indicated for
10 seconds next to the key symbol and then the remaining number of days
to the due date for the service inspection.
Resetting Service Interval Display
We recommend having this resetting performed by a specialist garage.
Specialist garage:
• resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection
• makes an entry in the Service schedule
• affix the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the
side of the dash panel on the driver's side.
The service interval displays can also be reset as follows by using the
reset button ⇒ page 13, fig. 2 on the trip counter:
• Switch off the ignition, press the reset button of the trip counter for
distance driven and hold it down.
• Switch the ignition on and release the reset button. Now turn the reset
button to the right. The service interval displays are reset.
Caution
We recommend that you do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself
otherwise this can result in the service interval display being incorrectly
set, which may also result in problems with operation of your vehicle.
Note
• Never reset the display between service intervals otherwise this may
result in incorrect readouts.
• Information is retained in the Service Interval Display also after the
battery of the vehicle is disconnected.
• It is necessary to re-code the Service Interval Display if a new instru-
ment cluster is installed during repair work. This work is carried out by a
specialist garage.
• The data displayed is the same after resetting the display with flexible
service intervals (QG1) using the reset button as that for a vehicle with
fixed service intervals (QG2). We therefore recommend having the
Service Interval Display reset only by a Škoda dealer who is familiar with
the procedure for resetting the display with a vehicle system tester.
• Please refer to the brochure Service schedule for extensive informa-
tion about the service intervals.
Digital clock
A clock-set button is installed on the bottom left beside the
speedometer for adjusting the clock ⇒ page 13, fig. 2.
Set hours
– Turn the reset button to the left.
A
6
A
6
A
6
s24s
.
book
Page
17
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights18
Setting minutes
– Turn the reset button to the right.
WARNING
The clock should not be adjusted while driving for safety reasons
but only when the vehicle is stationary!
Multi-functional indicator (onboard
computer)*
Introduction
The multi-functional indicator appears in the display ⇒ fig. 5 or in the infor-
mation display ⇒ page 23, fig. 10 depending on the equipment fitted to
your vehicle.
The multi-functional indicator offers you a range of useful information.
Note
In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of
measures.
Memory
The multi-functional indicator is equipped with two automatic memories.
The selected memory is displayed in the middle of the display field ⇒ fig. 5.
The data of the single-trip memory (memory 1) is shown if a 1 appears in
the display. A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total
distance memory (memory 2).
Switching of the memory takes place with the button ⇒ page 19, fig. 6.
Single-trip memory (memory 1)
The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment
the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. New data will also flow
The outside temperature ⇒ page 20
Current fuel consumption ⇒ page 20
Average fuel consumption ⇒ page 20
Range ⇒ page 21
Distance driven ⇒ page 21
Average speed ⇒ page 21
Driving time ⇒ page 21
Warning against excessive speeds* ⇒ page 22
Fig. 5 Multi-functional
indicator
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
18
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 19
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
into the calculation of the current driving information if the trip is continued
within 2 hours after switching off the ignition. The memory will be auto-
matically erased, on the other hand, if the trip is interrupted for more than
2 hours.
Total-trip memory (memory 2)
The total distance driven memory gathers data from any number of indi-
vidual journeys up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving or 9.999
kilometres driven. The memory is deleted when either of these limits is
reached and the calculation starts from anew.
The total-trip memory will not, contrary to the single-trip memory, be
deleted after a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours.
Note
All information in the memory is erased if the battery of the vehicle is
disconnected.
Using the system
The rocker switch and the button are located in the grip of
the window wiper lever ⇒ fig. 6.
Selecting the memory
– Repeated short-term pressing of the button allows one to
select the individual memories.
Selecting the functions
– Press the rocker switch up or down. This will cause the
individual functions of the multi-functional indicator to appear
in the display one after the other.
Setting function to zero
– Select the memory you want.
– Press button for more than 1 second.
Fig. 6 Multi-functional
indicator: Controls
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
19
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights20
The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero by
button :
• average fuel consumption,
• distance driven,
• average speed,
• Driving time.
You can only operate the multi-functional indicator when the ignition is
switched on. After the ignition is switched on, the function displayed is the
one which you last selected before switching off the ignition.
If the outside temperature drops below +4 °C, the outside temperature
indicator with a snow flake symbol appears. The symbol warns the driver
of the possible danger of ice on the road. After the rocker switch is
pressed, the function displays the one which you last selected before
switching off the ignition.
The outside temperature
The outside temperature appears in the display when the ignition is
switched on.
The correct outside temperature will be indicated with a delay of 5
minutes. If the vehicle is stationary (or driven at a very low speed) the
temperature indicated may be slightly higher than the actual outside
temperature because of heat radiated by the engine.
If the outside temperature drops below +4 °C, a snow flake symbol
(warning signal for ice on the road) appears before the temperature indi-
cator ⇒ fig. 7 and a warning signal sounds.
WARNING
Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temper-
ature display that there is no ice on the road. Please note that black
ice may also be present on the road surface even at temperatures
around +4 °C - warning, drive with care!
Current consumption
The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres/100 km.
This information can help you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel
consumption you wish to achieve.
The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a
low speed.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is
shown in the display in litres/100 km ⇒ page 18. This information can help
A
B
A
A
Fig. 7 Multi-functional
indicator: the outside
temperature
s24s
.
book
Page
20
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 21
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to
achieve.
If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain
period of time you must first erase the memory at the start of the new
measurement using the button ⇒ page 19, fig. 6. A zero appears in the
display for the first 100 m you drive after erasing the memory.
The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.
Note
The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.
Range
The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display. It indicates the
distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the present level of
fuel in the tank for the same style of driving. The readout is shown in steps
of 10 km.
The fuel consumption for the last 50 km is taken as a basis for calculating
the range. If you drive in a more economical manner from this moment on,
the range will be increased accordingly.
You first drive 50 km if the readout is reset (after disconnecting the
battery) before a new readout for the range is displayed.
Distance driven
The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the
display ⇒ page 18. If you wish to calculate the distance driven from a
particular time of day you must first erase the memory at this moment in
time by pressing the button ⇒ page 19, fig. 6.
The maximum distance indicated in both switch positions is 9999 km. The
indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded.
Average speed
The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the
display in km/hour ⇒ page 18. If you wish to determine the average speed
over a certain period of time you must first erase the memory at the start
of the new measurement using the button ⇒ page 19, fig. 6.
A zero appears in the display for the first 100 m you drive after erasing the
memory.
The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are
driving.
Driving time
The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased,
appears in the display ⇒ page 18. If you wish to calculate the driving time
from a particular time of day you must first erase the memory at this
moment in time by pressing the button ⇒ page 19, fig. 6.
The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 99 hours and 59
minutes. The indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded.
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
21
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights22
Warning against excessive speeds*
Warning against excessive speeds
1)
This function enables you to set a speed limit, e.g. if you drive in town. A
text in the display is intended to draw your attention to the fact that you
have exceeded the set speed limit.
You can set the desired speed limit as follows:
• Select the menu Speed warning --- km/h (warning at --- km/h).
• You can drive at the desired speed, e.g. 50 km/h
• Press the button ⇒ fig. 9 - Speed warning 50 km/h (warning at 50
km/h) is shown on the display.
If you now exceed the set speed limit, Speed 50 km/h exceeded (speed
50 km/h exceeded) will be shown on the display. This display will be
shown until you have reduced the speed to the set speed limit.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The set speed limit remains stored in the memory, also when the ignition
is switched off and on; it can only be erased by pressing the button for
more than 1 second.
Fig. 8 Speed setting
Fig. 9 Multi-functional
indicator: Controls
1)
Valid for vehicles with information display.
A
B
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
22
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 23
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Information display*
Introduction
The information display provides you with information in a convenient way
concerning the current operating state of your vehicle. The information
system also provides you with data (depending on the equipment installed
in the vehicle) relating to the radio, mobile phone, multi-functional indi-
cator, navigation system and automatic gearbox.
Certain functions and operating conditions are always being checked on
the vehicle when the ignition is switched on and also while driving.
Functional faults, if required repair work and other information are indi-
cated by red symbols ⇒ page 27 and yellow symbols ⇒ page 28.
Lighting up of these symbols is combined with an acoustic warning signal.
Information and texts giving warnings are also shown in the display
⇒ page 30.
The display of text is possible in the following languages:
Czech, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese.
You can select the desired language in the setting menu ⇒ page 28.
The following information can be shown in the display (depending on the
equipment installed on the vehicle):
Fig. 10 Instrument
cluster: Information
display
Main menu ⇒ page 24
Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar
warning
⇒ page 25
Service Interval Display ⇒ page 16
Selector lever positions of the 6-speed automatic
gearbox
⇒ page 150
Selector lever positions of the automatic DSG ⇒ page 157
s24s
.
book
Page
23
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights24
Main menu
– You can activate the MAIN MENU by pressing the rocker
switch ⇒ fig. 12 for more than 1 second.
– You can select the menu through the rocker switch . When
the pushbutton is briefly pressed, the information you have
selected is displayed.
You can select the following information (depending on the equipment
installed on the vehicle):
MF Display ⇒ page 18
The outside temperature
Current consumption
Average fuel consumption
Range
Distance driven
Average speed
Driving time
Warning against excessive speeds
Audio ⇒ page 25
Navigation ⇒ page 26
Telephone ⇒ page 167
Vehicle status ⇒ page 26
Setup ⇒ page 28
Time
Winter tyres
Language
Units
Lights & Vision
Aux. Heating (auxiliary heating)
Back
Fig. 11 Information
display: Menu
Fig. 12 Information
display: Controls
A
A
A
A
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
24
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 25
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Display off
After selecting the menu Display off the display is switched off. Press
rocker switch for at least 1 second to switch the display on again.
The menu Audio is only displayed when the Radio* is switched on.
The menu Navigation is only displayed when the Navigation* is switched
on.
Aux. Heating (auxiliary heating) is only then displayed, if the vehicle is
fitted with auxiliary heating*.
Note
If you do not activate the information display at that moment, the menu
shifts to one level higher every 10 seconds.
Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar
warning
The door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning lights up
when at least one of the three items door, luggage compartment or bonnet
are not closed when the ignition is turned on. The symbol indicates which
door is still open or whether the luggage compartment door or bonnet is
not closed ⇒ fig. 13.
The symbol goes out as soon as the doors, luggage compartment door
and bonnet are completely closed.
As an additional warning signal, a 3 time peep sounds if the car is driven
at a speed of more than 6km/hour and if the door, engine or luggage
compartment door is open.
Audio
These displays appear in addition to the normal information in the radio
display.
A
A
Fig. 13 Information
display: Door warning
Fig. 14 Information
display: Radio display
s24s
.
book
Page
25
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights26
Operation of the radio system is described in separate operating instruc-
tions to be found in the on-board literature.
Navigation system*
The controls for the navigation system, radio, CD player are located in the
centre console on both sides of the monitor screen. Navigation data is
also shown in the information display of the instrument cluster.
Information and warning texts are displayed preferentially when the navi-
gation system is switched on.
Operation of the navigation system is described in separate operating
instructions to be found in the on-board literature.
Auto Check Control
Vehicle condition
The Auto Check Control carries out a check of certain functions and
vehicle components. The check is performed constantly when the ignition
is switched on, both when the vehicle is stationary, as well as when
driving.
Operational faults, urgent repairs, service work or other information
appear in the display of the instrument cluster. The displays are shown
with a red or yellow light symbol depending on the priority of the message.
The red symbols indicate danger (priority 1) while the yellow symbols indi-
cate a warning (priortity 2). Information for the driver may also appear in
addition to the symbols ⇒ page 30.
There is at least one error message to be read when the term Vehicle
status is flashing in the main menu. After selecting this menu the first of
the error messages is displayed. If there are several error messages, they
Fig. 15 Information
display: Display of
operational fault
s24s
.
book
Page
26
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 27
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
are shown on the display under the message e.g. 01/03 ⇒ fig. 15. This
display indicates that the first of a total of three error messages should be
displayed. The respective symbols light up one after the other in an
interval of 5 seconds. Investigate the displayed faults as soon as possible.
As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always
indicated again. After the first display, the symbols are indicated without
information for the driver.
If there is no error message, after selecting the menu Vehicle status the
message Status OK is shown on the display.
If a fault occurs, a warning signal will also sound in addition to the symbol
and text in the display:
• Priority 1 - three warning signals
• Priority 2 - one warning signal
Red symbols
A red symbol signals danger.
Proceed as follows if a red symbol is displayed:
– Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the engine off.
– Investigate the function indicated.
– Obtain professional assistance.
Meaning of the red symbols:
Coolant level too low/coolant tempera-
ture too high
⇒ page 35
Engine oil pressure too low ⇒ page 37
Fig. 16 Information
display: Oil pressure is
low
s24s
.
book
Page
27
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights28
Three successive warning signals will sound if a red symbol appears.
If several operational faults of priority 1 exist, the symbols appear one
after the other and are each illiminated for about 5 seconds.
Yellow symbols
A yellow symbol signals a warning.
Check the relevant function as soon as possible.
The meaning of the yellow symbols:
One warning signal will sound if a yellow symbol appears.
If several operational faults of priority 2 exist, the symbols appear one
after the other and are each illiminated for about 5 seconds.
Settings
Fig. 17 Information
display: Fuel level low
Fuel level low ⇒ page 36
Check engine oil level,
engine oil sensor faulty
⇒ page 38
Brake pad worn ⇒ page 36
Washer fluid level low ⇒ page 36
Fig. 18 Setting the
clock
s24s
.
book
Page
28
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 29
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
You can change certain settings by means of the information display. The
current setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu
at the top below the line ⇒ page 28, fig. 18.
You can select the following information (depending on the equipment
installed on the vehicle):
• Time
• Winter tyres
• Language
• Units
• Lights & Vision
• Aux. Heating (auxiliary heating)
• Back
After selecting the menu Back you will reach one level higher in the menu.
Setting clock
Here you can set the time, the time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and
the time change summer/winter time.
Setting for winter tyre speed
Here you can set at which speed a warning signal should sound. These
functions are used for e.g on winter tyres with the permissible maximum
speed less than the maximum speed of the vehicle ⇒ page 266.
When exceeding the speed, the following is displayed on the information
display*:
Speed warning
Language setting
Here you can set in which language the warning and information texts
should be displayed. After selecting the language, e.g. English, the
following is displayed on the information display:
Language: english set
Setting units
Here you can set the units for temperature, consumption and distance
driven.
Setting lights
Here you can switch on or off the function convenience turn signal
⇒ page 68. Furthermore you can set how long the light should stay on for
the function Coming/Leaving Home ⇒ page 66.
After selecting the menu Factory setting the factory setting is established
again.
s24s
.
book
Page
29
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights30
Warning lights
An overview
The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.
Fig. 19 Instrument cluster with warning lights
Turn signal lights (to the left) ⇒ page 32
Turn signal lights (to the right) ⇒ page 32
Main beam ⇒ page 32
Low beam ⇒ page 32
Rear fog light ⇒ page 32
Electronic immobiliser ⇒ page 32
Diesel particle filter (diesel engine) ⇒ page 33
Bulbs ⇒ page 33
s24s
.
book
Page
30
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 31
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• If you do not pay attention to the warning lights coming on and
the corresponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result
in severe body injuries or major vehicle damage.
• The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. There
is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in
the engine compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and
other fluids. It is also essential to observe all warnings ⇒ page 248.
Note
• Arrangement of the indicator lights depends on the model and model
version. The symbols shown in the following functional description are to
be found as indicator lights in the instrument cluster.
• Operational faults are shown in the instrument cluster as red symbols
(priority 1 - danger) or yellow symbols (priority 2 - warning).
Electromechanical power steering ⇒ page 33
Control system for exhaust ⇒ page 34

EPC fault light (petrol engine) ⇒ page 34
Glow plug system (diesel engine) ⇒ page 34
Airbag system ⇒ page 35
Coolant temperature/coolant level ⇒ page 35
Brake pad wear* ⇒ page 36
Fluid level in windshield washer sys-
tem*
⇒ page 36
Fuel reserve ⇒ page 36
Engine oil pressure ⇒ page 37
Bonnet ⇒ page 37
Open door* ⇒ page 37
Engine oil level* ⇒ page 38
Tyre pressure* ⇒ page 38
Selector lever lock* ⇒ page 38
Antilock brake system (ABS) ⇒ page 38
Traction control system (TCS) ⇒ page 39
Electronic stability programme (ESP)* ⇒ page 40
Dynamo ⇒ page 40
Brake system ⇒ page 40
Seat belt warning light* ⇒ page 41
s24s
.
book
Page
31
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights32
Turn signal system 
Either the left or right indicator light flashes depending on the posi-
tion of the turn signal lever.
The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a turn signal light fails.
This does not apply when towing a trailer.
Switching on the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all
of the turn signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash.
Further information about the turn signal system ⇒ page 68.
Main beam
The indicator light comes on when the main beam is selected or also
when the headlight flasher is operated.
Further information about the main beam ⇒ page 68.
Low beam
The indicator light comes on when low beam is selected ⇒ page 63.
The rear fog light
The warning light comes on when the rear fog lights are operating
⇒ page 65.
Electronic immobiliser
Data is compared between the ignition key and the control unit when
switching on the ignition. The indicator light will light up for a few
seconds when ignition key authorisation is confirmed.
The warning light will start flashing continuously if a non-authorised igni-
tion key (for example the wrong ignition key) has been used. The engine
cannot be started ⇒ page 45.
It is only possible to start the engine of the vehicle with a Genuine Škoda
key with the matching code.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Immobilizer active
s24s
.
book
Page
32
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 33
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Diesel particle filter (diesel engine)
In the diesel particle filter the resulting soot particles are
collected and burnt during the combustion of diesel fuel.
Code 7GG on the vehicle data sticker ⇒ fig. 20 indicates that your
vehicle is equipped with a diesel particle filter. The vehicle data
sticker ⇒ page 303, fig. 234 is located on the floor of the luggage
compartment and is also stated in the Service schedule.
The soot particles, which result from the combustion of diesel fuel, are
collected in the diesel particle filter. If the filter is full, the warning light
lights up in the instrument cluster.
The soot particles must be burned in the filter. The combustion is
performed when you are driving at least 60 km/h for 5 to 10 minutes. The
warning light goes out.
If the warning light remains on despite this measure, the following text
appears in the display of the instrument cluster: Engine fault Workshop!.
In this case contact a specialist garage to obtain assistance.
WARNING
Please pay attention to the traffic regulations and speed limits.
Note
It is prohibited to use biofuel and diesel fuel mixture (RME) for vehicles
with diesel engines which are fitted with diesel particle filter.
Bulbs
The warning light comes on for a few seconds after ignition is switched
on and goes out after several seconds.
If the warning light does not go out or comes on when driving, a bulb in the
headlights of the rear parking light or in the brake lights is defective.
The following text e.g will be displayed in the information display*:
Dipped beam front left defective!
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
Electromechanical power steering
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on.
Fig. 20 Vehicle data
sticker
s24s
.
book
Page
33
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights34
If the warning light after switching on the ignition or when driving lights up
continuously, a fault exists in the electromechanical power steering.
• If the yellow warning light lights up, this indicates a partial failure of the
power steering and the steering forces can be greater.
• If the red warning light lights up, this indicates a complete failure of the
power steering and the steering assist has failed (significantly higher
steering forces).
If the red warning light lights up, three peeps sound as an additional
warning signal.
Further information ⇒ page 219, “Electromechanical power steering”.
WARNING
Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.
Note
• If the yellow warning light goes out after starting the engine again
and a short drive, it is not necessary to visit a specialist garage.
• If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the yellow
warning light comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light
must go out after driving a short distance.
Control system for exhaust gases
The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on.
If the warning light does not go out after starting the engine or it lights up
or flashes when driving, a fault exists in an exhaust relevant component.
The engine management system selects an emergency programme
which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a
gentle style of driving.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Emissions workshop!
EPC  fault light (petrol engine)
The  (Electronic Power Control) warning light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched on.
If the warning light  does not go out or lights up after starting the engine,
a fault exists in the engine control. The engine management system
selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the
nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Engine fault Workshop! (Engine fault workshop!)
Glow plug system (diesel engine)
The indicator light lights up for a cold engine when switching on the
igntion (pre-heat position) 2 ⇒ page 139. Start the engine just as soon as
the indicator light goes out.
The glow plug indicator light will come on for about 1 second if the engine
is at a normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is
above +5°C. This means that you can start the engine right away.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the indicator light does not
come on at all or lights up continuously. Contact a specialist garage as
soon as possible to obtain assistance.
s24s
.
book
Page
34
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 35
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
If the warning light begins to flash while driving, a fault exists in the
engine control. The engine management system selects an emergency
programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by
adopting a gentle style of driving.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Engine fault Workshop! (Engine fault workshop!)
Airbag system
Monitoring the airbag system
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on.
There is a fault in the system if the warning light does not go out or comes
on or flashes while driving ⇒ . This also applies if the warning light does
not come on when the ignition is switched on.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Airbag fault!
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically,
when one airbag has been switched off
Front, side or head airbags which have been switched off using the
vehicle system tester:
• The warning light lights up for 4 seconds after switching on the igni-
tion and then flashes again for 12 seconds afterwards in 2 second inter-
vals.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Airbag belt tensioner deactivated!
Front passenger airbags switched off using the switch for front
passenger airbags* in stowage compartment on the front passenger
side:
• The warning light comes on for 4 seconds after the ignition has
been switched on.
• Switching off airbags is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the
lighting up of the indicator light   (airbag switched off)
⇒ page 200.
WARNING
Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist
garage if a fault exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not
being activated in the event of an accident.
Note
Further information about switching off airbags ⇒ page 199.
Coolant temperature/coolant level
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
2)
when the ignition is
switched on.
The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level too low if the
warning light does not go out or flashes while driving.
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.
2)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on
after switching the ignition on, but only if the coolant temperature is too high or the
coolant level is too low.
s24s
.
book
Page
35
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights36
In this case stop and switch the engine off and check the coolant level;
top up the coolant as necessary.
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under
the conditions prevailing to top up with coolant. Keep the engine
switched off and obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage,
otherwise it could lead to severe engine damages.
If the coolant is within the specified range, the increased temperature may
be caused by an operating problem at the coolant fan. Check the fuse for
the coolant fan, replace it if necessary ⇒ page 290, “Fuse assignment in
engine compartment - version 1” or ⇒ page 291, “Fuse assignment in
engine compartment - version 2”.
Do not continue driving if the warning light does not go off although the
fluid is at the correct level and also the fuse of the fan is in proper order.
Contact a specialist garage to obtain assistance.
Please also refer to the additional instructions ⇒ page 253, “Cooling
system”.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
STOP Check coolant! Owner's manual (STOP! Check coolant!
Owner's manual)
WARNING
• If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at
a safe distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch
on the hazard warning light system ⇒ page 68.
• Take care when opening the coolant expansion bottle. If the
engine is hot, the cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding!
It is best to allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap.
• Do not touch the coolant fan The coolant fan may switch on
automatically even if the ignition is off.
Thickness of the brake pads*
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
3)
when the ignition is
switched on.
If the warning light comes on, contact a specialist garage immediately
and have the brake pads on all of the wheels inspected.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Check brake pads!
Windshield washer fluid level*
The warning light comes on when the ignition is switched on if there is
insufficient fluid in the windshield washer system. Top up with liquid
⇒ page 262.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Top up wash fluid!
Fuel reserve
The warning light comes on, if the fuel level is still below 8 litres.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
3)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on
after switching the ignition on, but only if a fault exists.
s24s
.
book
Page
36
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 37
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Please refuel!
Note
The Text in the information display* goes out only after refuelling and
driving a short distance.
Engine oil pressure
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
4)
when the ignition is
switched on.
Stop the vehicle and switch the engine off if the warning light does not
go off after the engine has started or flashes while driving. Check the oil
level and top up with oil as necessary ⇒ page 251.
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under
the conditions prevailing to top up with oil. Keep the engine switched off
and obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it
could lead to severe engine damages.
Do not drive any further if the warning light flashes even if the oil is at
the correct level. Do not run the engine not at idling speed either. Contact
the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
STOP Oil Pressure Engine off! Owner's manual
WARNING
• If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at
a safe distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch
on the hazard warning light system ⇒ page 68.
• The red oil pressure light is not an oil level indicator! One
should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably
after every refueling stop.
Bonnet
The warning light comes on if the bonnet is unlocked.
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The
warning light goes out about 15 seconds after locking the vehicle.
Open door*
The warning light comes on if one or several doors are opened or if the
boot lid is opened.
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display comes on
when switching the ignition off. The warning light goes out about 15
seconds after locking the vehicle.
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display goes out after
switching the ignition off.
4)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on
after switching the ignition on, but only if a fault exists or the engine oil level is too
low.
s24s
.
book
Page
37
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights38
Engine oil level*
Warning light lights up
If the warning light lights up, the quantity of oil in the engine is probably
too low. Check as soon as possible the oil level or top up ⇒ page 251 with
engine oil.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Check oil level!
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30
seconds. If no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come
on again after driving about 100 km.
Warning light flashes
A fault on the engine oil level sensor is indicated additionally by an audible
signal and the warning light coming on several times after the ignition has
been switched on.
In this case have the engine inspected without delay by a specialist
garage.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Oil sensor workshop!
Tyre inflation pressure*
The warning light lights up, if there is a substantial drop in inflation
pressure in one of the tyres. Reduce the speed and check or correct as
soon as possible the inflation pressure in the tyres ⇒ page 264.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Visit the nearest
specialist garage and have the fault rectified.
Further information about tyre pressure-control system ⇒ page 220.
WARNING
• When the warning light lights up, immediately reduce the
speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Please
stop the vehicle without delay at the nearest possible stop and
inspect the tyres and their inflation pressures.
• Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry
or unpaved roads) the warning light can be delayed or does not
light up at all.
Note
If the battery has been disconnected, the warning light comes on after
switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a
short distance.
Selector lever lock*
If the warning light lights up, operate the brake pedal. This is neces-
sary, in order to be able to move the selector lever out of the position P or
N.
Antilock brake system (ABS)
The warning light shows the functionality of the ABS.
s24s
.
book
Page
38
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 39
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition has been
switched on or when starting the engine. The warning light goes out after
an automatic check sequence has been completed.
A fault in the ABS
If the ABS warning light does not go out within a few seconds after
switching on the ignition or does not light up at all or lights up while driving,
the system is not functioning properly and the vehicle will be braked
without the aid of ABS. The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake
system. Visit a specialist garage as quickly as possible and adjust your
style of driving in the meantime since you will not know how great the
damage is.
Three additional warning tones will sound if there is a major fault in the
ABS.
Further information about ABS ⇒ page 218, “Antilock brake system
(ABS)”.
A fault in the entire brake system
If the ABS warning light comes on together with the brake system
warning light (handbrake must be released), there is a fault not only in
the ABS but also in another part of the brake system ⇒ .
WARNING
• If the brake system warning light comes on together with the
ABS warning light stop the vehicle immediately and check the
brake fluid level in the reservoir ⇒ page 256, “Brake fluid”. If the
fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any
further - risk of accident! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain profes-
sional assistance.
• Pay attention to the following instructions ⇒ page 248, “Working
in the engine compartment” before checking the brake fluid level
and opening the bonnet.
• If the brake fluid is at the correct level, the ABS control function
has failed. The rear wheels may then block very rapidly when
braking. In certain circumstances, this can result in the rear end of
the car breaking away - risk of skidding! Drive carefully to the
nearest specilaist garage and have the fault rectified.
Traction control system (TCS)
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on.
The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is acti-
vated.
The warning light will come on and remains on if the TCS is switched off
or if there is a fault in the system.
The fact that the TCS system operates together with the ABS means that
the TCS warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating
properly.
If the warning light comes on immediately after starting the engine, the
TCS system can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the
TCS system can be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off.
If the warning light goes out, the TCS system is fully functional again.
Further information about the TCS ⇒ page 215, “Traction control system
(TCS)”.
WARNING (continued)
s24s
.
book
Page
39
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights40
Note
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light
comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out
after driving a short distance.
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)*
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on.
Components of the ESP system also include the Traction Control System
(TCS), Electronic Differential Lock (EDL), and the Antilock Brake System
(ABS).
The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is acti-
vated.
The warning light will come on and remains on if the ESP is switched off
or if there is a fault in the system.
The fact that the ESP system operates together with the ABS means that
the ESP warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating
properly.
If the warning light comes on immediately after starting the engine, the
ESP system can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the
ESP system can be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off.
If the warning light goes out, the ESP system is fully functional again.
Further information on the ESP ⇒ page 213, “Electronic stability
programme (ESP)*”.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)*
The EDL is a part of the ESP. A fault in the EDL is indicated by the ESP
warning light in the instrument cluster. Have the vehicle inspected without
delay by a Škoda dealer. Further information on the EDL ⇒ page 214,
“Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)*”.
Note
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light
comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out
after driving a short distance.
Dynamo
The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on. It
should go out after the engine has started.
If the warning light does not go out after the engine has started, or comes
on when driving, drive to the nearest specialist garage. The vehicle battery
will be discharged in this case so switch off all non-essential electrical
components.
Caution
If the warning light comes on when driving and in addition the warning
light (cooling system fault) also comes on in display, you must then
stop the car immediately and switch the engine off - risk of engine
damage!
Brake system
The warning light flashes or comes on if the brake fluid level is too low,
if there is a fault in the ABS or if the handbrake is applied.
s24s
.
book
Page
40
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 41
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
If the warning light flashes (handbrake is not applied), stop and check
the brake fluid level ⇒ .
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
STOP Brake fluid Owner's manual
If there is a fault in the ABS which also influences the function of the
normal brake system (e.g. distribution of brake pressure), the ABS
warning light comes on together with the brake system warning light
. Be aware that not only the ABS but also another part of th brake
system is defective ⇒ .
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.
One should get used to high pedal forces, long braking distances and long
free play of the brake pedal when driving to the next specialist garage.
For further information on the brake system ⇒ page 216, “Brakes”.
Handbrake applied
The warning light also comes on if the handbrake is applied. An audible
warning is also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a
speed of more than 6 km/h.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Handbrake on!
WARNING
• Pay attention to the following instructions ⇒ page 248, “Working
in the engine compartment” before checking the brake fluid level
and opening the bonnet.
• If the brake system warning light does not go out a few
seconds after switching on the ignition or comes on when driving,
stop immediately and check the brake fluid in the reservoir
⇒ page 256, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has dropped below the
MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Contact a
Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.
Seat belt warning light*
The warning light comes on after the ignition is switched on as a
reminder to fasten the seat belt. The warning light only goes out if the
driver has fastened his seat belt.
If you do not fasten the seat belt, a long warning signal sounds for 6
seconds.
If you do not fasten the seat belt, a warning signal sounds continuously at
a speed of more than 10 km/h.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Please fasten seatbelt!
For further information on the seat belts ⇒ page 183, “Seat belts”.
WARNING (continued)
s24s
.
book
Page
41
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking42
Unlocking and locking
Keys
The vehicle is supplied with two keys. Depending on the equipment fitted,
your vehicle can be equipped with keys without remote control ⇒ fig. 21;
with keys with light* ⇒ page 43, fig. 23 or with keys with radio remote
control* ⇒ fig. 22.
Key ring
The key ring ⇒ fig. 21 only has the key number on it which is essential for
producing other keys. This number can be used to order replacement
keys from Škoda dealers.
The key ring with the number should be separately and securely kept in
safe keeping since keys can only be replaced if they are lost or damaged
by giving this number. You should also therefore give this key ring to the
purchaser when selling the vehicle.
WARNING
• Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle - even
if it is only for a short time. This is particularly important if children
are left in the vehicle. The children might otherwise start the engine
or operate electrical equipment (e.g. power windows) - risk of
injury!
• Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the
vehicle has come to a stop. The steering lock might otherwise
engage unintentionally - risk of accident!
Caution
• Each key contains electronic components; therefore protect them
against moisture and severe shocks.
Fig. 21 Set of keys
without remote control
Fig. 22 Radiooperated
key
s24s
.
book
Page
42
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking 43
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean as impurities (textile
fibres, dust etc.) have a negative effect on proper operation of the keys
and the ignition lock.
Note
Please approach a Škoda dealer if you lose a key since he can obtain a
new one for you.
Key with light*
Switching on the light
– Press the button in the middle in the direction of arrow .
Replacing battery or bulb
– Insert a coin into the slot (arrow ) and press off the upper
part through a rotary movement of the coin.
– Replace the battery or bulb.
– Place the upper and lower part above each other and press
the parts together.
You can obtain replacement batteries and replacement bulbs at a
specialist garage.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of an old battery in accordance with environmental regulations.
Note
The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original
battery.
Fig. 23 Key with light
A
1
A
2
s24s
.
book
Page
43
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking44
Changing the battery of the radio remote
control
Each radio-operated key contains a battery which is housed in
the cover of the transmitter housing ⇒ fig. 24. We recommend
that you have the batteries of the key replaced by a Škoda dealer.
You should, however, proceed as follows if you wish to replace
the battery yourself:
– Fold open the key.
– Use a thin screwdriver to carefully lever off the front part of the
key ⇒ fig. 24 from the transmitter housing .
– Take off the cover of the transmitter housing ⇒ fig. 25 in direc-
tion of arrow.
– Take the used battery out of the housing cover.
– Insert the new battery. Ensure that the “+” symbol on the
battery is facing downwards. The correct polarity is also
shown on the cover of the transmitter housing.
– Insert cover with battery in place at the rear of the transmitter
housing and press both parts together.
– Insert the transmitter housing into the front part of the key so
that the two parts lock into each other.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of an old battery in accordance with environmental regulations.
Note
• The replacement battery must have the same specification as the orig-
inal battery.
Fig. 24 Disconnect key
with radio remote
control
Fig. 25 Cover of the
transmitter housing
A
B
A
A
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
44
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking 45
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• If it is still not be possible to unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote
control even after replacing the battery this means that the system has to
be synchronised ⇒ page 53.
Electronic immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser prevents the vehicle being
operated by an unauthorised person.
An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is
deactivated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition
lock. The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when you with-
draw the ignition key from the lock.
Note
It is only possible to start the engine of your car with a Genuine Škoda key
with the matching code ⇒ page 32.
Child safety locks
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being
opened from the inside.
The rear doors are equipped with a child safety lock. You can
switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.
Switching child safety lock on
– Use the vehicle key to turn the slit in the rear door to the left in
the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 26.
Switching child safety lock off
– Use the vehicle key to turn the slit to the right against the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Fig. 26 Child safety
locks on the rear doors
s24s
.
book
Page
45
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking46
So long as the child safety lock is switched on it is not possible to open the
door from the inside with the door opening lever. In this case the door can
be opened only from the outside.
Central locking system
Description
Unlocking or locking the vehicle causes all the doors and the fuel filler
flap* to be unlocked or locked at the same time by the central locking
system. The boot lid is unlocked when opening. It can be opened by
pressing the hand grip above the licence plate ⇒ page 50, fig. 30.
Operation of the central locking system is possible:
• from the outside using the vehicle key ⇒ page 47,
• using the buttons for the central locking system ⇒ page 48,
• by using the remote control ⇒ page 52.
Indicator light in the driver's door on vehicles without anti-theft
alarm system
After the car is locked, the indicator light flashes after 2 seconds.
After the car is locked with the deactivated safe securing system, the indi-
cator light flashes only after 30 seconds.
Indicator light in the driver's door on vehicles with anti-theft alarm
system
After locking the vehicle the indicator light flashes for 2 seconds fast, then
more slowly.
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system ⇒ page 47 is not oper-
ating, the indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast,
goes out and starts to flash slowly after about 30 seconds.
If the indicator light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds, afterwards
lights up for about 30 seconds and then flashes slowly, there is a fault in
the system of the central locking or the interior monitor* ⇒ page 55.
Contact a specialist garage to obtain assistance.
Convenience operation of windows
One can open and close the electrically powered windows when unlocking
and locking the vehicle ⇒ page 58, “Convenience operation of windows”.
Opening a single door*
This function allows one to just unlock the driver's door. The other doors
and the fuel filler flap* remain locked and are only unlocked after repetitive
unlocking.
If you wish, you can have your Škoda Dealer activate the function of the
single door opening mode.
Automatic locking*
All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car
reaches a speed of about 15 km/h.
If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked
again. In addition, it is possible for the driver to unlock the car by pressing
the central locking button or by pulling the door opening lever.
If you wish, your Škoda Dealer can activate the function of the automatic
locking mode.
WARNING
Locking the doors prevents involuntary opening in an exceptional
situation (an accident). Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into
the vehicle from outside, for example at road crossings. Locked
doors do, however, make it more difficult for rescuers to get into
the vehicle in an emergency - danger to life!
s24s
.
book
Page
46
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking 47
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
• In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the
locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to
gain access to the vehicle.
• Only the front doors can be unlocked and locked using the key if the
central locking system fails. You can lock or unlock manually the other
doors and the boot lid.
− Emergency locking of the door ⇒ page 49.
− Emergency unlocking of the boot lid ⇒ page 51.
Safe securing
The central locking system is equipped with a safe securing system.
Locking the vehicle from the outside causes the door locks to be automat-
ically blocked. It is not possible to open the doors with the door handle
either from the inside or from the outside. This acts as an effective deter-
rent for attempts to break into your vehicle.
You can deactivate the safe securing system. This is done by locking the
vehicle with the key or radio-operated key twice within 2 seconds.
If the safe securing system is not operating:
• the indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast,
goes out and starts to flash slowly after about 30 seconds,
• is the fuel filler flap unlocked.
The safe securing system is again activated the next time the vehicle is
unlocked and locked again.
The doors can be opened from the inside if the vehicle is locked and the
safe securing system is deactivated:
• the door is unlocked by actuating the door-opening lever,
• the door opens upon actuating the door-opening lever again.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing
system is activated, there must not be any person and animals in
the vehicle as it is then not possible to open either a door or a
window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for
rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
Note
The anti-theft alarm system* is also activated with the deactivated safe
securing system when locking the vehicle. The interior monitor* is
however not activated.
Unlocking the vehicle using the key
Fig. 27 Turning the
key for unlocking and
locking the vehicle
s24s
.
book
Page
47
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking48
– Turn the key in the lock of the driver's door to the left into the
opening position ⇒ page 47, fig. 27.
– Pull on the door handle and open the door.
• All the doors (only the driver's door on vehicles with anti-theft alarm
system) and the fuel filler flap* are unlocked.
• The boot lid is then unlocked.
• The switched on interior lights come on over the door contact.
• The safe securing system is deactivated.
• The windows are opened provided the key is held in the opening posi-
tion*. On vehicles fitted with anti-theft alarm system the window operation
is only possible 45 seconds after deactivation of the warning system.
• The indicator light in the driver's door stops flashing if the vehicle is not
fitted with an anti-theft alarm system* ⇒ page 54.
Note
If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system*, you must
unlock the vehicle by inserting the key into the driver door you then have
to insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15
seconds after opening the door. The alarm will be triggered if you do not
switch on the ignition within 15 seconds.
Closing the vehicle with the key
– Turn the key in the lock of the driver door to the right into the
closing position ⇒ page 47, fig. 27.
• The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap* are locked.
• The switched on interior lights will switch off over the door contact.
• The windows and the electric sliding/tilting roof* are closed provided
the key is held in the locking position.
• The safe securing system is activated immediately.
• The indicator light in the driver door begins flashing.
Note
The opened driver door cannot be locked. It must be locked separately
after closing it.
Buttons for central locking
If the vehicle was not locked from outside, you can also unlock
and lock it with the rocker switch on the centre console without
the ignition switched on.
A
A
A
B
Fig. 28 Centre
console: Buttons for
central locking
s24s
.
book
Page
48
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking 49
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Locking all doors and the boot lid
– Press button ⇒ page 48, fig. 28. The symbol
in the button
comes on.
Unlocking all doors and the boot lid
– Press button ⇒ page 48, fig. 28. The symbol
goes out in
the button.
The following applies if you have locked your vehicle using the button :
• It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside
(safety feature, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.).
• You can unlock the doors individually from the inside and open them
by pulling the door opening lever.
• If the driver door is opened, it cannot be locked, in order to avoid inad-
vertently being locked out of the vehicle You then have to lock a door
separately after closing it.
• In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the
locked doors are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable
rescuers to gain access to the vehicle.
If the ignition is switched off, you can conveniently close or open the
windows by pressing and holding the button or ⇒ page 58.
WARNING
The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched
off. All the doors and the boot lid are locked. Children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle since it is difficult to provide
assistance from the outside when the doors are locked. Locked
doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an
emergency - hazard!
Note
The door opening lever and the buttons for the central locking system do
not operate if the safe securing system is activated.
Emergency locking of the doors
An emergency locking mechanism is located on the rear side of
the doors which have no locking cylinder; it is only visible after
opening the door.
Locking
– Remove the panel ⇒ fig. 29.
– Insert the key into the opening under the panel and press the
stopping lever as far as the stop toward the inside.
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
1
A
2
Fig. 29 Rear door:
Emergency locking of
the door
A
A
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
49
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking50
– Re-insert the panel.
After closing the door, you can no longer open it from outside. If the child
safety lock is not switched on, it is possible to open the door from the
inside by pulling twice on the door handle. If the child safety lock is
switched on, it is necesary to also open the door from outside besides
pulling twice on the inner door handle.
Boot lid
Open the boot lid by pressing the hand grip above the licence
plate after unlocking the vehicle using the key or the radio remote
control.
Opening the boot lid
– Press on the handle ⇒ fig. 30 and at the same time raise the
boot lid.
Closing the boot lid
– Pull the boot lid down and close it with a slight swing ⇒ .
A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner paneling
of the boot lid.
WARNING
• Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot
lid. Otherwise, the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even
if the boot lid lock is closed - risk of accident!
• Never drive with the boot lid slightly ajar or even fully opened
otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle -
risk of poisoning!
• Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, it
could crack - risk of injury!
Note
• After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within
2 seconds and the anti-theft alarm system* is activated. This applies
only if the vehicle was locked before closing the boot lid.
• The function of the hand grip above the licence plate is deactivated
when starting off or at a speed of more than 5 km/hour for vehicles with
central locking. The function of the hand grip is activated again when the
vehicle has stopped and a door is opened.
Fig. 30 Handle of boot
lid
s24s
.
book
Page
50
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking 51
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid (Octavia)
If there is a fault in the central locking, you can open the boot lid
as follows:
– Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ page 89.
– Take out the warning triangle* ⇒ fig. 31.
– Press the operating lever in the direction of arrow in order to
unlock the boot lid. The operating lever is located under the
panel .
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door from outside.
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid (Estate car)
If there is a fault in the central locking, you can open the boot lid
as follows:
– Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ page 89.
– Open up the cover of the lock upwards ⇒ fig. 32.
– Move the operating lever with the aid of a narrow object
e.g. screwdriver up to the stop in the direction of arrow; the
boot lid is then unlocked.
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door from outside.
Fig. 31 Emergency
unlocking of the boot
lid
A
A
A
B
Fig. 32 Emergency
unlocking of the boot
lid
A
A
s24s
.
book
Page
51
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking52
Remote control*
Description
You can use the remote control:
• to unlock and lock the car,
• unlocking boot lid,
• Opening and closing window.
The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the master key.
The receiver is located in the interior of the car. The operating range of the
remote control is 10 metres but this range can be reduced if the batteries
are waek.
The master key has a fold-open key bit which can be used for unlocking
and locking the car manually and also for starting the engine.
If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or a new
unit installed, it is then necessary for a Škoda Dealer to initialise the
system. Only after this is it possible to again use the remote control.
Note
• The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is
switched on.
• The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by
interference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the
same frequency range (e.g. mobile phone, TV transmitter).
• The battery must be replaced, ideally by the Škoda dealer, if the
central locking or anti-theft alarm system does react to the remote control
at less than 3 metres away.
Unlocking and locking car
Unlocking the vehicle
– Press button for about 1 second.
Locking the vehicle
– Press button for about 1 second.
Deactivating safe securing system
– Press button twice in 2 seconds. Further information
⇒ page 47.
Boot lid remote release
– Press button for about 2 seconds ⇒ fig. 33. Further infor-
mation ⇒ page 50.
Fig. 33 Radio-oper-
ated key
A
1
A
3
A
3
A
2
s24s
.
book
Page
52
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking 53
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Folding out of the key
– Press button .
Folding up of the key
– Press button and collapse the key bit in the housing.
The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been
unlocked. The vehicle will lock again automatically if you unlock the
vehicle using button but do not open a door or the boot lid within the
next 30 seconds. This function is intended to prevent the car being
unlocked unintentionally.
In addition, when the car is unlocked, the power seats and exterior
mirrors* move into the position assigned to this key. The stored setting of
driver seat and exterior mirrors is retrieved.
The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been
correctly locked. If the turn signal lights do not flash, check the doors,
bonnet and boot lid again to ensure that they are closed. If the doors, the
bonnet or the boot lid remain open when the anti-theft alarm system is
activated, the turn signal lights do not flash until after they have been
closed.
When the vehicle is unlocked or locked, the interior lights in the door
contact are automatically switched on or off.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing
system is activated, there must not be any person in the vehicle as
it is then not possible to open either a door or a window from the
inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get
into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
Note
• Operate the radio remote control only when the doors and boot lid are
closed and you have visual contact with the vehicle.
• Once in the car, you must not press the lock button of the radio
remote control before inserting the key into the ignition lock in order to
avoid the car being inadvertently locked and, in addition, the anti-theft
alarm system* being switched on. Should this happen, press the unlock
button of the radio remote control.
Synchonisation of the remote control
If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system
then it is possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle
are no longer synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the radio-
operated key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative
range of the equipment or the battery on the remote control was replaced.
This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows:
• Press any button on the remote control.
• Pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key
within 1 minute.
A
4
A
4
A
1
s24s
.
book
Page
53
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking54
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description
The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against
people seeking to break into the vehicle. The system triggers audible and
visual warning signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
How is the alarm system activated?
The anti-theft alarm system is activated automatically when the vehicle is
locked with the key on the closed driver's door or by using the radio
remote control. It is activated 30 seconds after closing the door.
How is the alarm system deactivated?
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated if the vehicle is unlocked by
only using the radio remote control. The vehicle is automatically locked
again if the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds after reactivating the
anti-theft alarm system.
Once you unlock the vehicle by inserting the key into the driver door you
then have to insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on
within 15 seconds after opening the door in order to deactivate the anti-
theft alarm system. The alarm will be triggered if you do not switch on
the ignition within 15 seconds.
When is the alarm triggered?
The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored:
• Bonnet,
• Boot lid,
• Doors,
• Ignition lock,
• Angle of the vehicle* ⇒ page 55,
• Vehicle interior* ⇒ page 55,
• A drop in voltage of the on-board power supply.
An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is
disconnected while the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
How is the alarm switched off?
You switch the alarm off if you unlock the car with the radio remote control
in the key or if you switch the ignition on.
Note
• The working life of the alarm siren is 6 years. More detailed information
is available from your Škoda dealer.
• Before leaving the car, check that all the doors, windows and the elec-
tric sliding/tilting roof* are properly closed in order to ensure that the anti-
theft alarm system is fully operational.
• Coding of the radio remote control and the receptor part precludes the
use of the radio remote control from other vehicles.
s24s
.
book
Page
54
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking 55
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Interior monitor*
The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and
then triggers the alarm.
You must switch the interior monitor off if, for example, a child or
an animal inside the car might trigger the alarm.
Deactivation of interior monitor
– Switch off the ignition.
– Open the driver door.
– Press the button
at the centre colum on the driver side
⇒ fig. 34, the symbol
lights up in the button.
– Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
The interior monitor is switched on again automatically the next time the
car is locked.
Note
• You can also switch off the interior monitor, by deactivating the safe
securing system ⇒ page 47.
• The version of the button can differ depending on the equipment
installed in the vehicle.
Towing protection monitoring*
The towing protection monitoring should be switched off, if the
vehicle is transported (e.g. by rail or by ship) or should be towed.
Switching off the towing protection monitoring
– Switch off the ignition.
Fig. 34 Interior
monitor pushbutton
Fig. 35 Button for the
towing protection
monitoring
s24s
.
book
Page
55
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking56
– Open the driver door.
– Press the button
at the centre colum on the driver side
⇒ page 55, fig. 35, the symbol
lights up in the button.
– Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
The interior monitor is switched on again automatically the next time the
car is locked.
Power windows*
Buttons on the driver's door
The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on.
Opening a window
– A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective
button in the door. The process stops when one releases the
button.
– Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully
opened) by pressing the button up to the stop. Renewed
pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately.
Closing a window
– A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective
button in the door. The closing process stops when one
releases the button.
– Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully
closed) by pulling the button up to the stop. Renewed pulling
of the button causes the window to stop immediately.
The button for the individual windows is located in the armrest of the
driver's door ⇒ fig. 36, front passenger door and in the rear doors*
⇒ page 57, fig. 37.
Buttons for the power window in the armrest of the driver's door
Button for the power window in the driver's door
Button for the power window in the front passenger's door
Button for the power window in the rear door on the right*
Button for the power window in the rear door on the left*
Safety pushbutton*
Fig. 36 Buttons on the
driver's door
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
S
s24s
.
book
Page
56
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking 57
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Safety pushbutton*
You can deactivate the buttons for the rear doors using the safety button
⇒ page 56, fig. 36. The buttons for power windows at rear doors are
activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton again.
If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated, the indicator light in
the safety switch lights up.
WARNING
• If you lock the vehicle from the outside, do not leave any person
in the vehicle since it is no longer possible to open the windows
from the inside in an emergency.
• The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 58. The closing
process will be stop if an obstruction is detected and the window
will open again. You should nevertheless take particular care when
closing the windows! A person may otherwise suffer severe inju-
ries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the
window!
• It is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power
windows in the rear doors (safety pushbutton) ⇒ page 56, fig. 36
when children are being transported on the rear seats.
Note
• After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the
windows for a further 10 minutes. The automatic window closing will not
operate during this time. The power windows are switched off completely
once you open the driver or front passenger door.
• When driving, use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation
system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are
opened, dust and other dirt can get into the vehicle. The wind noise is
more at certain speeds.
Switches in front passenger door and in rear doors
A switch for the relevant window is provided in these doors.
Opening a window
– Lightly press the appropriate switch down and hold it until the
window has moved into the desired position.
– Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully
opened) by pressing the switch down up to the stop.
Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop
immediately.
Closing a window
– Lightly press the appropriate switch up and hold it until the
window has moved into the desired position.
A
S
A
S
A
S
A
S
Fig. 37 Position of
switch in front
passenger door
s24s
.
book
Page
57
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking58
– Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully
closed) by pressing the switch up up to the stop. Renewed
pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately.
WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 58. The closing
process will be stop if an obstruction is detected and the window
will open again. You should then take particular care when closing
the windows! A person may otherwise suffer severe injuries as a
result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the window!
Note
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the
windows for a further 10 minutes. The automatic closing and opening
functions will not operate during this time. The power windows are
switched off completely once you open the driver or front passenger
door.
Force limiter of the power windows
The electrically operated power windows are fitted with a force limiter. It
reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window
goes down by several centimeters.
You must try to close the window again within 10 seconds, even if the
obstacle was not yet removed, the closing process is stopped. During this
time it is not possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter
is still switched on.
The force limiter is only switched off, if you attempt to close the window
within the next 10 seconds - the window closes now with full strength!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.
WARNING
You should take particular care when closing the windows! A
person may otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting
an arm, for example, jammed in the window!
Convenience operation of windows
You can open and close the electrically powered windows as
follows when unlocking and locking the vehicle (just closing of the
sliding roof).
Opening a window
– Turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the opening
position or press the opening button of the radio remote
control until all the windows are open.
Closing a window
– Turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the closing posi-
tion or press the closing button of the radio remote control until
all the windows are closed.
You can interrupt the opening or closing operation of the windows imme-
diately by releasing the key or the closing button.
s24s
.
book
Page
58
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking 59
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 58. The closing
process will be stop if an obstruction is detected and the window
will open again. You should then take particular care when closing
the windows! A person may otherwise suffer severe injuries as a
result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the window!
Note
• On vehicles fitted with anti-theft alarm system the convenience
window opening is possible by means of the key in the lock only 45
seconds after deactivating the warning system or after activating the anti-
theft alarm system.
Operational problems
Automatic closing or opening does not operate
If the battery of the car has been disconnected and then reconnected, the
automatic closing and opening function does not operate. The system
must be activated. Proceed as follows in order to re-establish the function:
• Turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the closing position and
hold it there until all of the windows are closed.
• Release the key.
• Insert the key again and turn it to the closing position for about 3
seconds.
Operation in winter
Ice accumulating on the surface of the windows during the winter may
result in a greater resistance when closing the windows and the window
may stop and move back several centimetres
Proceed as follows to close the window fully:
• Turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the closing position and
hold it there until all of the windows are closed.
• Repeat this operatiive cycle when the window stops.
WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 58. The closing
process will be stop if an obstruction is detected and the window
will open again. You should then take particular care when closing
the windows! A person may otherwise suffer severe injuries as a
result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the window!
Electric sliding/tilting roof*
Description
Fig. 38 Control dial for
the power sliding/tilting
roof
s24s
.
book
Page
59
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking60
The sliding/tilting roof is operated by means of the control dial ⇒ page 59,
fig. 38 and only functions when the ignition is switched on. The control dial
has a number of fixed positions.
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the
sliding/tilting roof for a further 10 minutes. It is no longer possible to
operate the sliding/tilting roof after opening or closing one of the front
doors, however.
Note
• If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible
that the sliding/tilting roof does not close fully. Here you have to set the
control dial to the switch position and press it forward for about 10
seconds.
• It is necessary after each emergency operation (using crank handle)
to move the sliding/tilting roof into the basic position. Here you have to set
the control dial to the switch position and press it forward for about 10
seconds.
Opening and tilting
Comfort position
– Turn the switch to position ⇒ page 59, fig. 38.
Opening roof fully
– Turn the switch to position and hold it in this position
(spring-tensioned position).
Tilting roof
– Turn the switch to position .
The wind noise in the comfort position is less than when the roof is fully
opened.
The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open.
You can slide the sun screen into the opened or closed position by hand
when the sliding/tilting roof is closed.
Caution
It may be necessary during winter to remove any ice and snow in the area
of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it in order to prevent damaging the
opening mechanism.
Closing
Sliding closed/closing the sliding/tilting roof
– Turn the switch to position ⇒ page 59, fig. 38.
Safety closing
The sliding/tilting roof is equipped with an overload protection system. If
an obstacle (e.g. ice) prevents closing, the sliding/tilting roof stops and
opens completely. You can close the sliding/tilting roof completely without
overload protection by pressing the switch to the position ⇒ page 59,
fig. 38 at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding/tilting roof to shut
completely ⇒ .
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury!
A
A
A
A
A
C
A
B
A
D
A
A
A
A
s24s
.
book
Page
60
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking 61
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Convenience operation
You can also close an open sliding/tilting roof from the outside.
– Turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the closing posi-
tion or press the closing button of the radio remote control until
the sliding/tilting roof is closed ⇒ .
The closing process stops when one releases the key or the closing
button.
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury! The overload
protection system does not function with the convenience
closing.
Emergency operation
You can close the sliding/tilting roof by hand if the system is
defect.
Fig. 39 Detail of the
headliner: point for
positioning screw-
driver
Fig. 40 Detail of the
headliner: Emergency
operation
s24s
.
book
Page
61
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Unlocking and locking62
– Position the flat blade of a screwdriver carefully against the
rear edge of the cover of the power roof drive ⇒ page 61,
fig. 39.
– Pull the cover down.
– Take the crank handle out of the inside of the cover.
– Press the crank handle fully into the hexagon hole
⇒ page 61, fig. 40.
– Hold the crank pressed and turn it - the roof closes.
– Insert the crank handle into the cover again.
– Press on the cover again by first of all inserting the plastic lugs
and then pushing the cover up.
– Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
Note
It is necessary after each emergency operation (using crank handle) to
move the sliding/tilting roof into the basic position. Here you have to press
the control dial forward to switch position ⇒ page 59, fig. 38 for about
10 seconds.
A
1
A
2
A
A
s24s
.
book
Page
62
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility 63
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Lights and Visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on side lights
– Turn the light switch into position 0.
Switching on the low beam and main beam
– Turn the light switch into position
.
– Press the main beam lever forward in order to switch on the
main beam ⇒ page 68, fig. 47.
Switching off all lights
– Turn the light switch into position.
Low beam comes on only if the ignition is switched on. After switching off
the ignition, the low beam is switched off automatically and only the side
lights come on.
On models fitted with right-hand steering the position of certain switches
differs from that shown in ⇒ fig. 41. The symbols which mark the switch
positions are identical, however.
In certain countries, the low beam is on a reduced brightness as well as
the side lights, when the ignition is switched on.
WARNING
Never drive with side lights on - risk of accident! The side lights are
not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or
to be seen by other oncoming traffic. In this case, always switch on
the low beam when it is dark or if visibilty is poor.
Note
• An audible warning will sound if you withdraw the ignition key and open
the driver's door when the vehicle lights are still on.
• The acoustic warning signal is switched off over the door contact when
the driver's door is closed (ignition off). The vehicle can be parked with the
side lights on.
• If you park the car for a lengthy period, we recommend switching off
all lights, or leaving only the side lights switched on.
Fig. 41 Dash panel:
Light switch
s24s
.
book
Page
63
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility64
• The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in
accordance with the legal requirements.
• If a fault occurs in the light switch, the low beam comes on automati-
cally
• In the event of cool or humid weather conditons, the headlights can be
misted up from inside.
− The temperature difference between interior and external area of
the headlight lenses is decisive.
− When the driving lights are switched on, the light outlet surfaces are
free from mist after a short period. The headlight lenses can possibly
mist up at the border areas.
− It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights.
− This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system.
Automatic driving lamp control*
Switching on automatic driving lamp control*
– Turn the light switch ⇒ page 63, fig. 41 into position
.
Switching off automatic driving lamp control*
– Turn the light switch into position 0.
If the light comes on when the driving lamp control is switched on, the side
lights and low beam as well as licence plate light light up at the same time.
You can also switch on the side lights, fog lights and rear fog light with the
light switch .
If the automatic driving lamp control* is switched on, the light is controlled
by a light sensor in the mount of the interior rear mirror. If the light intensity
drops below the set value, e.g when driving during the day into a tunnel,
the low beam and the side lights as well as the licence plate light come on
automatically. If the light intensity increases again, the lights switch off
automatically.
Motorway lights
If the automatic driving lamp control* has been switched on and the
vehicle speed is over 140 km/h for at least 10 seconds, the side lights and
low beam are switched on automatically.
If the vehicle speed is below 65 km/h for at least 2 minutes, the lights are
switched off.
Rain lights
If you move the windshield wiper lever in the position slow wipe for more
than 5 seconds, the side lights and low beam are automatically switched
on. The light is switched off when the windshield wiper lever is no longer
than 4 minutes in the position for slow or intermittent wipe.
Fig. 42 Dash panel:
Light switch
s24s
.
book
Page
64
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility 65
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
The automatic driving lamp control only operates as a support. The
driver is not released from his responsibility to inspect the light
and if necessary to switch on the light depending on the light
conditions. The light sensor cannot detect for example rain or
snow. Always switch on the low beam under these conditions
as well as when driving in the dark!
Note
• Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not
impair its function or put it out of operation.
• The same principles as for using the automatic driving lamp control
also apply to the light which is switched on manually ⇒ page 63.
Fog lights*
Switching on the fog lights
– First of all turn the light switch ⇒ fig. 43 into position
or .
– After this pull the light switch out to the first detent .
When the fog lights are operating, the symbol next to the light switch is
illuminated more intensely.
The rear fog light
Switching on the rear fog light
– First of all turn the light switch ⇒ fig. 43 into position
or .
– Pull the light switch out to the second detent .
The rear fog light warning light ⇒ page 30 lights up in the instrument
cluster when the fog light is switched off.
Only the rear fog light of the trailer lights up automatically when you are
towing a trailer using a factory-fitted towing device which is fitted with
the rear fog light.
The rear fog light is located in the rear light array on the driver's side.
Caution
The rear fog light should only be switched on if visibility is particularly poor
(conform with any varying legal provisions) to avoid dazzling vehicles
behind your vehicle.
Fig. 43 Dash panel:
Light switch
A
1
A
2
s24s
.
book
Page
65
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility66
Coming/Leaving Home Function*
This function makes it possible to switch on the lights for a short
time after leaving the vehicle or when approaching the vehicle.
Switching on Coming Home Function
– Switch off the ignition once the low beam is switched on.
– Leave the light switch in the position for low beam
.
– Close all the doors and the boot lid.
Switching on Leaving Home Function
– Unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control - the lights
come on.
Depending on equipment fitted the function Coming/Leaving Home
switches on the following lights:
• Parking lights,
• Low beam,
• Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors,
• Licence plate light.
Coming Home Function
The function Coming Home is only switched on, if the low beam was
switched on when the ignition is on.
The lights go out 80 seconds after closing all the doors and the boot lid.
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the lights go out 80 seconds after
switching off the ignition.
The light switch remains in the position for low beam also after switching
off the Coming Home Function, all lights are automatically switched off.
On vehicles fitted with automatic driving lamp control you can also switch
the light switch in the position ⇒ page 63, fig. 41. The function Coming
Home is controlled with the light sensor in the mount of the interior rear
mirror. If the light intensity is higher than the set value of the light sensor,
the Coming Home Function is not switched on after switching off the igni-
tion.
Leaving Home Function
The function Leaving Home is controlled with the light sensor in the mount
of the interior rear mirror. If the light intensity is higher than the set value
of the light sensor, the Leaving Home Function is not switched on after
unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control.
After unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control, the lights come
on for 80 seconds. The Leaving Home Function is also switched off after
the ignition is switched on and after locking the vehicle.
If no door is opened within 30 seconds, the lights go out and the vehicle
is locked automatically.
Note
• If the Coming/Leaving Home Function is switched on constantly, the
battery will be heavily discharged particularly in short-haul traffic.
• The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in
accordance with the legal requirements.
• For vehicles fitted with fog lights you can change the illumination
period of the Coming/Leaving Home Function by means of the information
display* ⇒ page 28.
s24s
.
book
Page
66
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility 67
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Instrument lighting*
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting.
Instrument lighting
– Switch on the light.
– Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 44 to the desired intensity of the
instrument lighting
5)
.
Headlight range adjustment
Once the low beam is switched on you can then adapt the
range of the headlights to the load of the vehicle.
– Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 45 until you have adjusted the low
beam so that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Settings
The positions correspond approximately to the following vehicle loads:
Front seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compartment laden.
Driver seat occupied, luggage compartment laden.
Caution
Set the headlight beam adjustment in such a way as to avoid dazzling
oncoming traffic.
5)
On the information display* ⇒ page 23 the intensity of the lighting is automatically
set. The setting using the control dial ⇒ fig. 44 is only possible when driving in the
dark.
Fig. 44 Dash panel:
Instrument lighting
Fig. 45 Dash panel:
Lights and Visibility
A
-
A
1
A
2
A
3
s24s
.
book
Page
67
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility68
Note
Headlights fitted with Xenon bulbs* adapt automatically to the load and
driving state of the vehicle (e.g. accelerating, braking) when the ignition is
switched on and when driving.
Switch for hazard warning lights
– Press switch ⇒ fig. 46 to switch the hazard warning light
system on or off.
All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the
hazard warning light system is switched on. The indicator light for the turn
signals and the indicator light in the switch also flash at the same time.
You can also switch on the hazard warning light system if the ignition is
switched off.
The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically if an airbag
is deployed in the event of an accident.
Please comply with any legal requirements when using the hazard
warning light system.
Note
Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example:
• you encounter traffic congestion,
• your vehicle breaks down or an emergency situation occurs.
Turn signal and main beam lever
The parking lights and headlight flasher are also switched
on and off using the turn signal and main beam lever.
Fig. 46 Dash panel:
Switch for hazard
warning lights
Fig. 47 Turn signal
and main beam lever
s24s
.
book
Page
68
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility 69
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The turn signal and main beam lever perform the following func-
tions:
Right
and left turn signal light
– Push the lever upwards or downwards ⇒ page 68, fig. 47.
– If you only wish to flash three times* (the so-called conven-
ience turn signal), push the lever briefly up to the upper or
lower pressure point and release it.
– Turn signal for changing lanes, in order to only flash briefly -
move the lever up or down to the pressure point and hold it in
this position.
Main beam
– Switch on the low beam.
– Push the lever forwards.
– Pull the lever back into the initial position in order to switch the
main beam off again.
Headlight flasher
– Pull on the lever of the steering wheel (sprung position) - the
main beam and warning light in the instrument cluster come
on.
Parking light
– Switch off the ignition.
– Push the lever up or down - the right-hand or left-hand parking
light is switched on.
Information concerning the function of the lights.
• The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched
on. The corresponding indicator light or in the instrument cluster also
flashes.
• The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve.
• The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb of the turn
signal light fails.
• The side light and rear light on the appropriate side of the vehicle are
switched on when the parking light is selected. The parking light function
only operates if the ignition is switched off.
• An acoustic warning signal will sound when the driver's door is opened
if the lever is not in the middle position after removing the ignition key. The
acoustic warning signal will stop just as soon as the driver's door is closed.
Caution
Use main beam or the headlight flasher only if this does not risk dazzling
other road users.
Note
• Use only in accordance with the legal requirements the described
lighting and signal systems.
s24s
.
book
Page
69
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility70
Interior lighting
Front interior lighting and lighting of storage
compartment on front passenger side
Switching the interior light on
– Press the switch to the left, the symbol
⇒ fig. 48
appears.
Switching the interior light off
– Press the switch into the middle position O.
– On the version without reading lights press the switch to
the right, the symbol O appears.
Door contact setting
– Press the switch to the right, the symbol
appears.
– On the version without reading lights press the switch into
the middle position
.
Reading lights*
– Press on one of the switches in order to switch the right or
left reading light on or off.
Lighting of storage compartment on the front passenger
side*
– When opening the flap of the storage compartment on the
front passenger side the lighting in the storage compartment
comes on.
– The light switches on automatically when the parking light is
switched on and goes out when the flap is closed.
The interior light comes on as soon as you unlock the car or open a door
or when the ignition key has been removed. The light goes out again
about 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed. The interior
lighting is switched off when you lock the car or switch the ignition on. This
only applies when the switch for the corresponding interior lights is
standing on the door contact setting.
The interior lighting goes off after about 10 minutes when a door has been
left open in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle.
If the switch is in the position O (permanent lights), the interior lighting
goes off at the latest after 30 minutes in order to avoid discharging the
battery of the vehicle.
Note
We recommend having these bulbs replaced by a specialist garage.
Fig. 48 Detail of the
headliner: front interior
lighting
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
70
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility 71
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Rear interior lighting*
The rear interior lighting ⇒ fig. 49 is actuated by moving the switch to the
symbol , O or to the middle position .
The same principles apply for the interior lighting at the rear as for the inte-
rior lighting at the front ⇒ page 70.
Note
We recommend having the bulb replaced by a specialist garage.
Front door warning light*
The warning light is located in the door trim panel below ⇒ fig. 50.
The warning light goes on every time the door is opened. The light goes
out about 10 minutes after opening the door in order to avoid discharging
the battery of the vehicle.
There is a reflector installed on some vehicles instead of the warning
light.
Luggage compartment light*
The lighting comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened. The
luggage compartment lighting will switch off again automatically if the boot
lid remains open for more than about 30 minutes.
Fig. 49 Roof liner light
at the rear
Fig. 50 Front door:
Warning light
s24s
.
book
Page
71
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility72
Entry lighting*
The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror.
The light beam is directed towards the entry area of the front door.
The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the
boot lid. The light goes out after switching on the ignition or up to 30
seconds after closing all the doors, the bonnet and the boot lid.
If a door, the bonnet or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out within
2 minutes if the ignition is switched off.
WARNING
If the entry light comes on, do not touch its cover - risk of burns!
Visibility
Rear window heater
– You can switch the rear window heater on or off by pressing
the switch
⇒ fig. 51 - the indicator light in the switch comes
on or goes out.
The rear window heater only operates when the engine is running.
The rear window heater switches off automatically after 10 minutes.
For the sake of the environment
You should switch off the rear window heater as soon as the rear window
is clear. The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on
fuel economy ⇒ page 227, “Saving electricity”.
Fig. 51 Switch for rear
window heater
s24s
.
book
Page
72
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility 73
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
• The position and the shape of the switch can differ depending on
equipment installed in the vehicle.
• If the on-board voltage drops, the rear window heater is switched off
automatically, in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine
control.
Sun visors
You can pull the sun visor for the driver or front passenger out of the fixture
and swivel it toward the door in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 52.
The vanity mirrors* in the sun visors are provided with covers. Push the
cover in direction of arrow .
WARNING
The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the
deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-
point pens etc. are attached to them. This might result in injuries to
the occupants if the head airbag is deployed.
Fig. 52 Sun visor:
swivelling out
A
1
A
2
s24s
.
book
Page
73
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility74
Sun screen*
The sun screen is located in a housing on the luggage compart-
ment cover. If required, you can remove the housing with the sun
screen from the luggage compartment cover.
Unrolling
– Pull the sun screen at the loop and hang it in the brackets
⇒ fig. 53.
Rolling up
– Take the sun screen out of the brackets and hold it at the
loop so that it can roll up slowly and without damage into
the housing on the luggage compartment cover.
Removing
– Unhook the fastening elements from the luggage compart-
ment cover .
– Roll up the sun screen again into the housing on the luggage
compartment cover.
– Press the locking button in the direction of arrow and take
out the sun screen in the direction or arrow ⇒ fig. 54.
Fig. 53 Unroll the sun
screen
Fig. 54 Remove the
sun screen
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
C
A
1
A
2
s24s
.
book
Page
74
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility 75
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Windshield wiper and wash system
Windscreen wipers
You can operate the windscreen wipers and automatic
wipe/wash using the windscreen wiper lever.
The windscreen wiper lever ⇒ fig. 55 has the following positions:
Finger-operated wiping
– If you wish to wipe the windscreen only briefly, push the lever
into the sprung position . If you hold the lever in the lower
position for more than 1 second, the wiper wipes faster.
Intermittent wipe
– Position the lever up into position .
– Set with the switch the desired break between the indi-
vidual wiper strokes
Slow wipe
– Position the lever up into position .
Fast wipe
– Position the lever up into position .
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into sprung position
, the wash system sprays immediately, the windscreen
wiper starts wiping a little later. The wash system and the
windscreen wiper operate simultaneously at a speed of more
than 120 km/h.
– Release the lever. The windscreen wash system stops and
the wiper continues for another 3 - 4 wiper strokes (depending
on the period of spraying of the windscreen). At a speed of
more than 120 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds
after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from
the windscreen.
Rain sensor*
– Move the lever into position .
– You can set the sensitivity of the sensor individually with
switch .
Wiping the rear window pane*
– Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position
- the widescreen wiper will operate every 6 seconds.
Fig. 55 Windscreen
wiper lever
A
4
A
1
A
A
A
2
A
3
A
5
A
1
A
A
A
6
s24s
.
book
Page
75
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility76
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window pane*
– Press the lever from the steering wheel forward into the
sprung position , the wash system sprays immediately, the
windscreen wiper starts wiping a little later. As long as you
hold the lever in this position, the wiper operates as well as the
wash system.
– Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system
to stop and the wiper to continue for another 2 - 3 wiper
strokes (depending on the period of spraying of the wind-
screen). The lever will stay in position after releasing it.
Switching windscreen wipers off
– Move the lever back into its home position .
After the windscreen wiper switches off for the second time or the ignition
switches off for the fifth time, the rest position of the windscreen wiper
changes - this counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rubbers.
The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is
switched on and the bonnet is closed.
If the intermittent wipe is switched on, the intervals are also controlled
depending on speed.
The rain sensor* automatically regulates the break between the individual
wiper strokes depending on the intensity of the rain.
The rear window will be wiped again if the front window wipers are on
when reverse gear is selected.
The windscreen washer nozzles are heated* when the ignition is switched
on.
Top up with wash liquid ⇒ page 262.
Winter position
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out
from the windscreen. For this reason we recommend adjusting the wind-
screen wipers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen
easily. You can set this rest position as follows:
• Switch on the windscreen wipers.
• Switch off the ignition. The windscreen wipers remain in the position in
which they were when switching off the ignition.
You can also use the service position ⇒ page 77 as a winter position.
WARNING
• Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for
clear visibility and safe driving ⇒ page 77, “Replacing wiper blades
for the windscreen wipers”.
• Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures,
without heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window
cleaner could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the
front.
• The rain sensor only operates as a support. The driver is not
released from the responsibility to set the function of the wind-
screen wipers manually depending on the visibility conditions.
Caution
In frosty weather, please first of all check whether the windscreen wiper
blades are not frozen to the windscreen before switching them on.
Switching on windscreen wipers when the blades are frozen to the wind-
screen may result in damage both to the blades and the motor of the wind-
screen wipers!
A
7
A
6
A
0
s24s
.
book
Page
76
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility 77
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
• If the slower or the faster wiper setting is switched on ⇒ page 75,
fig. 55 and the vehicle speed decreases to below 4 km/h, the next lower
wiper step is switched on automatically. At a speed increase of more than
8 km/h the previous wiper setting is established again.
• If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wiper will try to push
away the obstacle. If the obstacle continues to block the wiper, the wiper
stops after 5 cycles, in order to avoid a damage to the wiper. Remove the
obstacle and and switch on the wiper again.
Headlight cleaning system*
The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen has been sprayed
for the fifth time, the low beam or main beam are switched on and the
windscreen wiper lever was held in the position ⇒ page 75, fig. 55 for
about 1 second.
The headlight washer nozzles are moved forward out of the bumper by the
water pressure for cleaning the headlights.
You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the head-
light lenses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. Please refer
to the following guidelines ⇒ page 237, “The headlight lenses”.
You should remove any snow from the fixtures of the washer nozzles and
clear ice in winter with a de-icing spray in order to ensure proper operation
of the cleaning system.
Replacing wiper blades for the windscreen wipers
One cannot fold out the wiper arms in the rest position from the
windscreen. Before replacing the wiper arms you must put them
into the service position.
Service position for changing wiper blades
– Close the bonnet.
– Switch the ignition on and then again off.
– Then press the windscreen wiper lever in the position
⇒ page 75, fig. 55 within 20 seconds - the wiper arms move
into the service position.
Taking off the wiper blade
– Fold windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen and
position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm ⇒ .
A
2
A
3
A
5
Fig. 56 Wiper blades
for the windscreen
A
4
s24s
.
book
Page
77
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility78
– Take off the wiper blade in direction of arrow ⇒ page 77, fig. 56
⇒ .
Attaching a wiper blade
– Push the new wiper blade over the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade into the vertical position.
– Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached.
– Fold the windscreen wiper arms onto the window and switch
on the ignition - the windscreen wiper arms move back into the
rest position.
Windscreen wiper blades in proper condition are essential to obtain good
visibility. Wiper blades should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust,
insect remains and preserving wax.
Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax resi-
dues left on the windscreen by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash
systems. It is therefore important to degrease the lips of the winscreen
wiper blades after every pass through an automatic vehicle wash
system.
WARNING
• The ignition must not be switched on if the front windscreen
wiper arms are folded out. The wiper blades would move back into
their rest position and while doing so damage the paintwork of the
bonnet.
• If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk
of damage to the windscreen.
• You should clean the wiper blades regularly with a windscreen
cleaner in order to avoid any smears. Clean a wiper blade with a
sponge or cloth if it is very dirty, for example from insect residues.
• Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for
safety reasons. Windscreen wiper blades are available from Škoda
dealers.
Replacing the wiper blade on the rear window wiper
Taking off the wiper blade
– Fold windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen and
position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm
⇒ fig. 57.
– Hold the window wiper arm at the top end with one hand.
– With the other hand unlock the locking button in the direc-
tion of arrow and remove the wiper blade.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 57 Wiper blade for
the rear window
A
A
s24s
.
book
Page
78
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility 79
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Attaching a wiper blade
– Position the wiper blade onto the wiper arm and lock the
locking button .
– Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached.
The same remarks apply here as for ⇒ page 77, “Replacing wiper blades
for the windscreen wipers”.
Rear-view mirror
Manual dimming interior rear-view mirror
Basic position
– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror forward.
Dimming mirror
– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror back.
Automatic dimming interior mirror*
Switching on the automatic dimming
– Press the button - the warning light lights up ⇒ fig. 58.
Switching off the automatic dimming
– Press again the button - the warning light goes out .
If the automatic dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically
depending on the light striking the mirror from the rear. The mirror has no
lever on the bottom edge of the mirror. When the interior lights are
switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror always moves back
into the basic position.
Note
• Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen* for
the rear window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior
rear-view mirror is not affected by other objects.
A
A
Fig. 58 Automatic
dimming interior mirro
r
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
A
s24s
.
book
Page
79
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility80
• Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not
impair the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation.
• If you switch off the automatic dimming interior rear-view mirror, also
the exterior mirror dimming is switched off.
Exterior mirrors
You can adjust the exterior mirrors electrically*.
The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is
running and up to an outside temperature of +20 °C.
Heating of the external mirror
– Turn the rotary knob to position
⇒ fig. 59.
Adjusting left and right exterior mirrors simultaneously
– Turn the rotary knob to position
. The movement of the mirror
surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob.
Adjusting the right-hand exterior mirror
– Turn the rotary knob to position
. The movement of the mirror
surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob.
Switching off operating control
– Turn the rotary knob to position
.
Tilting surface of front passenger exterior mirror*
When the rotary knob is in position ⇒ fig. 59 and the reverse gear is
engaged, the surface of the mirror tilts down slightly. This provides an aid
in seeing the kerb of the pavement when parking the car.
The mirror returns back into its initial position, if the speed is more than 15
km/h or the rotary knob is moved out of the position and put into another
position.
Memory for exterior mirrors*
On vehicles fitted with a memory for the driver seat, the relevant setting of
the exterior mirror is also stored automatically when the seat position is
stored ⇒ page 82.
WARNING
• Convex (curved outward) or aspherical exterior mirrors
increase the vision field. They do, however, make objects appear
smaller in the mirror. These mirrors are only of limited use, there-
fore, for estimating distances to the following vehicles.
• Use whenever possible the interior rear-view mirror, for esti-
mating the distances to the following vehicles.
Fig. 59 Inner part of
door: Rotary knob
s24s
.
book
Page
80
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Lights and Visibility 81
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
• Do not touch the surface of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror
heater is switched on.
• You can set the exterior mirrors by hand, if the power setting function
fails at any time, by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.
• Contact your specialist garage if a fault exists with the power setting of
the exterior mirrors.
Automatic dimming exterior mirror*
The exterior mirrors are dimmed together with the automatic dimming inte-
rior mirror. If the automatic dimming is switched on, the mirror dims auto-
matically depending on the light striking the mirror from the rear.
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged,
the mirror always moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
Note
• Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen* for
the rear window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior
rear-view mirror is not affected by other objects.
• Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not
impair the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation.
• If you switch off the automatic dimming interior rear-view mirror, also
the exterior mirror dimming is switched off.
s24s
.
book
Page
81
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage82
Seats and Stowage
Front seats
Basic information
The front seats have a wide range of different settings and can thus be
matched to the physical characteristics of the driver and front passenger.
Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for
• safely and quickly reaching the controls,
• a relaxed, fatigue-free body position,
• achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and
the airbag system.
WARNING
• Never transport more occupants than the maximum seating in
the vehicle.
• Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to
the seat. Children must be fastened ⇒ page 202, “Transporting chil-
dren safely” with a suitable restraint system.
• The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted
to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts
must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal
protection for you and your occupants.
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being
driven - never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the
window or on the surfaces of the seats. This is particularly impor-
tant for the front seat passenger. You will be exposed to increased
risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the
event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal
injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a
distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel.
Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag
system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard! The front
seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly
adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
• Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects
may get behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre.
You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or
accelerate.
WARNING (continued)
s24s
.
book
Page
82
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage 83
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Adjusting the front seats
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
– Pull the lever ⇒ page 83, fig. 60 up and push the seat into
the desired position.
– Release the lever and push the seat further until the lock
is heard to engage.
Adjusting height of seat*
– Lift the seat if required by pulling or pumping lever
upwards.
– Lower the seat if required by pushing or pumping lever
downwards.
Adjusting angle of backrest
– Relieve any pressure on the backrest (do not lean on it) and
turn the handwheel ⇒ page 83, fig. 60 to adjust the desired
angle of the backrest.
Adjusting lumbar support*
– Turn the handwheel until you have set the most comfort-
able curvature of the seat upholstery in the area of your spine.
The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be
pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs.
The backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that
the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly
bent arms.
WARNING
• Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk
of injury!
• Take care when adjusting the seat! Adjusting the seat without
care can lead to bruises or injuries.
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving
otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of
the airbag system - risk of injury!
Fig. 60 Controls at
seat
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
3
A
4
s24s
.
book
Page
83
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage84
Adjusting front seats electrically*
Adjusting seats
Adjusting seat
– Adopt the correct seated position ⇒ page 82.
– Press switch or ⇒ page 84, fig. 61 in the direction of the
desired setting.
Adjusting lumbar support
– Press the switch front ⇒ page 84, fig. 61 in order to enlarge
the curvature of the lumbar support.
– Press the switch rear in order to reduce the curvature of
the lumbar support.
– Press the switch top in order to adjust the curvature of the
lumbar support higher.
– Press the switch bottom in order to adjust the curvature of
the lumbar support lower.
Switch is operated in order to move the seat up/down and
forward/back, while switch is operated in order to move the backrest
forward or back.
WARNING
• Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk
of injury!
• Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or
bruises as a result of adjusting the seat without paying proper
attention.
• In view of the fact that the seats can also be adjusted when the
ignition is switched off (even when ignition key withdrawn), you
should never leave children unattended in the car.
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving
otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of
the airbag system - risk of injury!
Note
If the movement of the seat is inadvertently interrupted during an adjust-
ment, once again press the switch in the appropriate direction and
continue with the adjustment of the seat to the end.
Fig. 61 Side view:
Controls for adjusting
the seat
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
A
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
84
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage 85
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Storing setting
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
– Switch on the ignition.
– Adjust the seat ⇒ page 84.
– Adjust both exterior mirrors ⇒ page 80.
– Press button SET ⇒ page 85, fig. 62.
– Press one of the memory buttons within 10 seconds after
pressing the button SET - an acknowledgement signal
confirms that the seat setting is stored..
Storing exterior mirror setting for reversing*
– Switch on the ignition.
– Turn the exterior mirror control to position
⇒ page 80.
– Engage reverse gear.
– Move the right exterior mirror into the desired position
⇒ page 80.
– Switch back into its original position. The set position of the
exterior mirror is stored in the current memory.
Memory buttons
Memory for the seat offers the possibility to store the individual driver seat
and external mirror position. An individual position can be allocated to
each of the three memory buttons ⇒ page 85, fig. 62, that is three in
total. After pressing the corresponding memory button , the seat and
the exterior mirror are automatically moved into the positions which have
been allocated to this button ⇒ page 86.
Emergency Off
You can interrupt the setting operation at any time, if you operate any
button of the driver seat.
Note
• When storing settings with the memory buttons, we recommend that
you begin with the front button and assign a memory button to each addi-
tional driver.
• Each new setting stored with the same button erases the previous
setting.
• Each time you store the seat and exterior mirror settings for driving
forward you also have to re-store the individual setting of the exterior
mirror on the passenger side for reversing.
Fig. 62 Driver seat:
Memory buttons and
SET button
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
85
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage86
Assigning remote control to the memory buttons
After storing the settings of the seat and exterior mirrors, you
have 10 seconds in order to assign the remote control to the
appropriate memory button.
– Withdraw the ignition key.
– Press the button for unlocking the vehicle ⇒ page 52. The
setting is stored with the memory button which you have
selected.
If you wish to be able to retrieve the settings which are stored in the
memory by also using the remote control, you have to assign the remote
control to a memory button in each case.
If you wish, you can obtain an additional key with radio remote control
from a Škoda dealer and then assign the radio remote control to another
memory button.
Note
• If the remote control had previously been assigned to another memory
button, this setting is then erased by the new assignment.
• If you assign the remote control to a memory button which has already
been assigned to a remote control, the old assignment is also replaced by
a new assignment in this case.
• The assignment of the remote control to a memory button is retained,
however, after reassigning the seats and exterior mirrors.
Retrieving settings of the seat and mirrors
You can retrieve the stored settings either with the
memory buttons or with the remote control*.
Retrieving settings with memory buttons
– In order to retrieve the stored setting, you have two possibili-
ties:
– One-touch automatic memory: Briefly press the desired
memory button ⇒ page 85, fig. 62. The seat and exterior
mirror are moved automatically into the stored positions (this
applies only if the ignition is switched on and the speed is less
than 5 km/h).
– Memory keying: Press and hold the desired memory button
pressed long enough until the seat and the exterior mirror
are moved into the stored positions.
Retrieving settings with remote control
– If the driver door is closed and the ignition is switched off,
briefly press the unlock button of the remote control ⇒ page 52
and then open the driver door.
– The seat and exterior mirrors now move automatically into the
stored positions.
Retrieving setting of exterior mirror for reversing*
– Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror setting into the
position
⇒ page 80 before engaging the reverse gear.
A
B
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
86
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage 87
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The mirror returns back into its initial position, after the rotary knob is
moved out of the position and put into another position or if the speed is
more than 15 km/h.
Emergency Off
You can interrupt the setting operation at any time, if you operate any
button of the driver seat.
Head restraints
Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is
at the same level as the upper part of your head.
Adjusting the height of a head restraint
– Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push
it up or down in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 63.
– If you wish to push the head restraint of the front seat down-
wards, you must additionally press the safety button ⇒ fig. 64.
– If you wish to set the rear head restraint in the lower position,
you must additionally press the safety button.
Adjusting the angle of a head restraint
– You can adapt the head restraint by adjusting its angle to your
head ⇒ fig. 63. Adjusting the angle of the head restraint
provides enhanced comfort for the user.
Fig. 63 Adjusting head
restraint
Fig. 64 Removing a
head restraint
s24s
.
book
Page
87
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage88
Removing and installing a head restraint
– Pull the head restraint up out of the backrest of the seat as far
as the stop (on the rear head restraints fold forward the seat
backrest).
– Press the locking button in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 64 and
pull the head restraint out.
– To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the backrest
of the seat far enough until you hear the locking button
engage.
The head restraints of the front seats can be adjusted for angle and
height. The outer head restraints at the rear can only be adjusted for
height. The middle rear head restraint* is adjustable in two positions.
The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occu-
pant. Correctly adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer
effective protection for the occupants ⇒ page 179.
Active head restraints*
The front seats can be equipped with active head restraints, which protect
the occupants from injury to the cervical vertebra in the event of a rear
impact
WARNING
• The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer
effective protection for the occupants in the event of an accident.
• Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head
restraints - risk of injury!
• If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head restraint must not
be in the lower position.
Heating the front seats*
The seating and leaning surfaces of the front seats can be heated
when the ignition is switched on.
Front seats
– Heating on the driver's and front pasenger's seat can be
switched on and regulated by turning the control dial ⇒ fig. 65.
– The system is switched off by turning the control dial to the
home position “0”.
Caution
• You should not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at
specific points in order to avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat
heaters.
• Do not clean the seats moist ⇒ page 239.
Fig. 65 Dash panel:
Control dial for heating
the front seats
s24s
.
book
Page
88
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage 89
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
• The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is
running. This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.
• If the on-board voltage drops, the seat heating is switched off automat-
ically, in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine
control.
Rear seats
Folding the rear seats forwards
To enlarge the luggage compartment, the rear seats can be
folded forwards, if necessary remove the rear seats. Both rear
seats can be folded forward individually on vehicles with divided
rear seats*.
Folding the rear seats forwards
– In order to avoid causing any damage when folding the rear
seat forward it is important to adjust the front seats so that no
damage can occur when this is done.
– Pull up the rear seats in the direction of arrow and fold
forwards in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 66.
– Press the unlocking knob and fold the rear seat backrest
forwards ⇒ fig. 67.
If the front seats are too far back, we recommend that you have the rear
head restraints removed before the seat backrests are folded forward.
Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they cannot be
Fig. 66 Folding the
rear seats forwards
Fig. 67 Unlock the seat
backrest
A
1
A
2
A
A
s24s
.
book
Page
89
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage90
damaged or soiled. Please refer to the guidelines ⇒ page 92, “Luggage
compartment”.
Folding the rear seats back into position
Folding the rear seats back into position
– Install the head restraint in the partially lifted rear seat back-
rest.
– Place the rear lateral seat belt behind the edge of the side
trim panel ⇒ fig. 68.
– Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position
until the locking button clicks into place - check by pulling on
the rear seat backrest.
– Make sure that the red pin is covered ⇒ page 89, fig. 67.
– Fold the rear seats back into its original position.
WARNING
• The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position
after folding back the rear seats and seat backrests - they must be
ready to use.
• The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so
that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the
passenger compartment if there is sudden braking - risk of injury.
• Pay attention that the rear seat backresst are correctly inter-
locked. It is only then that the three-point seat belt for the middle
seat can reliably fulfil its function.
• Before folding the seat backrest back into the secure position,
place the rear lateral seat belt behind the edge of the side trim
panel. Take suitable measures to prevent that the seat belt is
jammed between the seat backrest and the side trim panel is thus
damaged.
Fig. 68 Lock the seat
backrest
A
C
A
B
s24s
.
book
Page
90
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage 91
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Remove the rear seats
You can enlarge the luggage compartment on vehicles with
divided rear seats* by removing the rear seat.
Removing
– Fold the rear seats forwards completely
– Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 69
and remove the rear seats from its holder.
Installing
– Press the wire clamp in the direction of the arrow and place
the seat upholstery in its holder.
– Fold the rear seats back into its original position.
Armrest of rear seats*
– You can fold down the armrest at the loop to enhance occu-
pant comfort ⇒ fig. 70.
Pedals
Concerning a secure depressing of the pedal, you should use only foot-
mats from the Škoda genuine accessories.
Operation of the pedals must not be hindered!
WARNING
• Greater pedal distances may be needed when there is a fault in
the brake system.
Fig. 69 Remove the
rear seats
Fig. 70 Rear seats:
Armrest
s24s
.
book
Page
91
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage92
• Do not place any footmats or other additional floor coverings in
the area of the pedals in order to ensure that all the pedals can be
fully depressed and are able to return unobstructed to their initial
position - risk of accident!
• There must be no objects on the floor which could roll under the
pedals. You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes,
operate the clutch or accelerator - risk of accident!
Luggage compartment
Loading the luggage compartment
Please observe the following in the interest of having good
handling characteristics of your vehicle:
– Distribute the items of luggage as evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.
– Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or the safety
net* ⇒ page 93.
In the event of an accident, there is such a high kinetic energy which is
produced by small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy depends on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the object. The speed at which
the vehicle is travelling is in this case the more significant factor.
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an unse-
cured object with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corre-
sponds to 20 times its own weight. This means that it results in a weight
of approx. 90 kg. You can imagine the injuries that can occur, if this “bullet”
is flying through the interior compartment and hits an occupant.
WARNING
• Store the objects in the luggage compartment and attach them
to the lashing eyes.
• Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown
forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and
can injure the occupants or other oncoming traffic. This risk is still
increased, if the objects which are flying around are hit by a
deployed airbag. In this case, the objects which are thrown back
can injure the occupants - hazard.
• Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle may be
affected when transporting heavy objects as a result of the
displacement of the centre of gravity. The speed and style of
driving must be adjusted accordingly.
• The items carried in the luggage compartment should be stored
in such a way that no objects are able to slip forward if there are any
sudden driving or braking manoeuvres undertaken - risk of injury!
• Never drive with the boot lid slightly ajar or even fully opened
otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle -
risk of poisoning!
• On no account exceed the permissible axle loads and the
permissible gross weight of the vehicle - risk of accident!
• Never transport occupants in the luggage compartment!
Caution
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of objects sliding in this area.
WARNING (continued)
s24s
.
book
Page
92
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage 93
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load ⇒ page 264, fig. 199.
Lashing eyes
Eyes are located on the sides of the loading area for lashing the goods to
be loaded.
You can also attach a floor fixing net* to these eyes for lashing small
objects.
The floor fixing net* and the installation instruction are located in a
container under the floor covering of the luggage compartment behind the
spare wheel.
WARNING
• The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way
that it cannot move during the journey and when braking.
• If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing
eyes with unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur
in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents. In order to
prevent the items of luggage being thrown forward, always use
suitable lashing straps which are firmly attached to the lashing
eyes.
Fig. 71 Luggage
compartment: Lashing
eyes (Octavia)
Fig. 72 Luggage
compartment: Lashing
eyes (Estate car)
s24s
.
book
Page
93
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage94
Note
On vehicles in the version Octavia, the top front lashing eyes are located
behind the seat backrest ⇒ page 93, fig. 71.
Fixing nets - Net programme Octavia*
Fixing examples of the fixing net as horizontal pocket ⇒ fig. 73 and vertical
pocket ⇒ fig. 74.
The fixing net and the installation instruction are located in a container
under the floor covering of the luggage compartment behind the spare
wheel.
WARNING
The whole strength of the net makes it possible to load the pocket
with objects of up to 1.5 kg in weight. Heavy objects are not
secured sufficiently - risk of injury and net damage!
Caution
Do not place any objects with sharp edges in the nets - risk of net
damage.
Fig. 73 Fixing net:
Horizontal pocket
Fig. 74 Fixing net:
Vertical pocket
s24s
.
book
Page
94
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage 95
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fixing nets - Net programme estate car*
Fixing examples of the fixing net as pocket ⇒ fig. 75 and as division of the
luggage compartment ⇒ fig. 76.
The fixing net and the installation instruction are located in a container
under the floor covering of the luggage compartment behind the spare
wheel.
WARNING
The whole strength of the net makes it possible to load the pocket
with objects of up to 1.5 kg in weight. Heavy objects are not
secured sufficiently - risk of injury and net damage!
Caution
Do not place any objects with sharp edges in the nets - risk of net
damage.
Folding double hooks* (Octavia)
Fig. 75 Fixing net:
Pocket
Fig. 76 Fixing net:
Division of the luggage
compartment
Fig. 77 Luggage
compartment: Folding
double hooks
s24s
.
book
Page
95
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage96
Folding double hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags
etc. ⇒ page 95, fig. 77 are provided on one or both sides of the luggage
compartment depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.
An item of luggage weighing up to 5 kg can be attached to each side of
the double hook.
Folding hooks (estate car)
Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are
provided on both sides of the luggage compartment ⇒ fig. 78.
An item of luggage weighing up to 10 kg can be attached to the hook.
Fixing of the floor covering of the luggage
compartment
There is a loop (Octavia) or there are hooks (estate car) located on the
floor covering of the luggage compartment. You can fix the raised floor
Fig. 78 Luggage
compartment: Folding
hooks
Fig. 79 Luggage
compartment: Fixing of
the floor covering
(Octavia)
Fig. 80 Luggage
compartment: Fixing of
the floor covering
(Estate car)
s24s
.
book
Page
96
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage 97
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
cover with a hook to the luggage compartment cover (Octavia) ⇒ fig. 79 as
if one needs to reach the spare wheel or to the frame of the boot lid (estate
car) ⇒ fig. 80.
Luggage net* (Octavia)
The luggage net is designed for the tranportation of lighter objects.
WARNING
• In the luggage net you must only store objects (up to a total
weight of 1.5 kg). Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk
of injury!
• No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage
net, because they can damage the luggage net.
Luggage compartment cover* (Octavia)
You can use the luggage compartment cover behind the
head restraints for storing light and soft items.
The luggage compartment cover can be removed as required if
one must transport bulky goods.
– Unhook the support straps on the tailgate ⇒ fig. 82.
– Place the cover on the side supports.
– Pull the cover out of the holder horizontally to the rear.
– Install again by pushing the luggage compartment cover
forwards into the holder and hanging the support straps
on the tailgate.
You can stow the removed luggage compartment cover behind the rear
seat backrest.
Fig. 81 Luggage
compartment: Luggage
net
Fig. 82 Removing the
luggage compartment
cover
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
1
s24s
.
book
Page
97
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage98
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover,
the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden
braking or the vehicle collides with something.
Caution
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of objects placed in this area.
Note
Opening the tailgate also lifts up the luggage compartment cover.
Luggage compartment cover (estate car)
Unrolling
– Pull the luggage compartment cover in direction of arrow
as far as the stop into the secured position ⇒ fig. 83.
Rolling up
– Press the cover in the handle area in direction of arrow , the
cover rolls up automatically.
Removing
– Have the luggage compartment cover removed to transport
bulky goods. Press the slider from the side in the direction of
arrow and remove the luggage compartment cover in the
direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 84.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover.
Fig. 83 Luggage
compartment: The
luggage compartment
cover
Fig. 84 Luggage
compartment:
Removing the luggage
compartment cover
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
s24s
.
book
Page
98
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage 99
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Caution
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater and
luggage compartment cover are not damaged as a result of objects placed
in this area.
Net partition (Estate)*
Use behind the rear seats
Unrolling
– Fold down the stowage compartment cover behind the rear
seats ⇒ fig. 85.
– Pull the net partition at the bracket out of the housing in
direction of the holders ⇒ fig. 85.
– Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts and push the
cross rod forward.
– In the same way, fix the cross rod to the other side of the
vehicle, mount .
– Fold the stowage compartment cover downwards.
Rolling up
– Fold down the stowage compartment cover behind the rear
seats ⇒ fig. 85.
Fig. 85 Folding down
the stowage compart-
ment cover
Fig. 86 Unrolling net
partition
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
C
s24s
.
book
Page
99
Thursday
,
November
24
,
2005
12:27
PM
Seats and Stowage100
– Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on
the other side and take the cross rod out of the mount
⇒ page 99, fig. 86.
– Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can roll
up slowly and without damage into housing .
– Fold the stowage compartment cover downwards.
If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment, you can remove the
luggage compartment cover ⇒ page 98, fig. 83.
WARNING
• First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the
mounts in the front position!
• Pay attention that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked.
It is only then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can
reliably fulfil its function.
Use behind the front seats
Unrolling
– Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ page 89
– Pull the net partiton net at the plate out of the housing
⇒ fig. 87.
– Insert the cross rod into the mount first on the one side and
push the cross rod forward.
– In the same way, fix the cross rod to the other side of the
vehicle, mount .
Rolling up
– Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on
the other side and take the cross rod out of the mount
⇒ fig. 87.
A
C
A
B
A
C
Fig. 87 Unrolling net
partition
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
C
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage 101
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can roll
up slowly and without damage into housing .
– Fold the rear seats back into its original position.
WARNING
• The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position
after folding back the rear seats and seat backrests - they must be
ready to use.
• The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so
that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the
passenger compartment if there is sudden braking - risk of injury.
• Pay attention that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked.
It is only then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can
reliably fulfil its function.
• First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the
mounts in the front position!
Removing and installing net partition housing
Removing
– Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ page 89
– Open the right rear door.
– Push the net partition housing ⇒ fig. 88 in the direction of
arrow and take it out of the mounts of the rear seat back-
rests in the direction of the arrow .
Installing
– Position the net partition housing into the mounts of the seat
backrest.
– Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of
arrow as far as the stop.
– Fold the rear seats back into its original position.
A
B
A
C
Fig. 88 Rear seats: Net
partition housing
A
A
A
1
A
2
A
1
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage102
Roof rack*
Description
Pay attention to the following points if you wish to transport luggage or
other items on the roof of your vehicle:
• A special roof luggage rack system was developed for the vehicle.
That is why you should only use one of the roof luggage rack which has
been released for use by Škoda Auto.
• The base carrier is the basis for a complete roof luggage rack system.
Separate additional holders are required for safety reasons for trans-
porting luggage, bikes, surfboards, skis and boats.
• The basic version of the roof luggage rack system and further compo-
nents are obtainable as accessories from Škoda dealers.
Caution
• If you use other roof rack systems or if the roof bars are not properly
fitted, then any damage which may result to your car is not covered by the
warranty agreements. It is therefore essential to pay attention to the fitting
instructions supplied with the roof luggage rack system.
• On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof, ensure that the
opened sliding/tilting roof does not strike any items of luggage transported
on the roof.
• Ensure that the opened tailgate does not collide with the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption.
One should therefore take off the roof bar system after use.
Note
A roof rail is obtainable from a specialist garage if hasn't been fitted onto
an estate car at the works.
Lashing points (Octavia)
Fitting
– Insert the attachment points of the roof rack into the mounts of
the body so that the pins of the attachment points grasp into
the holes of the body.
Note
• Pay attention to the information regarding assembly and disassembly
in the attached instructions.
• If you have any questions, please contact a specialist garage.
Fig. 89 Attachment
points for base roof
carrier
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage 103
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• The figure is not valid for an estate car.
Roof load
Distribute weight evenly over the roof luggage rack system. The maximum
permissible roof load (including roof rack system) of 75 kg and the
maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.
You cannot make full use of the permissible roof load if you use a roof
luggage rack system with a lower load carrying capacity. The load trans-
ported on the roof luggage rack system must not exceed the weight limit
which is stated in the fitting instructions.
WARNING
• The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be
reliably attached - risk of accident!
• You must on no account exceed the permissible roof load, the
permissible axle loads and the permissible gross weight of your
vehicle - risk of accident!
• Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle change
when you transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as
a result of the displacement of the centre of gravity and the
increased wind attack area - risk of accident! You must absolutely
adapt your style of driving and the speed of the vehicle to the
specific circumstances.
Cup holder
Cup holder in front centre console
You can place two cups or beverage cans into the recesses ⇒ fig. 90.
WARNING
• Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder. If the
vehicle moves, the hot beverages may spill - risk of scalding!
• Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle mate-
rial (e.g. glass, porcelain). You might be injured by them in the
event of an accident.
Caution
Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving. They may spill
when braking and while doing so damage the vehicle.
Fig. 90 Front centre
console: Cup holder
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage104
Cup holder in rear centre console*
– Press on the panel in the area ⇒ fig. 91 - the cup holder
comes out.
– Pull the cup holder out as far as the stop.
– Adjust the cup holder by moving the locking plate .
WARNING
• Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder while the car
is moving. The hot beverages may spill - risk of scalding!
• Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle mate-
rial (e.g. glass, porcelain). You might be injured by them in the
event of an accident.
Note holder
The note holder is designed e.g. for attaching a car park ticket in parking
areas.
The attached note must always be removed before starting off in order
not to restrict the driver's vision.
Fig. 91 Centre console
at rear: Cup holder
A
A
A
B
Fig. 92 Windscreen:
Note holder
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage 105
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Ashtrays
Front ashtray
Opening ashtray
– Press on the bottom part of the cover of the ashtray - refer to
⇒ fig. 93.
Removing ashtray insert
– Press on the ashtray insert in the area (the insert comes
out) and you can take it out.
Insert ashtray insert
– Insert the ashtray insert into the mount and press it in.
WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!
Rear ashtray - low centre console
Opening ashtray
– Grasp the ashtray cover at the lower edge and fold it open
in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 94.
Removing ashtray
– Grasp the ashtray at the handle and pull it out in an upward
direction.
Replacing ashtray
– Insert the ashtray into the console and press it in.
Fig. 93 Centre
console: Front ashtray
A
A
A
B
Fig. 94 Low centre
console: Rear ashtray
A
A
A
B
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage106
WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!
Rear ashtray - high centre console*
Opening ashtray
– Press on the top part of the cover of the ashtray in area
⇒ fig. 95.
Removing ashtray insert
– Press the cover of the ashtray down slightly as far as the stop.
– Grasp the ashtray insert at the cover and pull it out.
Insert ashtray insert
– Insert the ashtray insert into the mount and press it in.
There is a drinks can holder attached to the inner side of the ashtray
cover.
WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!
Cigarette lighter*, power sockets
Cigarette lighter
You can also use the socket on the cigarette lighter for
other electrical appliances.
Fig. 95 High centre
console: Rear ashtray
A
A
A
B
Fig. 96 Centre
console: Cigarette
lighter
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage 107
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Using the cigarette lighter
– Press in the button of the cigarette lighter ⇒ page 106, fig. 96.
– Wait until the button jumps forward.
– Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use it.
– Insert the cigarette lighter again into the socket.
Using the power socket
– Take out the cigarette lighter.
– Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the socket of the
cigarette lighter.
The 12 volt power socket can also be used to supply power to electrical
accessories with a power uptake up to 180 watts.
WARNING
• Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Not paying proper
attention or incorrect use the cigarette lighter in an uncontrolled
manner may result in burns.
• The cigarette lighter and the power socket also operates when
the ignition is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn. You
should therefore never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Caution
Always use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power sockets.
Note
• Connecting electrical components when the engine is not
running will drain the battery of the vehicle - risk of battery draining!
• Further information ⇒ page 270, “Accessories, changes and replace-
ment of parts”.
Power socket in the luggage compartment (estate car)
– Open the cover of the power socket ⇒ fig. 97.
– Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.
You can only use the power socket for the connection of approved elec-
trical accessories with a power uptake up to 180 watts. The vehicle battery
will be discharged in the process if the engine is stationary.
The same principles apply here as for ⇒ page 106.
Fig. 97 Luggage
compartment: Power
socket
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage108
Further information ⇒ page 270, “Accessories, changes and replacement
of parts”.
Storage compartments
An overview
You will find the following storage facilities in your vehicle:
WARNING
• Please do not place anything on top of the dash panel. Such
objects might slide or fall down when driving (when accelerating or
cornering) and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic
situation - risk of accident!
• Ensure that when driving no objects from the centre console ofr
from other storage possibilities may get into the footwell of the
driver. You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes,
operate the clutch or accelerator - risk of accident!
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Opening and closing the storage compartment on the front
passenger side
– Press the handle of the lid ⇒ fig. 98 - the lid folds down.
Storage compartment on the front passenger
side
⇒ page 108
Storage compartment on the driver's side ⇒ page 109
Storage compartment on the dash panel ⇒ page 110
Stowage compartment in front centre console* ⇒ page 110
Stowage compartment for spectacles* ⇒ page 111
Storage compartment in the front doors ⇒ page 111
Stowage compartment below front passenger
seat*
⇒ page 112
Front seat armrest with stowage compartment* ⇒ page 112
Stowage compartment in rear centre console* ⇒ page 113
Seat backrest with opening for skis* ⇒ page 114
Through-loading bag* ⇒ page 115
Side compartment* ⇒ page 116
Stowage compartment behind the rear seats
(estate car)
⇒ page 117
Clothes hooks* ⇒ page 117
Fig. 98 Dash panel:
Storage compartment
on the front passenger
side
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage 109
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Raise the lid and press it until the catch is heard to engage.
There is a holder for a pen and note book on the inside of the lid.
WARNING
• The storage compartment must always be closed when driving
for safety reasons.
• The beverage holder should not be used while driving.
Cooling of storage compartment on front passenger
side*
The storage compartment is for vehicles fitted with an air-
conditioning system with a closable inlet for cooled air.
– You can switch the cooling system on or off using the control
dial ⇒ fig. 99.
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh
or interior air to flow into the storage compartment.
The cooling of the storage compartment operates only if the air condi-
tioning system is switched on. We recommend that you switch off the
cooling (opening concealed) if it is operating in the heating mode or if you
are not using the cooling system for the storage compartment.
Storage compartment on the driver's side
– The storage compartment is opened by lifting the handle and
folding open in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 100.
Fig. 99 Storage
compartment: Using
cooling system
Fig. 100 Dash panel:
Storage compartment
on the driver's side
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage110
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for
safety reasons.
Storage compartment on the dash panel
– Press in the middle of the storage compartment ⇒ fig. 101 - the
lid folds open
Certain model versions are equipped without lid for the storage compart-
ment.
WARNING
• The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and
must also not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!
• The pull-out storage compartment must always be kept closed
when driving for safety reasons.
• Do not put any highly inflammable objects or objects which are
sensitive to heat (e.g. lighters, sprays or carbonated drinks) in the
storage compartment.
Stowage compartment in front centre console*
– Press on the bottom part of the storage compartment in the
area ⇒ fig. 102 - the lid opens.
WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and
must also not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!
Fig. 101 Dash panel:
Storage compartment
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 102 Front centre
console: Storage
compartment
A
A
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage 111
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Stowage compartment for spectacles*
– Press on the lid of the stowage compartment, the stowage
compartment opens downwards ⇒ fig. 103.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for
safety reasons.
Storage compartment in the front doors
A bottle holder is located in the area of the storage compartment for
the front doors.
WARNING
Use the area ⇒ fig. 104 of the storage compartment only for
storing objects which do not project so that the effectiveness of the
side airbag is not impaired.
Fig. 103 Detail of the
headliner: Stowage
compartment for spec-
tacles
Fig. 104 Storage
compartment in the
front doors
A
B
A
A
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage112
Stowage compartment below front passenger seat*
The storage compartment is foreseen for storing small objects of
up to 1.5 kg. in weight.
– Tilt the lock to open the flap and pull out the flap ⇒ fig. 105.
– Tilt the lock to close the flap and press flap close.
Front seat armrest with stowage compartment*
The armrest is adjustable for height and length.
Fig. 105 Front
passenger seat:
Storage compartment
Fig. 106 Armrest:
Storage compartment
Fig. 107 Armrest:
Cooling of storage
compartment
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage 113
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Opening stowage compartment
– Open the lid of the armrest in the direction of arrow
⇒ page 112, fig. 106.
Closing stowage compartment
– Open the lid up to the stop, then you can fold it downwards.
Setting height
– First of all fold the lid to the bottom and lift it in the direction of
arrow into one of the 4 fixed positions.
Adjusting in forward/back direction
– Push the lid into the desired position.
Opening air inlet
– Pull the lock in upward direction ⇒ page 112, fig. 107.
Closing air inlet
– Push the lock as far as the stop downwards.
On vehicles fitted with air conditioning, the storage compartment is
equipped with a lockable inlet for thermally treated (warmed-up) air.
At open air supply, air flows into the storage with a temperature which is
as high as the one out of the air outlet nozzles, depending on temperature
setting.
The air inlet in the storage compartment is connected to position
through adjustment of the control dial for air distribution. This position
causes the maximum amount of air to flow into the storage compartment
(depending on the rotary regulator position for the fan).
You can use the storage compartment, for example, to temper drinks
cans, etc.
If you do not use the air inlet in the storage compartment, the end
cover should always be kept closed.
Note
Push the lid of the armrest up to stop to the rear before operating the
handbrake.
Stowage compartment in rear centre console*
The storage compartment is equipped with a removeable insert.
– Open the storage compartment by pulling on the upper edge
of the storage compartment in the direction of arrow
⇒ fig. 108.
A
A
A
A
Fig. 108 Centre
console at rear:
Storage compartment
A
A
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage114
WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and
must also not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!
Seat backrest with opening for skis*
After folding open the armrest and the lid, an opening in the seat
backrest becomes visible through which you can push long
objects e.g. skis etc. You can fold open the armrest and the lid
from the passenger or luggage compartment.
Opening from passenger compartment
– Fold down the armrest of the rear seat at the loop ⇒ page 91,
fig. 70.
– Pull the handle up to the stop in upward direction and fold
open the lid downwards ⇒ fig. 109.
Opening from luggage compartment
– Push the unlock button downwards ⇒ fig. 110 and fold the
lid (with armrest) to the front.
Fig. 109 Rear seats:
Handle of lid
Fig. 110 Luggage
compartment: Unlock
button
A
A
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage 115
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Closing
– Fold the lid and the armrest up to the stop in upward direction
- the lid must click into place audibly.
Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing. You can
recognize this on the fact that the red field above the unlocking button
of the luggage compartment is not visible.
Through-loading bag*
Loading
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.
– Push the unlock button downwards ⇒ fig. 111 and fold the
lid (with armrest) to the front.
– Place the empty through-loading bag in such a way that the
end of the bag with the zip lies in the boot.
– Push the objects into the through-loading bag from the boot
⇒ .
Securing
– Insert the securing belt of the through-loading bag into the
middle seat belt buckle ⇒ fig. 112.
– Place the securing belt on ski sport articles in the middle
between the bindings ⇒ .
A
A
Fig. 111 Luggage
compartment: Unlock
button
Fig. 112 Attaching
through-loading bag to
middle seat belt buckle
of rear seats
A
A
A
A
A
C
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage116
– Pull the securing belt tight at the free end of the belt .
Stowing
– Fold the lid and the armrest up to the stop in upward direction
- the lid must click into place audibly. You can recognize this
on the fact that the red field above the unlocking button of
the luggage compartment is not visible ⇒ page 115, fig. 111.
– Carefully fold the empty (dry) through-loading bag together,
place it in the luggage compartment and secure it to prevent it
slipping.
WARNING
• After placing items into the through-loading bag, you must
secure the bag with the securing belt .
• The securing belt must hold the items tight.
• Ensure that the securing belt on ski sport articles lies in the
middle between the bindings (see imprint on the through-loading
bag).
Note
• Place the skis with the tips facing the front, snowboards and ski sticks
with the tips facing the rear into the through-loading bag.
• If there are several pairs of skis in the through-loading bag, ensure that
the bindings are positioned at the same height.
• The through-loading bag must never be folded together or stowed
when moist.
Side compartment*
– You can open the compartment by turning the locks in the
direction of arrow.
The CD changer* is housed in this compartment.
A
B
A
A
A
A
Fig. 113 Luggage
compartment: Side
compartment
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage 117
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Stowage compartment behind the rear seats (estate
car)
Removing
– First remove the luggage compartment cover ⇒ page 98.
– Grasp the compartment with both hands and remove it by
pulling in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 114.
Installing
– Push the compartment up to the stop into the catch.
– Re-insert the luggage compartment cover.
WARNING
Only place small and light objects up to a total weight of 3 kg into
the stowage compartment. In the event of a vehicle collision heavy
objects could be thrown out of the compartment - risk of injuries!
For this reason, the front part of the luggage compartment cover
must always cover over the stowage compartment.
Clothes hooks*
Clothes hooks are located above the rear doors ⇒ fig. 115.
WARNING
• Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair
your vision to the rear.
Fig. 114 Removing the
stowage compartment
Fig. 115 Rear door:
Clothes hooks
.
,
,
Seats and Stowage118
• Use the hooks for hanging only light items of clothing and
ensure that there are no heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets.
• Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing
otherwise this will interfere with the protection offered by the head
airbag*.
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system 119
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Heating and air conditioning system
Heating
Using the system
The heating system delivers air into the interior of the
vehicle and warms it as required.
Fig. 116 Heating: Controls
Setting temperature
– Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 116 to the right in order to
increase the temperature.
– Turn the control dial to the left in order to increase the
temperature.
Controlling blower
– Turn the blower switch into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in
order to switch the blower on.
– Turn the blower switch into position 0 in order to switch the
blower off.
– Pressing button causes the recirculating air system ⇒
to be switched on.
Control for air distribution
– You can adjust the direction of the inlet air flow ⇒ page 122
using air distribution regulator .
Rear window heater
– Press button . Further information ⇒ page 72, “Rear window
heater”.
Auxiliary heating
– Press the button in order to directly switch on/off the auxil-
iary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation). Further infor-
mation ⇒ page 134, “Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
ventilation)*”.
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves
in order to ensure that the heating and ventilation systems operate prop-
erly.
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
1
A
C
A
2
A
3
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system120
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full
heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating
temperature.
The blower should aways be on to prevent the windows from misting up.
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period
of time. “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and passen-
gers, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist
up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recirculated
air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.
Note
• The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and
side windows. No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to
restriction of the heating comfort.
• The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the
luggage compartment.
Set heating
Recommended settings of heating controls for:
Defrosting the windscreen and side windows
• Turn control dial ⇒ page 119, fig. 116 to the right up to the stop
• Blower switch in position 3
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open air outlet vents 3 ⇒ page 122, fig. 117 and point towards the side
window.
• Close the air outlet vents 4
Keeping windscreen and side windows demisted
We recommend that you use the following setting in cases where the
windows are misted up more than usual (e.g. when it is raining):
• Control dial where necessary to the heating range
• Blower switch in position 2 or 3
• Control dial to or as required or to any desired position
between these symbols
• Open air outlet vents 3 and point towards the side window
• Close the air outlet vents 4
Warming up the inside of the vehicle as rapidly as possible
• Turn control dial to the right up to the stop
• Blower switch in position 3
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open the air outlet vents 3 and 4
• We recommend briefly pressing button air recirculation mode. The
windows can steam up in this position however.
Heating the vehicle to a comfortable temperature
We recommend the following setting once the windows are no longer
misted up and the desired teperature has been reached:
• Control dial at the desired heat output
• Blower switch in position 2 or 3
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open the air outlet vents 3
• Close the air outlet vents 4
• Set the air distribution regulator as required between positions
and , if the windscreen gets misted up again.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
1
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system 121
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fresh air mode - ventilation
Non pre-warmed fresh air streams through the air inlet nozzles 3 and 4 for
the following settings.
Recirculated air mode must not be switched on.
• Turn the control dial ⇒ page 119, fig. 116 to the left up to the stop
• Blower switch in the desired position
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open air outlet vents 3 and 4 ⇒ page 122, fig. 117
The control dial can be set to other positions as required.
Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of
the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle
from getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a
tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam.
Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button - the warning light lights up in the button
⇒ page 119, fig. 116.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press again the button - the warning light in the button
goes out.
The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribu-
tion control is in position ⇒ page 119, fig. 116. You can also switch
recirculated air mode on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing
button .
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period
of time. “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and passen-
gers, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist
up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recirculated
air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
C
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system122
Air outlet vents
Fig. 117 Air vents at the front
Fig. 118 Air vents at the rear
Open air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel (not when in the end position).
Close air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel into the end position.
Redirecting air flow
– Swivel upward or downward the grille of the vents in order to
change the direction of the air flow using the vertically
arranged thumbwheel.
– Turn the horizontal thumbwheel on the vent to the right or left
in order to change the air flow to the appropriate side.
You can set the air supply to the individual air outlet vents using the control
dial ⇒ page 11 9, fig. 116. Air outlet vents 3, 4 ⇒ fig. 117 and 6 ⇒ fig. 118
can also be opened or closed individually.
The air outlet vents 6 are only fitted on vehicles with higher centre
console.
Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet vents
according to the setting of the control dial ⇒ page 119, fig. 116 and
according to outer atmospheric conditions.
Note
The air outlet vents 2 ensure in the ventilation mode for a comfortable (no-
draught) ventilation of the interior of the vehicle, also if the air outlet vents
4 are closed.
A
C
A
A
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system 123
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Climatic* (semi-automatic air
conditioning system)
Description
The Climatic is a combined cooling and heating system. It
makes it possible to optimally control the air temperature
at any season of the year.
Description of the Climatic
It is important for your safety and for your driving comfort that the Climatic
is operating properly.
The cooling only operates if button ⇒ page 124, fig. 119 is
pressed, and the following conditions are met:
• engine running,
• outside temperature above +2 °C and
• blower switch switched on (positions 1 to 4).
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity
drops in the vehicle. The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is
enhanced as a result of this particularly at high outside temperatures and
a high air humidity. The system prevents the windows misting up during
the cold season of the year.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full
heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating
temperature.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance
the cooling effect ⇒ .
Air at a temperature of about 5°C may flow out of the vents under certain
circumstances when the cooling system is operating. Lengthy and uneven
distribution of the air flow out of the vents (in particular at the leg area) and
large differences in temperature, for example when getting out of the
vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves
in order to ensure that the heating and cooling systems operate properly.
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the
air conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This
is quite normal and not an indication of a leak!
WARNING
• For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all
the windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize
yourself about how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation
systems, how to demist and defrost the windows, as well as with
the cooling mode.
• You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer
period of time. “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and
passengers, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to
mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recircu-
lated air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.
Note
• We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recir-
culating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evap-
orator from the interior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of
the air conditioning system. This produces a permanent odour when the
air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through
considerable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).
AC
A
1
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system124
Using the system
Fig. 119 Climatic: Controls
Setting temperature
– Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 119 to the right in order to
increase the temperature.
– Turn the control dial to the left in order to increase the
temperature.
Controlling blower
– Turn the blower switch into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in
order to switch the blower on.
– Turn the blower switch into position 0 in order to switch the
blower off.
– Pressing button - causes the recirculating air system
⇒ page 126 to be switched on.
Control for air distribution
– You can adjust the direction of the inlet air flow ⇒ page 127
using air distribution regulator .
switching cooling on and off
– Press the button ⇒ fig. 119. The warning light lights up
in the button.
– When you again press the switch , the cooling system is
switched off. The warning light in the button goes out.
Rear window heater
– Press button . Further information ⇒ page 72.
Auxiliary heating
– Press the button in order to directly switch on/off the
auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation. Further
information ⇒ page 134, “Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating
and ventilation)*”.
The set temperature will be automatically maintained other than
when the control dial is on the extreme right or extreme left position:
Extreme right position - full heating
Extreme left position - full cooling
The blower should aways be on to prevent the windows from misting up.
Note
• The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and
side windows. No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to
restriction of the heating comfort.
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
3
A
C
AC
A
1
AC
A
2
A
4
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system 125
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the
luggage compartment.
• If the cooling system has not been switched on for a lengthy period,
odours may be produced at the evaporator because of deposits. Switch
the cooling system on at least once a month for approximately 5 minutes
at the highest blower stage - also during the cold season of the year - in
order to remove such odours. Also open a window for a short time.
• Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode
⇒ page 126.
Set Climatic
Recommended settings of Climatic controls for the respective operating
modes:
Defrosting the windscreen and side windows
• Put the control dial ⇒ page 124, fig. 119 to the temperature selected
as usual by you (we recommend 22 °C); Climatic puts automatically the
heating to maximum power, until the temperature selected by you is
achieved
• Blower switch in position 3
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open air outlet vents 3 ⇒ page 127, fig. 120 and point towards the side
window
• Close the air outlet vents 4
Keeping windscreen and side windows demisted
We recommend that you use the following setting in cases where the
windows are misted up more than usual (e.g. when it is raining):
Blower switch in position 2
Turn the air distribution control into the position
Open air outlet vents 3 and point towards the side window
Close the air outlet vents 4
Switch on the cooling system by pressing button
Warming up the inside of the vehicle as rapidly as possible
• Put the control dial to the temperature selected as usual by you (we
recommend 22 °C); Climatic puts automatically the heating to maximum
power, until the temperature selected by you is achieved
• Blower switch in position 3
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open the air outlet vents 3 and 4
• We recommend briefly pressing button air recirculation mode. The
windows can steam up in this position however.
Heating the vehicle to a comfortable temperature
We recommend the following setting once the windows are no longer
misted up and the desired teperature has been reached:
• Control dial at the desired heat temperature
• Blower switch in position 2 or 3
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open the air outlet vents 3
• Close the air outlet vents 4
• Set the air distribution regulator as required between positions
and , if the windscreen gets misted up again.
Cooling down the inside of the vehicle as rapidly as possible
• Close all windows and the sliding/tilting roof
• Put the control dial to the temperature selected as usual by you (we
recommend 22 °C); Climatic puts automatically the heating to maximum
power, until the temperature selected by you is achieved.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
B
A
C
A
1
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
3
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
A
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system126
• Control dial in the position 4, supplies the interior of the car with
fresh air.
• After brief airing, turn the control dial to the position 2 or 3
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open the air outlet vents 3 and 4
• Switch on the cooling system by pressing button
• We recommend briefly pressing button air recirculation mode.
Optimum cooling
• Control dial at the desired heat temperature. This temperature will
be maintained automatically.
• Blower switch in position 1, 2, or 3
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open the air outlet vents 3 and 4
• Switch on the cooling system by pressing button
• We recommend setting the air outlet vents 3 and 4 in such a way that
the air flows to the rear over the heads of the occupants. Do not switch to
recirculated air mode.
Fresh air mode - ventilation
Non pre-warmed fresh air streams through the air inlet nozzles 3 and 4 for
the following settings.
• Turn the control dial ⇒ page 124, fig. 119 to the left up to the stop
• Blower switch in the desired position
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open air outlet vents 3 and 4 ⇒ page 127, fig. 120
• Switch off the cooling by pressing button
• Switch off the recirculated air mode by pressing button
The control dial can be set to other positions as required.
Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of
the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle
from getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a
tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam.
Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button ⇒ page 124, fig. 119 - the warning light
lights up in the button.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press again the button - the warning light in the button
goes out.
Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution
control is in position ⇒ page 124, fig. 119. You can also switch recir-
culated air mode on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing button
.
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period
of time. “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and passen-
gers, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist
up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recirculated
air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.
A
B
A
B
A
C
A
1
A
3
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
1
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
1
A
3
A
C
A
C
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system 127
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Air outlet vents
Fig. 120 Air vents at the front
Fig. 121 Air vents at the rear
Open air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel (not when in the end position).
Close air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel into the end position.
Redirecting air flow
– Swivel upward or downward the grille of the vents in order to
change the direction of the air flow using the vertically
arranged thumbwheel.
– Turn the horizontal thumbwheel on the vent to the right or left
in order to change the air flow to the appropriate side.
You can set the air supply to the individual air outlet vents using the control
dial . Air outlet vents 3, 4 ⇒ fig. 120 and 6 ⇒ fig. 121 can also be opened
or closed individually.
The air outlet vents 6 are only fitted on vehicles with higher centre
console.
Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the air outlet vents according to the
setting of control dial ⇒ page 124, fig. 119 and the atmospheric condi-
tions.
Note
The air outlet vents 2 ensure in the ventilation and cooling mode for a
comfortable (no-draught) ventilation of the interior of the vehicle, also if the
air outlet vents 4 are closed.
Using the air conditioning system economically
The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the
engine when in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption.
A
C
A
A
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system128
It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which
the interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight
in order to allow the heated air to escape.
The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the
window is open.
The desired interior temperature can also be achieved without switching
in the cooling system just by switching to fresh air mode.
For the sake of the environment
When you economize on fuel, you also reduce pollutant emissions.
Operational problems
If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher
than +5 °C, there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be:
• The fuse on the air conditioning system has blown. Check the fuse,
replace it if necessary ⇒ page 288.
• The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time
because the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot ⇒ page 14.
If you are not able to rectify the operational problem yourself, or if the
cooling capacity decreases, switch the cooling system off. Contact a
specialist garage.
Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning)
Description
The Climatronic system is a combination of an automatic
heating, fresh air and cooling system which provides
optimal comfort for the occupants of the car.
The Climatronic maintains a constant temperature fully automatically,
once it has been set. This is achieved by automatically varying the
temperature of the outflowing air, the blower stages and the air distribu-
tion. The system also takes into account bright sunlight which eliminates
the need to alter the settings manually. The automatic mode ⇒ page 130
ensures maximum wellbeing of the occupants at all times of the year.
Description of Climatronic system
The cooling operates only if the following conditions are met:
• engine running,
• outside temperature above +2 °C,
• the button is not pressed.
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity
drops in the vehicle. The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is
enhanced as a result of this particularly at high outside temperatures and
a high air humidity. The system prevents the windows misting up during
the cold season of the year.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full
heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating
temperature.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance
the cooling effect ⇒ .
ECON
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system 129
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves
in order to ensure that the heating and cooling systems operate properly.
The AC compressor is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order
to provide cooling at a high load of the engine.
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the
air conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This
is quite normal and not an indication of a leak!
Recommended setting for all periods of the year:
• Set the temperature to 22 °C (72 °F).
• Press the button ⇒ page 130, fig. 122.
• Move the air outlet vents 3 and 4 so that the air flow is directed slightly
upwards ⇒ page 133, fig. 123.
Switching over between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit
Press and hold the buttons and ⇒ page 130, fig. 122. The
information in the desired temperature measuring unit appears in the
display.
WARNING
• For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all
the windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize
yourself about how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation
systems, how to demist and defrost the windows, as well as with
the cooling mode.
• You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer
period of time. “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and
passengers, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to
mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recircu-
lated air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.
Note
• If the cooling system has not been switched on for a lengthy period,
odours may be produced at the evaporator because of deposits. Switch
the cooling system on at least once a month for approximately 5 minutes
at the highest blower stage - also during the cold season of the year - in
order to remove such odours. Also open a window for a short time.
• We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recir-
culating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evap-
orator from the interior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of
the air conditioning system. This produces a permanent odour when the
air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through
considerable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).
• The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the
luggage compartment.
• The Information of the Climatronic is displayed on the display of the
radio*. You can also switch off this function - see operating instructions for
radio
• Using the cooling economically ⇒ page 127.
• Operational problems ⇒ page 128.
AUTO
ECON AUTO
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system130
Overview of the controls
The controls enable a separate setting of the temperature
for the left and right side.
Fig. 122 Climatronic: Controls
The displays
The selected interior temperature for the left side, here: +21 °C
The buttons
Air flow to head
Recirculated air mode
Air flow to the windows
Air flow in the footwell
The displays
The selected interior temperature for the right side, here: +23 °C
Buttons / control dial
Setting of the temperature for the left side.
Rear window heater ⇒ page 72
Defrosting the windscreen
Control dial for:
− Setting of blower speed and
− Switching off the Climatronic
Button for direct switching on/off of auxiliary heating* ⇒ page 134
Setting of the temperature for the right side.
Button for switching off cooling system
Automatic mode
Note
The interior temperature sensor is located in the centre of the control dial
for blower speed . Do not glue or cover over the sensor, otherwise it
could have an unfavourable effect on the Climatronic.
Automatic mode
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a
constant temperature and to demist the windows in the
interior of the car.
Switching automatic mode on
– Set a temperature between +16 °C (60 °F) and +29,5 °C (85
°F).
– Move the air outlet vents 2 and 3 ⇒ page 133, fig. 123 so that
the air flow is directed slightly upwards.
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
10
A
11
A
12
A
13 ECON
A
14
A
10
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system 131
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Press the button - the warning light lights up in the
button.
The automatic mode is switched off by pressing the button for the air distri-
bution or increasing or decreasing the blower speed. The temperature is
nevertheless regulated.
ECON mode
The cooling system is switched off in the ECON mode -
heating and ventilation are regulated automatically.
Switching ECON mode on
– Press the button - the warning light lights up in the
button.
– Set a temperature between +16 °C (60 °F) and +29,5 °C (85
°F).
Recirculated air mode in ECON mode
– First of all press the button - the warning light lights up in
the button.
– Then press the button - the warning light lights up in
the button.
ECON mode operates only within the control temperature range from +16
°C (60 °F) up to +29.5 °C (85 °F).
The ECON mode is switched off when pressing button or .
Please note that, in the ECON mode, the interior temperature cannot be
lower than the outside temperature. The interior is not cooled and the air
is not dehumidified.
If you select the temperature below +16 °C (60°F), LO appears on the
display. If you select a temperature higher than +29.5 °C (85 °F), HI
appears on the display. In the position LO the supplied air is not warmed
up. In the HI position, the system operates continuously with maximum
heating capacity.
Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode
⇒ page 132.
Defrosting windscreen
Defrosting windscreen - switching on
– Press the button ⇒ page 130, fig. 122.
Defrosting windscreen - switching off
– Once again press the button or the button .
The temperature control is controlled automatically. More air flows out of
the air outlet vents 1 and 2.
AUTO
ECON
ECON
AUTO
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system132
Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of
the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle
from getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a
tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam.
Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button - the warning light lights up in the button.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press again the button or the button - the warning
light in the button goes out.
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period
of time. “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and passen-
gers, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist
up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recirculated
air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.
Note
If the windscreen mists up, press the button ⇒ page 130, fig. 122.
After the windscreen has been demisted, press the button .
Setting temperature
You can separate the interior temperature for the left and right
side separately.
– You can set the temperature for both sides after switching on
the ignition with the control dial .
– If you wish to set the temperature for the right side, turn the
control dial .
If the temperature for the right side was set via the control dial , it can
no longer be set via the control dial - temperature for both sides. This
is only possible if you press the button for about 2 seconds.
You can set the interior temperature between +16 °C (60 °F) and +29.5
°C (85 °F). The interior temperature is regulated automatically within this
range. If you select the temperature below +16 °C (60 °F), “LO” appears
in the display. If you select the temperature higher than +29.5 °C (85 °F),
“HI” appears in the display. In both limit positions the Climatronic operates
at maximum cooling or heating capacity, respectively. The temperature is
not controlled in this case.
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (in partic-
ular at the leg area) and large differences in temperature, for example
when getting out of the vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.
Controlling blower
There are a total of seven blower stages available.
The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically
in line with the interior temperature. You can also, however,
adapt the blower stages manually to suit your particular needs.
AUTO
A
9
AUTO
A
7
A
11
A
11
A
7
AUTO
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system 133
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Turn the control dial ⇒ page 130, fig. 122 to the left (reduce
blower speed) or right (increase blower speed).
Switch off the blowers, the Climatronic is switched off and on the displays
appears OFF.
The set blower speed is displayed above the control dial when the
respective number of warning lights come on.
WARNING
• The “stale” air may result in fatigue, divert your attention and
also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident
increases.
• Do not switch the Climatronic system off for longer than neces-
sary.
• Switch the Climatronic system on as soon as the windows mist
up.
Air outlet vents
Fig. 123 Air vents at the front
Fig. 124 Air vents at the rear
Open air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel (not when in the end position).
A
10
A
10
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system134
Close air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel into the end position.
Redirecting air flow
– Swivel upward or downward the grille of the vents in order to
change the direction of the air flow using the vertically
arranged thumbwheel.
– Turn the horizontal thumbwheel on the vent to the right or left
in order to change the air flow to the appropriate side.
You can control the air distribution to the air outlet vents via the buttons of
the operating part of the Climatronic ⇒ page 130. Air outlet vents 3, 4
⇒ page 133, fig. 123 and 6 ⇒ page 133, fig. 124 can also be opened or
closed individually.
The air outlet vents 6 are only fitted on vehicles with higher centre
console.
Note
The air outlet vents 2 ensure in the ventilation and cooling mode for a
comfortable (no-draught) ventilation of the interior of the vehicle, also if the
air outlet vents 4 are closed.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
ventilation)*
Description
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)
heats or supplies the interior of the vehicle with fresh air
independent of the engine.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating )
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) functions in connection with the
heater or with the Climatic or Climatronic.
It can be used when stationary, when engine is switched off for preheating
of the vehicle as well as while driving (e.g. during the heating phase of the
engine).
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) warms up the coolant during the
combustion of fuel from the vehicle tank. The coolant warms up the air,
which (if the blower speed is not set to zero) flows into the occupant
compartment.
6)
Auxiliary ventilation
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior
by switching on the blower, if the blower speed is not set to zero, whereby
the interior temperature is effectively decreased (e.g. with a vehicle
parked in the sun).
6)
However the coolant does not warm up the engine.
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system 135
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Using the system
So that the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
tion) functions according to your expectations, it is neces-
sary to carry out the basic setting before its programming.
Basic setting
– In the information display, select from the menu Main menu
the Menu Setup (settings) ⇒ page 24, fig. 11.
– In the menu Settings select the menu Aux. Heating
(auxiliary heating).
– In the menu Aux. Heating (auxiliary heating) ⇒ fig. 125
select the menu Weekday and set the current day.
– Return to a higher level by selecting the menu Back, i. e. in
the menu Aux. Heating (auxiliary heating).
– In the menu Aux. Heating select the menu Running time and
set the desired operating period in steps of 1 minute. The
operating period can be 5 to 60 minutes.
– Return to a higher level by selecting the menu Back in the
menu Aux. Heating.
– In the menu Aux. Heating select the menu Mode.
– In the menu Mode select the desired mode Heating or
Ventilation.
Programming
For the programming of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and venti-
lation) in the menu Aux. Heating there are three pre-set times:
• Pre-set time 1
• Pre-set time 2
• Pre-set time 3
In each pre-set time, the day (if necessary each day = daily) and the time
(hour and minute) can be set for the operating period of the auxiliary
heating and/or ventilation.
If you leave the pre-set menu by selecting menu Back or do not operate
the display for longer than 10 seconds, the set values are stored, but the
pre-set time is not active.
Both other pre-set times can be programmed and stored in the same way.
If you select the menu Activate after setting the desired values, Pre-set
time (weekday, hours, minute) activated! is displayed in the display and
the set pre-set time is active.
Only one programmed pre-set time can be active.
Fig. 125 Informations
display: Aux. Heating
(auxiliary heating)
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system136
The last programmed pre-set time remains active.
The active pre-set time can be changed in the menu Aux. Heating in the
menu Activation by selecting a pre-set time.
The prerequisite for the correct switching on of the auxiliary heating (auxil-
iary heating and ventilation) according to the programmed pre-set time is
the correct setting of the current time ⇒ page 17 and weekday ⇒ page 135.
If the system is running, a warning light in the button for direct switching
on/off of the auxiliary heating lights up.
The running system deactivates after expiration of the operating period or
is deactivated earlier by pressing the button for direct switching on/off of
the auxiliary heating ⇒ page 136.
The deactivation of a desired pre-set time can be performed by selecting
the menu Deactive in the menu Active .
It is possible to re-establish the factory setting using the menu Factory
setting in the menu Aux. Heating.
Direct switching on/off
Fig. 126 Button for direct switching on/off of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary
heating and ventilation) on the operating part of the Climatic
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) can be switched
on or off at any time directly using the button on the operating part of
the Climatic ⇒ fig. 126, if necessary the operating part of the heating
⇒ page 119, fig. 116 or the operating part of the Climatronic ⇒ page 130,
fig. 122.
The auxiliary heating system (auxiliary heating and ventilation) switches
off automatically after expiration of the set operating period in the menu
Running time, if it is not switched off beforehand by you.
WARNING
• The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms -
risk of poisoning!
• The auxiliary heating must not be running during refueling - risk
of fire.
.
,
,
Heating and air conditioning system 137
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the
underside of the vehicle. Therefore do not place the vehicle, if you
wish to operate the auxiliary heating, in such a way that the exhaust
gases of the auxiliary heating can come easily into contact with
inflammable materials (e.g. dry grass) or easily inflammable
substances (e.g. fuel run out).
Note
• If the auxiliary heating runs, the fuel consumption comes from the
vehicle tank. Therefore the auxiliary heating should not be operated, if
there is very little fuel in the tank.
• The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating, which is located on the
underside of the vehicle, must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must
not be blocked.
• If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is running, the vehicle battery
discharges. If the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated
several times over a longer period, the vehicle must be driven a few kilom-
eters in order to recharge the vehicle battery.
• The auxiliary heating only switches the blower on, if it has achieved a
coolant temperature of approx. 50 °C.
• At low outside temperatures, this can result in a formation of water
vapour in the area of the engine compartment. This is quite normal and is
not an operating problem.
• After switching off the auxiliary heating, the coolant pump runs for a
short period.
• The auxiliary heating and ventilation does not switch on or comes on,
if the vehicle battery indicates a low loading state.
• The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) switches on, if in the informa-
tion display: Please refuel! is indicated or was indicated before switching
off the ignition.
• When driving, the auxiliary heating can only be switched on, if the exte-
rior temperature is lower than 5 °C.
• The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or
leaves in order to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly.
• So that the warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on
the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating), the control dial ⇒ page 119,
fig. 116 must be turned up to the stop to the right when heating. With
Climatic and Climatronic, you can maintain the temperature normally
selected by you (we recommend 22 °C). It is recommended to put the air
flow in the position . For heating and climatic put the blower switch
⇒ page 119, fig. 116 if necessary ⇒ page 124, fig. 119 in the position 2.
WARNING (continued)
A
A
A
B
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving138
Starting-off and Driving
Setting steering wheel position
You can set the height and the forward/back position of the
steering wheel to the desired position.
– Adjust the driver seat ⇒ page 82.
– Pull the lever below the steering column ⇒ fig. 127 down ⇒ .
– Set the steering wheel to the desired position (concerning
height and forward/back position).
– Then push the lever up against the steering column until it
locks into place.
WARNING
• You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving!
• The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the
steering wheel ⇒ fig. 128. Not maintaining this minimum distance
will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect
you - hazard!
• For safety reasons the lever must always be firmly pushed up to
avoid the steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when
driving - risk of accident!
• If you adjust the steering wheel further towards the head, you
will reduce the protection offered by the driver airbag in the event
of an accident. Check that the steering wheel is aligned to the
chest.
• When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on
the outer edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold
the steering wheel firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another
Fig. 127 Adjustable
steering wheel: Lever
below steering column
Fig. 128 Safe distance
to steering wheel
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving 139
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
way (e.g. in the middle of the steering wheel or at the inner steering
wheel edge). In such cases, injuries to the arms, the hands and the
head can occur when the driver airbag is deployed.
Ignition lock
Petrol engines
- ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked.
- ignition switched on
- start engine
Diesel engines
- interruption of fuel supply, ignition switched off, engine off, the
steering can be locked.
- heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on
• You should not switch on any major electrical components during the
heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
- start engine
Applies to all models:
Position
To lock the steering, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering
wheel until the steering locking pin is heard to engage. You should always
lock the steering as a general rule if you leave your vehicle. This acts as
a deterrent against possible theft of your vehicle ⇒ .
Position
Move the steering wheel back and forward a little if the ignition key cannot,
or cannot easily be turned into this position, in order to release the
steering lock.
Position
The engine is started in this position. At the same time switched on low
beam or main beam or other electrical components with major power
consumption are briefly switched off. The ignition key moves back into
position when one releases the key.
The ignition key must be turned back into position each time before
starting the engine again. The starter repeat lock in the ignition lock
prevents the starter being engaged when the engine is running and thus
getting damaged.
Ignition key withdrawal lock (automatic gearbox)
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the
selector lever is in position P.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 129 Ignition lock
positions
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
2
A
1
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving140
WARNING
• When driving, the ignition key must always be in the ignition
lock in the position (ignition switched on) without the engine
running. This position is indicated by the warning lights coming on.
If this is not the case, it could result in unexpected locking of the
steering wheel - risk of accident!
• Only remove the ignition key from the ignition lock when the
vehicle has come to a standstill (put on the handbrake or select the
selector lever position P). The steering lock might otherwise
engage unintentionally - risk of accident!
• Always withdraw the ignition key if you are going to leave the
vehicle, even for a short time. This is particularly important if chil-
dren are left in the vehicle. The children might otherwise start the
engine or switch on electrical equipment (e.g. power windows) -
risk of accident or injury!
Starting engine
General
You can only start the engine only using an original ignition
key.
• Place the gearshift lever into neutral (or place the selector lever to the
position P or N in the case of an automatic gearbox) and put on the hand-
brake firmly before starting the engine.
• The clutch pedal should be fully depressed when starting the engine
which means that the starter only has to crank the engine.
• Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts otherwise there may be
damage to the starter.
The engine running noises may at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine until oil pressure can be built up in the hydraulic
valve clearance compensation. This is quite normal and is not an oper-
ating problem.
If the engine does not start ...
You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start aid ⇒ page 281.
It is only possible to tow-start vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox. The
tow-starting distance must not be more than 50 metres ⇒ page 286.
WARNING
• Never run the engine in non ventilated or enclosed areas. The
exhaust gases of the engine contain besides the odorless and
colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas - hazard! Carbon
monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death.
• Never leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
Caution
• The starter may only be operated (ignition key position ), if the
engine is not running. If the starter is immediately operated after switching
off the engine, the starter or the engine can be damaged.
• Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads as
long as the engine has not yet reached its normal operating temperature
- risk of damaging the engine!
• Vehicles which are fitted with an exhaust gas catalytic converter
should not be tow-started over a distance of more than 50 metres.
For the sake of the environment
Never warm up the engine when the vehicle is standing. Drive off right
away. Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more
rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower.
A
2
A
3
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving 141
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Petrol engines
These engines are fitted with a starter system which selects the correct
fuel/air mixture for every external air temperature.
• Do not operate accelerator before and when starting engine.
• Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not
start right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the
attempt.
• It is possible that the fuse on the electrical fuel pump is defect if the
engine still does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary
⇒ page 288.
• Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assist-
ance.
It may be necessary, if the engine is very hot, to slightly depress the
accelerator after the engine has started.
Diesel engines
Glow plug system
Diesel engines are equipped with a glow plug system, the preglow period
being controlled automatically in line with the coolant temperature and
outside temperature.
The preglow indicator light comes on after the ignition has been
switched on.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during
the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained
unnecessarily.
• You should start the engine immediately after the glow plug warning
light has gone out.
• The glow plug warning light will come on for about one second if the
engine is at a normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature
is above +5°C. This means that you can start the engine right away.
• Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not
start right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the
attempt.
• It is possible that the fuse on the diesel preglow system is defect if the
engine still does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary
⇒ page 288.
• Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assist-
ance.
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has run dry
It may take longer than normal to start the engine after refuelling if the fuel
tank has run completely dry - up to one minute. This is because the fuel
system must first of all be filled while the attempting to start the engine.
Switching the engine off
– The engine can be switched off by turning the ignition key from
position ⇒ page 139, fig. 129 into position .
WARNING
• Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary - risk
of accident!
• The brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
Greater physical effort for braking is required when engine is
switched off. Because if you do not stop as normal, this can cause
an accident and severe injuries.
A
1
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving142
Caution
you should not switch the engine off right away at the end of your journey
after the engine has been operated for a lengthy period at high loads but
should be allowed it to run at idling speed for about 2 minutes. This
prevents any accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off.
Note
• The radiator fan may continue running for a further 10 minutes or so
after the engine and the ignition have been switched off. The coolant fan
may, however, also switch on again after some time if the coolant temper-
ature rises because of an accumulation of heat in the engine or if the
engine is warm and the engine compartment is additionally heated by
strong sunlight.
• This is why particular care is required when carrying out any work in
the engine compartment ⇒ page 248, “Working in the engine
compartment”.
Shifting (manual gearbox)
Shift into reverse only when the car is stationary. Depress the clutch pedal
and hold it fully depressed. Wait a moment before engaging reverse gear
in order to avoid any shift noises.
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided
the ignition is on.
WARNING
Never engage the reverse gear when driving - risk of accident!
Note
• One should not lay the hand on the shift lever while driving the vehicle.
The pressure of the hand will be transferred to the gearshift forks in the
gearbox. This can, over a period of time, lead to early wear of the gearshift
forks.
Fig. 130 The shift
pattern: 5-speed or 6-
speed manual gearbox
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving 143
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gears, in order to avoid
unnecessary wear and damage.
Handbrake
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up fully.
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time
press in the locking button ⇒ fig. 131.
– Hold the button pressed and push the handbrake lever down
fully ⇒ .
The handbrake warning light lights up when the handbrake is applied,
provided the ignition is on.
A warning signal sounds and the following text appears in the display* if
you have inadvertently driven off with the handbrake applied:
"Handbrake on"
The handbrake warning is activated if you drive at a speed of more than 6
km/h for more than 3 seconds.
WARNING
• Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A hand-
brake which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes
overheating which will have a negative effect on the operation of
the brake system - risk of accident! In addition this can result in
premature wear of the rear brake pads.
• Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The children
might, for example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of
gear. The vehicle might then move off - risk of accident!
Caution
After the car has come to a stop, always first of all apply the handbrake
firmly before then additionally engaging the first gear (manual gearbox) or
moving the selector lever into position P (automatic gearbox).
Fig. 131 Centre
console: Handbrake
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving144
Rear parking aid*
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles behind
the vehicle.
The audible parking aid determines the distance between the rear bumper
and an obstacle located behind the vehicle with the aid of ultrasound
sensors. The sensors are integrated in the rear bumper.
Range of sensors
The clearance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the
obstacle (area ⇒ fig. 132). The interval between the warning signals
becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced.
A continuous tone sounds from a clearance of just 30 cm (Bereich ) -
danger area. You should not reverse any further after this signal
sounds!
For particular model versions, the distance to the obstruction is also
displayed on the display of the radio. You can also switch off this function
- see operating instructions for radio
Activating
The parking aid is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged
and the ignition is turned on. This is confirmed by a brief acknowledge-
ment signal.
Deactivating
The parking aid is deactivated by removing the reverse gear.
WARNING
• The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper
attention and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care
when parking the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.
• You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that
there is no small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar
etc., behind your vehicle. Such an obstacle might not be within the
range detected by the sensors.
Note
• The parking aid does not operate if you are towing a trailer (applies to
models which feature a factory-fitted towing device*).
• If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after switching the igni-
tion on and engaging reverse gear, and there is no obstacle close to your
car, this indicates a system fault. Have the fault rectified by a specialist
workshop.
• The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking
aid to operate properly.
• If the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic
gearbox is in the position , warning signal indicates interruption (vehicle
can no longer move).
Fig. 132 Parking aid:
Detection range of rear
sensors
A
A
A
B
A
P
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving 145
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Front and rear parking aid*
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles in front
and behind the vehicle.
The audible parking aid determines the distance between the front or rear
bumper and an obstacle with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The sensors
are integrated in the front and rear bumper. The signal tones for the front
parking aid sound higher than for the rear parking aid.
Range of sensors
The distance warning begins at a distance of about 120 cm from the
obstacle in front of the vehicle (area ⇒ fig. 134) and about 160 cm from
the obstacle behind the vehicle (area ⇒ page 144, fig. 132). The
interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
reduced.
A continuous tone sounds from a clearance of just 30 cm (Bereich ) -
danger area. You should not reverse any further after this signal
sounds!
Your vehicle can be equipped with a radio which shows on its display the
distance of the vehicle to the obstacle. You can also switch off this func-
tion - see operating instructions for radio
Activating
The parking aid is activated when the reverse gear is engaged and the
ignition is turned on or by pressing the button ⇒ fig. 133 - the symbol
lights up in the button. The activation is confirmed by a brief acknowledge-
ment signal.
Deactivating
The parking aid is deactivated after pressing the button ⇒ fig. 133 or at
a speed of more than 15 km/h - the symbol in the button is no longer
illuminated.
WARNING
• The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper
attention and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care
when reversing the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.
Fig. 133 Activating the
parking aid
Fig. 134 Parking aid:
Detection range of the
front sensors
A
A
A
A
A
B
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving146
• You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that
there is no small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar
etc., in front or behind your vehicle. Such an obstacle might not be
within the range detected by the sensors.
Caution
In order to ensure the correct functioning of the parking aid, only a licence
plate frame approved by the manufacturer Škoda for your vehicle type
should be installed at the front bumper. Un-approved licence plate frames
can project into the detection range ⇒ page 145, fig. 134. A non-proved
licence plate frame could be recognized as an obstacle by the system and
this would lead to an incorrect warning. If you have any questions, please
contact a specialist garage.
Note
• Only the front parking aid operates if you are towing a trailer (applies
only to models which feature a factory-fitted towing device*).
• If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the
system and there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system
fault. The fault is confirmed additionally when the symbol flashes in the
button ⇒ page 145, fig. 133. Have the fault rectified by a specialist work-
shop.
• The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking
aid to operate properly.
• If the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic
gearbox is in the position , warning signal indicates interruption (vehicle
can no longer move).
Cruise control system (CCS)*
Introduction
The cruise control system (CCS) maintains a constant speed, more than
30 km/h (20 mph), once it has been set, without you having to depress the
accelerator pedal. This is only possible within the range which is permitted
by the power output and braking power of the engine. The cruise control
system makes it possible - particularly on long journeys - for you to rest
your “accelerator foot”.
WARNING
• The cruise control system must not, for safety reasons, be used
in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy
roads, slippery roads or loose chippings) - risk of accident!
• In order to prevent unintentional use of the cruise control
system, always switch off the system after use.
Note
• Models fitted with a manual gearbox: Always depress the clutch pedal
if you switch on the cruise control system when the gearbox is in Neutral.
Otherwise the engine can rev up unintentionally.
• The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed
when driving on steep downhill sections. The weight of the vehicle
increases the speed at which it travels. One should shift down in good
time to a lower gear or slow the vehicle down by applying the foot brake.
• It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch
on the cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P, N or
R.
WARNING (continued)
A
B
A
P
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving 147
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Storing a speed
The cruise control system is operated by means of the slide
switch and pushbutton in the left lever of the multi-func-
tional switch.
– Press the switch ⇒ fig. 135 into the position ON.
– After the desired speed has been reached, press the press
button into the SET position.
After you have released the press button out of the position SET, the
speed you have just selected is maintained at a constant speed without
having to depress the accelerator.
You can increase the speed by depressing the accelerator. Releasing the
accelerator will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed.
This does not apply, however, if you drive at a speed which is more than
10 km/h higher than the set speed for a period of longer than 5 minutes.
The stored speed will be cancelled in the memory. You then have to re-
store the desired speed.
One can reduce the speed in the usual manner. The system is switched
off temporarily by actuating the brake or clutch pedal ⇒ page 148.
WARNING
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which
exist at that moment before resuming the stored speed.
Changing a stored speed
You can also change the speed of the vehicle without
depressing the accelerator.
Faster
– You can increase the stored speed without depressing the
accelerator, by pressing the button ⇒ fig. 135 into the RES
position.
– The speed of the car will increase continuously if you hold the
button pressed in the RES position. Release the slide switch
once the vehicle has reached the desired speed. The set
speed is then stored in the memory.
Slower
– You can reduce the stored speed by pressing the button
in the position SET.
Fig. 135 Operating
lever: Pushbutton and
slide switch on the
cruise control system
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
.
,
,
Starting-off and Driving148
– Holding down the pushbutton pressed in the SET position will
cause the speed of the vehicle to reduce continuously. Once
the car has reached the desired speed, release the button.
The set speed is then stored in the memory.
– If you release the pushbutton when the car is travelling at a
speed of less than 30 km/h, the speed is not stored, the
memory is erased. It is then necessary to again store the
speed with the button in the position SET after an increase
in speed of the vehicle to more than 30 km/hour.
Switching off the cruise control system temporarily
– You can switch off temporarily the cruise control system, if
you depress the brake or clutch pedal, on vehicles fitted with
an automatic gearbox only the brake pedal.
– You can switch off temporarily the cruise control system, if you
press the switch in the middle position.
The set speed remains stored in the memory.
The Resumption of the stored speed is achieved by releasing the brake
or clutch pedal, on vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox only after
releasing the brake pedal and after shortly pressing the pushbutton
⇒ page 147, fig. 135 into the position RES.
WARNING
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which
exist at that moment before resuming the stored speed.
Switching off the cruise control system completely
– Press the switch ⇒ page 147, fig. 135 to the right into posi-
tion OFF.
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
A
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox 149
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Automatic gearbox
6-speed automatic gearbox*
Introduction
Your car is equipped with an electronically controlled 6-speed automatic
gearbox. Shifting up and also down through the gears is performed auto-
matically.
At the same time this is a conventional automatic gearbox. The maximum
speed is reached in the 5th gear. The 6th gear serves as an economic
driving programme, which is intended to reduce the fuel consumption.
Information for driving with an automatic gearbox
Shifting up and down through the gears is performed auto-
matically.
You can also, however, switch the gearbox over into the
Tiptronic mode. This mode makes it possible for you to also shift
gears manually ⇒ page 153.
Starting-off and Driving
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
– Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector
lever), move the selector lever into the desired position, e.g. D
⇒ page 150, and then release the Shiftlock button.
– Wait a moment until the gearbox has shifted (a slight engage-
ment nudge can be felt).
– Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator ⇒ .
Stopping for a short time
– The selector lever position N does not have to be selected
when stopping just for a short time, such as at cross roads. It
is sufficient to hold the vehicle stationary using the foot brake.
The engine can, however, be allowed just to idle.
Parking
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the
selector lever to P and then release the Shiftlock button.
The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or
N ⇒ page 140.
It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat
surface. When parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake
firmly and then move the selector lever into position P. This is to ensure
that there is no excessive pressure acting on the lock mechanism and that
it is easier to subsequently move the selector lever out of position P.
If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first
necessary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling
speed of the engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the
selector lever.
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox150
WARNING
• Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of
the selector lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running
- risk of accident!
• Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving
- risk of an accident!
• When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is
necessary to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions
of the selector lever (except P and N) since the power transmission
is never completely interrupted, also not when the engine is idling
- the vehicle "creeps".
Selector lever positions
The selector lever position you have engaged is shown in the information
display of the instrument cluster with the corresponding gear symbol high-
lighted ⇒ fig. 137. In the positions D and S the gear you have engaged will
be additionally displayed on the display.
P - Parklock
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position.
The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary ⇒ .
If you wish to move the selector lever into or out of this position, you must
press the Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and at the
same time depress the brake pedal.
If the battery is used, the selector lever cannot be moved out of the posi-
tion P ⇒ page 154.
R - Reverse
Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine idling ⇒ .
Fig. 136 Selector lever
Fig. 137 Information
display: Selector lever
positions
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox 151
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock
must be pressed, if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R, P or
N.
When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position R, the
reverse lights will come on.
N - Neutral
The transmission is in Neutral in this position.
The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer
than 2 seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position N
into the position D, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at
less than 5 km/hour or on a stationary vehicle.
The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer
than 2 seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position N
into the position R, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at
less than 5 km/hour or on a stationary vehicle.
D - Drive, position for driving forward
When the selector lever is in this position, the forward gears are shifted up
and down automatically in line with engine load, vehicle speed and the
dynamic shift programme.
You must depress the brake pedal ⇒ if you wish to move the selector
lever into position D from N when the vehicle is travelling at less than
5 km/hour or is stationary.
In certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountainous regions or
when towing a trailer) it may be beneficial to select the manual shift
programme ⇒ page 153 for a short time in order to adapt the gearbox
ratios manually to the driving situations.
S - Position for sporty style of driving
Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the
power potential of the engine. The gearbox also then shifts down at higher
engine speeds as in the position D.
The gearbox does not shift into the 6th gear in the position S, because the
maximum speed is achieved with the 5th gear.
The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the
selector lever out of the position D into the position S.
WARNING
• Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving
- risk of an accident!
• When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is
necessary to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions
of the selector lever (except P and N) since the power transmission
is never completely interrupted, also not when the engine is idling
- the vehicle "creeps".
• You must on no account unintentionally operate the throttle
(e.g. by hand from the engine compartment) if a drive position is
engaged when the car is stationary. The vehicle would otherwise
immediately start off - also when the handbrake is firmly applied -
risk of an accident!
• You must move the selector lever into position P and firmly
apply the handbrake first before you or any other person opens the
bonnet and starts working on the engine when it is running - risk
of accident! It is also essential to observe all warnings ⇒ page 248,
“Working in the engine compartment”.
Selector lever lock
Automatic selector lever lock
With the ignition on, the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions
P and N. You must first of all depress the brake pedal in order to move the
selector lever out of this position. The warning light ⇒ page 38 lights up
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox152
in the instrument cluster as a reminder for the driver when the selector
lever is in position P and N
In addition, the symbol for the automatic selector lever lock in the shift
gate lights up.
A time delay element ensures that the selector lever is not blocked when
rapidly switching over the position N (e.g. from R to D). This does, for
example, allow one to seesaw out a stuck vehicle. The selector lever lock
will click into place if the lever is in the N position for more than 2 seconds
without the brake pedal being pressed.
The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving
at speed of less than 5 km/hour. The lock is switched off automatically into
position N when the car is travelling at a higher speed.
Shiftlock button
The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain
selector lever positions being engaged inadvertently. The selector lever
lock is cancelled when you press the Shiftlock button.
Keylock - Ignition key withdrawal lock
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the
selector lever is in position P. If the ignition key is withdrawn, the selector
lever is blocked in postion P.
Kickdown function
The kickdown function provides you with maximum accel-
eration power.
Depressing the accelerator pedal allows the kickdown function to be acti-
vated in the desired driving program. This function has precedence over
the driving programme and serves for maximum acceleration of the
vehicle when exploiting the maximum power potential of the engine
without taking into account the current selector lever position (D, S or
Tiptronic). The gearbox shifts down to one or several gears in line with
the driving state and the vehicle accelerates. The gearbox does not shift
up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolu-
tions for this gear range.
WARNING
Please note that using the kickdown function can result in the
driven wheels spinning on a smooth or slippery road surface - risk
of skidding!
Dynamic shift programme
The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically. Shifting
up and down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of
pre-defined driving programmes.
Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the
most economical driving programme. Shifting up into a higher gear as
soon as possible and shifting down as late as possible will have a favour-
able effect on your fuel consumption.
Adopting a sporty style of driving with rapid movements of the acceler-
ator pedal combined with sharp acceleration and frequent changes in
speed, exploiting the top speed of the car or depressing the accelerator
pedal (kickdown function), will cause the gearbox to switch over to this
style of driving and shift down earlier with frequent changes in gears in
comparison to the moderate style of driving.
Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style
of driving is a continuous process. Irrespective of this it is, however,
possible to switch or shift down into a dynamic shift programme by
depressing the accelerator rapidly. The gearbox shifts down into a lower
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox 153
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
gear matching the speed of the car and this allows you to accelerate
rapidly (e.g. when overtaking) without having to depress the accelerator
pedal fully into the kickdown range. The original programme will be reac-
tivated to match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has
shifted up again.
When driving in hilly regions, the gears are selected to match uphill and
downhill sections. This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down
when negotiating an uphill stretch. When driving downhill, it is possible to
shift down into the Tiptronic position, in order to exploit the engine brake
torque.
Tiptronic
The Tiptronic allows the driver to also shift gears manually.
Switching over to manual shifting
– Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. As soon
as the gearbox has switched over, 6 5 4 3 2 1 appears in the
display, with the gear engaged being highlighted.
Shifting up gears
– One-touch forward of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic posi-
tion) ⇒ fig. 138 .
Shifting down gears
– One-touch back of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position)
.
It is possible to switch over to manual both when the car is stationary and
also when driving.
Fig. 138 Selector
lever: Manual shifting
of gears
Fig. 139 Information
display: Manual
shifting of gears
A
+
A
-
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox154
When you accelerate, the gearbox shifts up automatically in gears 1, 2, 3,
4 and 5 into the next higher gear just before the maximum permissible
engine speed is reached.
If you select a lower gear, the automatic gearbox does not shift down until
there is no risk of the engine overrevving (does not apply to shifting from
2nd to the 1st gear).
If you operate the kickdown function, the gearbox shifts into a lower gear
in line with the vehicle speed and engine speed.
Emergency programme
An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in
the system.
The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there
are functional faults in the gearbox electronics. This is indicated by all of
the segments in the display lighting up or going out.
It is possible to continue to move the selector lever into all the positions.
In the positions D and S the gearbox remains engaged in the 3rd gear. It
is also possible to continue to engage reverse gear in the position R.
The manual shift programme (Tiptronic) is switched off in the emergency
mode.
If the gearbox has switched over to emergency mode, drive to the
nearest specialist garage in order to have the fault rectified.
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
In case of interruption of the power supply (e.g. flat vehicle
battery, defective fuse) or defect of the selector lever lock, the
selector lever can no longer be shifted from the position P in the
normal way and the vehicle can no longer be moved. The
selector lever must be unlocked in case of emergency.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Open the stowage compartment in front centre console* or the
front ashtray.
– Carefully pull up the front left and right cover.
– Pull up rear cover.
– Press with a narrow object (e.g. ignition key) the yellow plastic
hoop -arrow- to the left.
Fig. 140 Selector
lever-emergency
unlocking
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox 155
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Simultaneously press the shiftlock button in the handle of the
selector lever in the position N
7)
.
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
Tow-starting a vehicle
It is not possible to tow-start vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox
⇒ page 283.
you can use jump-start cables connected to the battery of another vehicle
for starting your car if the vehicle battery is flat ⇒ page 281.
Towing a vehicle
Please pay attention to the following information if it comes necessary to
tow-in your car ⇒ page 283.
7)
If the selector lever is moved again into the position P, it is once again blocked.
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox DSG156
Automatic gearbox DSG
Automatic gearbox DSG*
Introduction
Your car is equipped with an automatic gearbox DSG. The abbreviation
DSG means Direct shift gearbox (Direct shift gearbox).
Two independent clutches are needed for the power transmission
between the engine and the gearbox. These replace the torque converter
of the conventional automatic gearbox. Their shifting is matched in such a
way that there are no jerks when shifting the gear and the power transmis-
sion of the engine to the front wheels is not interrupted.
Information for driving with the automatic gearbox
DSG
Shifting up and down through the gears is performed auto-
matically.
You can also, however, switch the gearbox over into the
Tiptronic mode. This mode makes it possible for you to also shift
gears manually ⇒ page 160.
Starting-off and Driving
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
– Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector
lever), move the selector lever into the desired position, e.g. D
⇒ page 157, and then release the Shiftlock button.
– Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator ⇒ .
Stopping for a short time
– The selector lever position N does not have to be selected
when stopping just for a short time, such as at cross roads. It
is sufficient to hold the vehicle stationary using the foot brake.
The engine can, however, be allowed just to idle.
Parking
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the
selector lever to P and then release the Shiftlock button.
The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or
N ⇒ page 140. At temperatures below -10 °C the engine can only be
started in the selector lever position P.
It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat
surface. When parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake
firmly and then move the selector lever into position P. This is to ensure
that there is no excessive pressure acting on the lock mechanism and that
it is easier to subsequently move the selector lever out of position P.
If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first
necessary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox DSG 157
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
speed of the engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the
selector lever.
WARNING
• Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of
the selector lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running
- risk of accident!
• Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving
- risk of an accident!
• If you are stopping at a hill (downhill section), never try to hold
the car stationary with the gear engaged by means of the “acceler-
ator”, this means by letting the clutch slip. This can lead to over-
heating of the clutch. If there is a risk of overheating of the clutch
due to overload, the clutch is opened automatically and the vehicle
rolls backward - risk of accident!
• If you must stop at a slope, depress and hold the brake pedal,
so that you can prevent the vehicle from rolling back.
Caution
• The double clutch on the automatic gearbox DSG is equipped with an
overload protection. If you make use of the uphill function on a vehicle
which is stationary or driving slowly uphill, it will result in an increase of
thermal stress of the clutches.
• An overheating of the clutches can be detected by the flashing of the
selector level indicator and the “jerk” of the clutches, finally the clutches
are opened. The power transmission from the engine to the front wheels
is interrupted and as a result of this the vehicle can no longer be driven. If
the clutch opens automatically, depress the brake pedal, wait a few
seconds and only then continue driving.
Selector lever positions
The selector lever position you have engaged is shown in the information
display of the instrument cluster with the corresponding gear symbol high-
Fig. 141 Selector lever
Fig. 142 Information
display: Selector lever
positions
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox DSG158
lighted ⇒ fig. 142. In the positions D and S the gear you have engaged will
be additionally displayed on the display.
P - Parklock
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position.
The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary ⇒ .
If you wish to move the selector lever into or out of this position, you must
press the Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and at the
same time depress the brake pedal.
If the battery is used, the selector lever cannot be moved out of the posi-
tion P ⇒ page 162.
R - Reverse
Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine idling ⇒ .
The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock
must be pressed, if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R, P or
N.
When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position R, the
reverse lights will come on.
N - Neutral
The transmission is in Neutral in this position.
The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer
than 2 seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position N
into the position D, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at
less than 5 km/hour or on a stationary vehicle.
The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer
than 2 seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position N
into the position R, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at
less than 5 km/hour or on a stationary vehicle.
D - Drive, position for driving forward
When the selector lever is in this position, the forward gears are shifted up
and down automatically in line with engine load, vehicle speed and the
dynamic shift programme.
You must depress the brake pedal ⇒ if you wish to move the selector
lever into position D from N when the vehicle is travelling at less than
5 km/hour or is stationary.
In certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountainous regions or
when towing a trailer) it may be beneficial to select the manual shift
programme ⇒ page 160 for a short time in order to adapt the gearbox
ratios manually to the driving situations.
S - Position for sporty style of driving
Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the
power potential of the engine. The gearbox also then shifts down at higher
engine speeds as in the position D.
The gearbox does not shift into the 6th gear in the position S, because the
maximum speed is achieved with the 5th gear.
The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the
selector lever out of the position D into the position S.
WARNING
• Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving
- risk of an accident!
• When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is
necessary to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions
of the selector lever (except P and N) since the power transmission
is never completely interrupted, also not when the engine is idling
- the vehicle "creeps".
• You must on no account unintentionally operate the throttle
(e.g. by hand from the engine compartment) if a drive position is
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox DSG 159
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
engaged when the car is stationary. The vehicle would otherwise
immediately start off - also when the handbrake is firmly applied -
risk of an accident!
• You must move the selector lever into position P and firmly
apply the handbrake first before you or any other person opens the
bonnet and starts working on the engine when it is running - risk
of accident! It is also essential to observe all warnings ⇒ page 248,
“Working in the engine compartment”.
Selector lever lock
Automatic selector lever lock
With the ignition on, the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions
P and N. You must first of all depress the brake pedal in order to move the
selector lever out of this position. The warning light ⇒ page 38 lights up
in the instrument cluster as a reminder for the driver when the selector
lever is in position P and N
In addition, the symbol for the automatic selector lever lock in the shift
gate lights up.
A time delay element ensures that the selector lever is not blocked when
rapidly switching over the position N (e.g. from R to D). This does, for
example, allow one to seesaw out a stuck vehicle. The selector lever lock
will click into place if the lever is in the N position for more than 2 seconds
without the brake pedal being pressed.
The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving
at speed of less than 5 km/hour. The lock is switched off automatically into
position N when the car is travelling at a higher speed.
Shiftlock button
The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain
selector lever positions being engaged inadvertently. The selector lever
lock is cancelled when you press the Shiftlock button.
Keylock - Ignition key withdrawal lock
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the
selector lever is in position P. If the ignition key is withdrawn, the selector
lever is blocked in postion P.
Kickdown function
The kickdown function provides you with maximum accel-
eration power.
Depressing the accelerator pedal allows the kickdown function to be acti-
vated in the desired driving program. This function has precedence over
the driving programme and serves for maximum acceleration of the
vehicle when exploiting the maximum power potential of the engine
without taking into account the current selector lever position (D, S or
Tiptronic). The gearbox shifts down to one or several gears in line with
the driving state and the vehicle accelerates. The gearbox does not shift
up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolu-
tions for this gear range.
WARNING
Please note that using the kickdown function can result in the
driven wheels spinning on a smooth or slippery road surface - risk
of skidding!
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox DSG160
Dynamic shift programme
The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically. Shifting
up and down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of
pre-defined driving programmes.
Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the
most economical driving programme. Shifting up into a higher gear as
soon as possible and shifting down as late as possible will have a favour-
able effect on your fuel consumption.
Adopting a sporty style of driving with rapid movements of the acceler-
ator pedal combined with sharp acceleration and frequent changes in
speed, exploiting the top speed of the car or depressing the accelerator
pedal (kickdown function), will cause the gearbox to switch over to this
style of driving and shift down earlier with frequent changes in gears in
comparison to the moderate style of driving.
Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style
of driving is a continuous process. Irrespective of this it is, however,
possible to switch or shift down into a dynamic shift programme by
depressing the accelerator rapidly. The gearbox shifts down into a lower
gear matching the speed of the car and this allows you to accelerate
rapidly (e.g. when overtaking) without having to depress the accelerator
pedal fully into the kickdown range. The original programme will be reac-
tivated to match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has
shifted up again.
When driving in hilly regions, the gears are selected to match uphill and
downhill sections. This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down
when negotiating an uphill stretch. When driving downhill, it is possible to
shift down into the Tiptronic position, in order to exploit the engine brake
torque.
Tiptronic
The Tiptronic allows the driver to also shift gears manually.
Fig. 143 Selector
lever: Manual shifting
of gears
Fig. 144 Information
display: Manual
shifting of gears
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox DSG 161
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Switching over to manual shifting
– Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. As soon
as the gearbox has switched over, 6 5 4 3 2 1 appears in the
display, with the gear engaged being highlighted ⇒ page 160,
fig. 144.
Shifting up gears
– One-touch forward of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic posi-
tion) ⇒ page 160, fig. 143 .
Shifting down gears
– One-touch back of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position)
.
It is possible to switch over to manual both when the car is stationary and
also when driving.
When you accelerate, the gearbox shifts up automatically in gears 1, 2, 3,
4 and 5 into the next higher gear just before the maximum permissible
engine speed is reached.
If you select a lower gear, the automatic gearbox does not shift down until
there is no risk of the engine overrevving. (Does not apply for the shifting
from 2nd to 1st gear.)
If you operate the kickdown function, the gearbox shifts into a lower gear
in line with the vehicle speed and engine speed.
Emergency programme
An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in
the system.
The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there
are functional faults in the gearbox electronics. This is indicated by all of
the segments in the display lighting up or going out.
A functional fault can have the following effect:
• The gearbox only shifts into certain gears.
• The reverse gear R cannot be used.
• The manual shift programme (Tiptronic) is switched off in the emer-
gency mode.
If the gearbox has switched over to emergency mode, drive to the
nearest specialist garage in order to have the fault rectified.
A
+
A
-
.
,
,
Automatic gearbox DSG162
Selector lever-emergency unlocking (DSG)
In case of interruption of the power supply (e.g. flat vehicle
battery, defective fuse) or defect of the selector lever lock, the
selector lever can no longer be shifted from the position P in the
normal way and the vehicle can no longer be moved. The
selector lever must be unlocked in case of emergency.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Open the stowage compartment in front centre console* or the
front ashtray.
– Carefully pull up the front left and right cover.
– Pull up rear cover.
– Press with a narrow object (e.g. ignition key) the yellow plastic
hoop -arrow- to the left.
– Simultaneously press the shiftlock button in the handle of the
selector lever in the position N
8)
.
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
Tow-starting a vehicle
It is not possible to tow-start vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox
⇒ page 283.
you can use jump-start cables connected to the battery of another vehicle
for starting your car if the vehicle battery is flat ⇒ page 281.
Towing a vehicle
Please pay attention to the following information if it comes necessary to
tow-in your car ⇒ page 283.
Fig. 145 Selector
lever-emergency
unlocking
8)
If the selector lever is moved again into the position P, it is once again blocked.
.
,
,
Communication 163
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Communication
Multifunction steering wheel*
Operating the radio system
The driver can set the basic functions of the radio system by simply oper-
ating the buttons on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the
traffic situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating
the radio system ⇒ fig. 146.
This applies only if your radio equipment has been installed at the factory.
You can of course operate the radio system at the appliance. You will find
a description in the operating instructions of your radio system.
If the headlights are switched on, the buttons on the steering wheel come
on when pressing the button .
By pressing the buttons, you can carry out the following functions:
The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio
system.
Fig. 146 Multifunction
steering wheel:
Buttons for the opera-
tion of the radio
Button Radio Cassette CD
Button for stored
transmitter
forward
without function Title search
forward
Increase volume
Decrease volume
Button for stored
transmitter back
without function Title search
back
Lighting of buttons
Frequency search
back
Fast rewind
Reading the
previous CD
Frequency search
forward
Fast forward
Reading the
following CD
Mute switch
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
.
,
,
Communication164
Radio and mobile phone operation
The driver can set the basic functions of the radio and mobile phone
system by simply operating the buttons on the steering wheel so that he
can concentrate on the traffic situation without being distracted as little as
possible by operating the radio and mobile phone system ⇒ fig. 147.
This applies only if your radio and mobile phone equipment has been
installed at the factory. You can of course operate the radio and mobile
system at the appliance. You will find a description in the operating
instructions of your radio system.
If the headlights are switched on, the buttons on the steering wheel come
on when pressing the button .
By pressing the buttons, you can carry out the following functions:
Fig. 147 Multifunction
steering wheel:
Buttons for the radio
and mobile phone
operation
Button Radio Cassette CD Phone
Button for stored
transmitter forward
without
function
Title search
forward
without function
Increase volume
Decrease volume
Button for stored
transmitter back
without
function
Title search
back
without function
Lighting of buttons
without function
Reject, end a call, reach one level higher in the menu
Switching over between radio system and mobile phone
Receive, accept a call, call up menu telephone,
confirm menu selection
without function
Activation/deactivation button for voice control
(button PTT)
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
.
,
,
Communication 165
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio
system.
Note
The operation of the mobile phone fitted with multifunction steering wheel
is only possible on certain models of mobile phone. More detailed infor-
mation is available from your Škoda dealer.
Universal telephone preinstallation with
voice control*
Description
The voice control is activated according to equipment installed on the
vehicle by pressing the button PTT (push to talk) on the adapter
⇒ fig. 148 or the button on the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ page 164,
fig. 147.
A phone phonebook is part of the mobile phone preinstallation with voice
control. In the phone phonebook there are 50 free memory locations avail-
able. This phone phonebook is independent of the appliance used for the
mobile telephone.
For vehicles fitted with multifunction steering wheel, the operation is
performed via the function buttons on the steering wheel ⇒ page 164.
Furthermore the volume can be changed individually at any time with the
button for setting the radio or on vehicles fitted with multifunction steering
wheel* with function buttons on the steering wheel.
If the system answers with the voice response “Telephone is not ready”,
please check the operating state of the telephone as follows:
• Is the telephone switched on?
• Is the PIN code entered?
Dialogue
The period, in which the telephone system is ready to receive voice
commands and carry out the voice commands, is called DIALOGUE. The
system gives audible feedback and guides you if necessary through the
relevant functions. You can start or end the dialogue at any time by
pressing the PTT button. You can also end the dialogue with the voice
command CANCEL.
The dialogue is always automatically ended after carrying out an opera-
tion, e.g. after erasing the name from the phonebook.
The dialogue of the incoming call is immediately interrupted and you can
accept the call by pressing the button .
If a voice command is not detected, the system answers with “Pardon?”
and a new entry can be performed. After the 3rd error the answer
“Cancel” is given and the dialogue is ended.
Fig. 148 Button for
switching on the voice
control
.
,
,
Communication166
Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on the
following factors:
• Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive
voice pauses.
• Avoid insufficient articulation.
• Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, in order to reduce or stop
disturbing exterior noise.
• It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone
of your voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise.
• During the dialogue avoid additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. simulta-
neously talking occupants.
• Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.
• The hands-free microphone is directed to the driver position, therefore
the system should only be operated by the driver.
WARNING
Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation! As the driver you are
fully responsible for the traffic safety. Use the telephone system
only to such an extent, so that you are in full control of your vehicle
at any time.
Caution
Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to
interruption of the connection. When taking out the mobile phone, the
connection to the factory-fitted antenna is interrupted, this reduces the
quality of the transmitting and receiving signal. This might result addition-
ally in harmful radiation from the mobile phone in the interior of the vehicle
and the charging of the telephone battery is interrupted.
Note
• Please also refer to the additional instructions ⇒ page 175, “Mobile
phones and two-way radio systems”.
• Please contact your Škoda dealer If there are any points which are not
clear.
• The voice control of the telephone is only possible for adapters with
PTT button. Suitable adapters are available at your Škoda dealer.
Inserting the mobile phone and adapter
A telephone mount is factory-fitted. The mount is attached to the
centre console. The adapter “Cullmann” and the mobile phone is
supplied within the scope of delivery of the vehicle.
Fig. 149 Universal
preparation for the
mobile phone
.
,
,
Communication 167
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Inserting the mobile phone and adapter
– First of all push the adapter in the direction of arrow
⇒ page 166, fig. 149 up to the stop into the mount. Press the
adapter slightly downwards, until it locks securely into posi-
tion.
– Insert the mobile phone into the adapter (as specified in
manufacturer's instructions).
Removing the mobile phone and adapter
– Press simultaneouly the side locks of the mount and remove
the mobile phone and adapter ⇒ page 166, fig. 149.
This enables you to make full use of the advantages of a normal carphone
(“handsfree system” using a microphone integrated in the vehicle, optimal
transmission of signals using an external aerial etc.). The battery of the
mobile phone is also constantly charged.
Mobile phone operation
If you select the menu Phone in the information display and the phone is
not in the adapter, Insert phone is shown on the display.
After inserting the phone in the adapter, the system begins to load the
phone book from the phone into the information display. The following is
shown one after the other on the display:
Please wait
Loading... last calls xxx
Loading... last calls xxx
Loading... missed calls xxx
Loading... phone book xxx
After the loading process has ended, the first three names out of the
phone book are shown.
Using the system
A
A
A
A
Fig. 150 Information
display: Controls
.
,
,
Communication168
• You can scroll through the telephone memory for individual names or
menus by briefly pressing the rocker switch ⇒ page 167, fig. 150.
• You can scroll for letters alphabetically within the telephone memory
by pressing the rocker switch at the bottom for a lengthy period.
• You can always return to one level higher in the menu of the informa-
tion display by pressing the rocker switch at the top for a lengthy
period.
• The selected menu is displayed by briefly pressing the button .
Overview of the possible functions and read outs:
You can operate the mobile phone via the voice control ⇒ page 165 or via
the buttons of the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ page 164.
Voice commands
Voice commands for mobile phone operation
Voice commands for operating the phone phone book
Activity Read out in display
Selected call
number
Calling... Name Number
accepted call
incoming call... Name
or
incoming call... Number
or
incoming call...
Accept
Refuse
Call termi-
nated
Terminated
Number
engaged
Line Busy
No service
found
No Service
Enter PIN
code
Enter PIN
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
Voice command Activity
ENTER PIN/PIN
CODE
After this command the PIN code of the mobile
phone can be entered ⇒ page 169.
DIAL NUMBER
After this command a telephone number can
be entered which establishes a connection to
the requested partner ⇒ page 170.
REDIAL
After this command the last selected telephone
number is selected again ⇒ page 170.
Voice command Activity
SAVE/STORE
NAME/NUMBER
After this command a name with its telephone
number can be stored in the phone phone book
⇒ page 171.
SELECT
NAMES/NAME
After this command a telephone number which
was stored under its given name in the phone
phone book can be selected ⇒ page 171.
DELETE
NAMES/NAME
After this command a name in the phone phone
book can be erased ⇒ page 172.
LISTEN TO/PLAY
PHONEBOOK
After this command you can listen-in to the
phone phone book ⇒ page 172.
DELETE PHONE-
BOOK
After this command the complete phone book
or a name can be erased ⇒ page 172.
.
,
,
Communication 169
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Other possible commands
Enter PIN code
A PIN code must be entered before operating the system.
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command ENTER PIN/PIN CODE after the signal
tone.
After this command the PIN code can be entered.
The entry of the PIN code is only possible if:
• The ignition and
• the mobile phone are switched on.
The digits zero to nine are permitted. The system detects no continuous
digit combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken
digits (two, three). After each order of digits (separation through brief voice
pause) the detected digits are repeated.
Notes for entering the PIN code
• When entering a PIN code with more than 8 digits, the system indi-
cates “The PIN is too long”.
• When entering an incorrect PIN code, the system indicates “The PIN
is incorrect”.
• If the incorrect PIN code has been entered three times consecutively,
the card is blocked. With the aid of the personal unblocking code PUK
(Personal Unblock Key), the SIM card can be unblocked. The unblocking
code can only be entered via the phone keypad and not through the
voice control.
Example for entering the PIN code
Voice command Activity
DIAL The telephone number is selected.
STORE
The name and the telephone number are
stored in the phone phonebook or the entered
PIN code is stored.
REPEAT
The entered name or the digits are repeated.
Then the system requests with voice response
“please proceed” the entry of further digits or
commands.
BACK
The entered name or the last entered order of
digits is erased. Previously entered groups of
digits are repeated. Then the system requests
with voice response “please proceed” the entry
of further digits or commands.
DELETE
All entered digits are erased. Then the system
requests with voice response “The number is
deleted. The number please” the entry of fur-
ther digits or commands.
CANCEL The dialogue is ended.
Voice command Announcement
ENTER PIN/PIN CODE “The PIN please”
e.g. ZERO ONE TWO THREE “Zero One Two Three”
If no entry is put in, the following announcement is made after about 5
seconds.
“Possible commands are: store,
repeat, back, delete or more digits”
STORE/SAVE
“The PIN is saved”
(end of dialogue)
.
,
,
Communication170
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or
with the voice command CANCEL.
Select number
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command DIAL NUMBER after the signal tone.
After giving this command, the system requests the entry of a telephone
number. The telephone number can be entered as an interconnected
spoken row of digits (complete number), in the form of order of digits
(separation through a brief voice pause) or through individually spoken
digits. After each order of digits (separation through brief voice pause) the
detected digits are repeated.
The digits zero to nine are permitted. The system detects no continuous
digit combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken
digits (two, three).
When entering more than 20 digits, the system answers with voice
response “The number is too long”.
Additionally for international calls a Plus (+) has to be entered in front of
the 20 digits.
Example when entering a telephone number
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or
with the voice command CANCEL.
Repeat last call
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command REDIAL after the signal tone.
After giving this command, the last number selected via voice input is
selected again.
Example of redial
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or
with the voice command CANCEL.
Voice command Announcement
DIAL NUMBER “The number please”
e.g. ZERO SIX ZERO THREE “Zero Six Zero Three”
If no entry is put in, the following announcement is made after about 5
seconds.
“Possible commands are: dial,
repeat, back, delete or more digits”
FIVE SEVEN TWO
“Five Seven Two”
DIAL “The number is being dialed”
Voice command Announcement
REDIAL “The number is being dialed”
Voice command Announcement
.
,
,
Communication 171
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Phone Phonebook*
Store name
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command SAVE/STORE NAME/NUMBER after the
signal tone.
After giving this command, the system requests the entry of a name and
a telephone number which should be stored in the phone phonebook. In
the phone phonebook up to 50 entries can be stored.
The telephone number can be entered as an interconnected spoken row
of digits (complete number), in the form of order of digits (separation
through a brief voice pause) or through individually spoken digits. After
each order of digits (separation through brief voice pause) the detected
digits are repeated.
The digits zero to nine are permitted. The system detects no continuous
digit combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken
digits (two, three).
When entering more than 20 digits, the system answers with voice
response “The number is too long”.
Additionally a Plus (+) has to be entered in front of the 20 digits.
The stored entry is displayed on the information display* with an arrow in
front of the name.
For similar names additional information (e.g. first names) should be
stored.
Example for storing in the phone phonebook
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or
with the voice command CANCEL.
Select name
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command DIAL/SELECT NAMES/NAME after the
signal tone.
After giving this command, there is the possibility to select a stored entry
out of the phone phonebook.
Voice command Announcement
SAVE/STORE
NAME/NUMBER
“The name please”
COMPANY XYZ “Please repeat the name”
COMPANY XYZ “The number please”
ZERO ONE TWO THREE “Zero One Two Three”
FOUR FIVE SIX “Four Five Six”
If no entry is put in, the following announcement is made after about 5
seconds.
“Possible commands are: store, repeat,
back, delete or more digits”
STORE “The name COMPANY XYZ is stored”
.
,
,
Communication172
Example for selecting an entry out of the phone phonebook
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or
with the voice command CANCEL.
Listening-in to the phonebook
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command LISTEN TO/PLAY PHONEBOOK after
the signal tone.
After giving this command the phone phone book is read out by the
system. By pressing the PTT button when announcing the desired name
the corresponding number is being dialed; the system answers: “The
number is being dialed”.
Erase name
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command DELETE NAMES/NAME after the signal
tone.
After giving this command, there is the possibility to erase a stored entry
in the phone phone book.
Example for erasing an entry out of the phone phonebook
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or
with the voice command CANCEL.
If the user answers with NO, the system answers with “Cancel” and the
dialogue is ended.
Delete phonebook
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command DELETE PHONEBOOK after the signal
tone.
Voice command Announcement
SELECT NAMES/NAME “The name please”
FIRMA XYZ “Company XYZ”
If no entry is put in, the following announcement is made after about 5
seconds.
“Possible commands are: dial, repeat,
back”
DIAL “The number is being dialed”
Voice command Announcement
DELETE NAMES/NAME “The name please”
FIRMA XYZ
“Do you want to delete the entry Firma
XYZ?”
YES “Delete?”
If no entry is put in, the following announcement is made after about 5
seconds.
“Possible commands are: yes, no, repeat,
correct”
YES “The name is deleted”
.
,
,
Communication 173
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
After giving this command there is the possibility to erase the complete
phone phone book or the individually stored names out of the phone
phone book.
Example for erasing the complete phonebook
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or
with the voice command CANCEL.
Example for erasing individual names out of the phone phonebook
As long as the phonebook is read out, other entries can be erased by
pressing the PTT button.
You can end the dialogue at any time with the voice command
CANCEL.
Bluetooth™*
The Bluetooth technology serves as cableless connection
of a mobile phone to a hands-free system of your vehicle.
In order to connect a mobile phone with Bluetooth to the hands-
free system, it is necessary to adapt the phone and the hands-
free system to each other. Detailed information on this is
provided in the operating instructions of your mobile phone. The
following essential steps for connecting the mobile phone must
be carried out:
– Switch on the ignition.
– If necessary switch on the mobile phone.
Voice command Announcement
DELETE PHONEBOOK
“Do you want to delete the whole
phonebook?”
If no entry is put in, the following announcement is made after about 5
seconds.
“Possible commands are: yes,
no, repeat”
YES “Are you sure?”
YES “The phonebook is deleted”
Voice command Announcement
DELETE PHONEBOOK
“Do you want to delete the whole
phonebook?”
If no entry is put in, the following announcement is made after about 5
seconds.
“Possible commands are: yes,
no, repeat”
NO The phonebook is read out.
When announcing the entry to be
erased, press the PTT button.
“Do you want to delete (name)?”
If no entry is put in, the following announcement is made after about 5
seconds.
“Possible commands are: yes,
no”
YES “The name is deleted”
Continue reading out the phone
book.
Voice command Announcement
.
,
,
Communication174
– Select the corresponding menu option on the mobile phone,
which searches for suitable Bluetooth devices (hands-free
system).
– If the hands-free system on the display of the mobile tele-
phone announces Skoda UHV, enter the PIN 1234 within 30
seconds and wait, until the connection is established.
9)
In the modern business world as well as within the private sector the
mobile communication gains increasingly on importance. Mobile phones
from different manufacturers can be connected with the hands-free
system by means of Bluetooth. During the connecting procedure, no other
mobile phone may be connected via Bluetooth with the hands-free
system.
Up to four mobile phones can be connected to the hands-free system by
means of Bluetooth, whereby only one mobile phone can communicate
via Bluetooth with the hands-free system. If a fifth mobile phone is
connected to the handsfree-system, then the telephone, which has not
been used together with the handsfree system for the longest period, is
disconnected.
Establishing the Bluetooth connection
After switching on the ignition, the Bluetooth connection is automatically
established for the already adapted mobile phone
9)
. You can hear an
increasing tone sequence from the loudspeakers of the vehicle.
Disconnecting the Bluetooth connection
After withdrawing the ignition key, the Bluetooth connection is dison-
nected. You can hear an increasing tone sequence from the loudspeakers
of the vehicle.
WARNING
• Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation! As the driver you
are fully responsible for the traffic safety. Use the telephone
system only to such an extent, so that you are in full control of your
vehicle at any time - risk of accident!
• In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth function of the hands-
free-system must be switched off by a specialist garage.
Caution
Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to
interruption of the connection. When taking out the mobile phone, the
connection to the factory-fitted antenna is interrupted, this reduces the
quality of the transmitting and receiving signal. This might result addition-
ally in harmful radiation from the mobile phone in the interior of the vehicle
and the charging of the telephone battery is interrupted.
Note
• Not valid for all mobile phones which enable a communication via
Bluetooth.
• Please operate your mobile phone exclusively with a suitable adapter,
in order to keep a low radiation in the vehicle.
• Inserting the mobile phone into the adapter ensures an optimal
sending and receiving power and offers at the same time the advantage
of the battery charging.
• If you insert the mobile telephone into the adapter, the connection is
established via the interface in the adapter set and the Bluetooth connec-
tion is disconnected. You can hear an increasing tone sequence from the
loudspeakers of the vehicle.
• Note that the range of the Bluetooth connection to the handsfree-
system is limited to the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local
factors, e.g. obstacles between the devices and interferences with other
9)
Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorization for establishing a
Bluetooth connection is performed via the input of a code. If the input for the au-
thorization is necessary, it must always be performed when re-establishing the
Bluetooth connection.
.
,
,
Communication 175
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
devices. If your mobile phone is e.g. in a jacket pocket, this can lead to
difficulties when establishing the Bluetooth connection with the handsfree-
system or the data transfer.
• If you have set the Portuguese language in the information display, it
is used automatically for the mobile phone operation, as this is the
language, which was entered during coding of the handsfree-system.
Mobile phones and two-way radio
systems
The installation of a mobile phone and two-way radio system in a vehicle
should only be carried out by a Škoda Dealer.
Škoda Auto permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio
systems with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum
transmission power of up to 10 watts.
Our specialist garage is also happy to inform you about the possibilities
available for installing and operating mobile telephones and radio trans-
mitters which have an output greater than 10 watts. The Škoda dealers
can provide you with details about the technical possibilities for retrofitting
of mobile telephones and radio transmitters.
Operation of mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with
functioning of the electronic systems of your vehicle. The reasons for this
may be:
• no external aerial
• external aerial incorrectly installed
• transmission power greater than 10 watts.
You should therefore not operate a mobile phone or two-way radio
system inside the vehicle without the use of an external aerial, or with
an external aerial which has been incorrectly installed.
You should also be aware of the fact that only an external aerial makes it
possible to achieve the optimal range of such equipment.
WARNING
• If a mobile phone or two-way radio system is operated inside the
vehicle without using an external aerial, or with an external aerial
which has been incorrectly installed, the result can be excessive
electromagnetic fields which may cause harm to your health.
• Please always pay full attention to the traffic situation around
you!
• You must not install two-way radio systems, mobile phones or
mounts on the covers of the airbags or within the immediate
deployment range of airbags. This might result in injuries to the
occupants in the event of an accident.
Note
Please also refer to the operating instructions of the mobile phones and
two-way radio systems.
.
,
,
Communication176
The CD changer*
The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in
the left side compartment of the luggage compartment.
Loading a CD
– Touch the button and guide the CD (compact disc) into the
CD-case . The CD is automatically loaded onto the next
free position in the CD-changer. The LED in the corre-
sponding button stops flashing.
Loading all CDs
– Hold the button pressed and guide all CDs one after the
other into the CD-case . The LEDs in the buttons are no
longer flashing.
Loading a CD to one definite position
– Touch button . The LEDs in the buttons light up at the
memory spaces, which are already assigned and flash in the
case of free memory spaces.
– Touch the desired button and guide the CD into the CD-
case .
Ejecting a CD
– Touch the button , in order to eject a CD. For assigned
memory spaces, now the LEDs light up in the buttons .
– Touch the corresponding button . The CD is ejected.
Ejecting all CDs
– Hold the button pressed for more than 2 seconds, in order
to eject the CDs. All CDs in the CD-changer are ejected
consecutively.
Note
• Always guide the CD into the CD-case with the printed side
pointing upwards.
• Never push the CD with force into the CD-case as the insertion is
performed automatically.
• After loading a CD into the CD-changer, you must wait until the LED of
the corresponding button lights up. Then the CD-case is free to
load the next CD.
• If you have selected a position, on which a CD is already located, this
CD will be ejected. Take out the ejected CD and load the desired CD.
Fig. 151 The CD
changer
A
C
A
B
A
D
A
C
A
B
A
D
A
C
A
D
A
D
A
B
A
A
A
D
A
D
A
A
A
B
A
D
A
B
.
,
,
Passive Safety 177
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Safety
Passive Safety
Basic information
Driving the safe way
Passive safety measures reduce the risk of injury in acci-
dent situations.
In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the
subject of passive safety in your vehicle. We have combined everything
here which you should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts,
airbags, child seats and safety of children. It is therefore important, in
particular, to comply with the notes and warnings in this section for your
own interest and in the interest of those travelling with you.
WARNING
• This chapter contains important information on how to use the
vehicle for the driver and his occupants. You will find further infor-
mation on safety, which concerns you and those travelling with
you, in the following chapters of this Owner's Manual.
• The complete on-board literature should always be in the
vehicle. This applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the
vehicle.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is part of the occupant protection
and it can reduce the risk of injuries in accident situations.
“Do not put at risk” your safety and the safety of those travelling with you
. In the event of an accident, the safety equipment can reduce the risk of
injuries. The following list contains part of the safety equipment in your
vehicle:
• Three-point seat belts for all the seats,
• belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats*,
• belt tensioner for front and outer rear seats*,
• seat belt height adjuster for front seats,
• front airbag for the driver and the front seat passenger,*
• side airbags*,
• head airbags*,
• anchoring points for child seat using the “ISOFIX” system,
• head restraint adjustable for height,
• adjustable steering column.
The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally
protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations. The safety
equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you, if you or
your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not
correctly adjusted or used.
.
,
,
Passive Safety178
For this reason you will be provided with information on why this equip-
ment is very important, how it protects you and the occupants, what
should be observed when using the equipment and how you and the
people travelling with you can make full use of the existing safety equip-
ment. This Owner's Manual contains important warning notes, which you
and those travelling with you should pay attention to in order to reduce a
risk of injury.
Safety concerns everybody!
Before setting off
The driver is always fully responsible for his occupants
and for the operating safety of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you,
please pay attention to the following points before setting off:
• Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning
properly.
• Inspect the tyre inflation pressure.
• Ensure that all the windows offer a good visibility to the outside.
• Safely attach the items of luggage ⇒ page 92, “Loading the luggage
compartment”.
• Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedal.
• Adjust the mirror, the front seat and the head restraint to match your
body size.
• Point out to your occupants that the head restraints must be adjusted
to match their body size.
• Protect the children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat
belts ⇒ page 202, “Transporting children safely”.
• Adopt the correct seated position ⇒ page 179, “Correct seated posi-
tion”. Also inform your occupants to adopt the correct seated position.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly. Also inform your occupants to properly
fasten the seat belts ⇒ page 186, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”.
What influences the driving safety?
The driving safety is primarily determined by the style of
driving and the personal behaviour of all the occupants.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving
safety is effected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk.
Please refer to the following guidelines.
• Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g. by
your occupants or mobile phone calls.
• Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. through medica-
tion, alcohol, drugs.
• Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
• Adjust the driving speed at all times to the road condition as well as to
the traffic and weather conditions.
• Take regular breaks on long journeys - at the latest every two hours.
.
,
,
Passive Safety 179
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Correct seated position
Correct seated position for the driver
Correct seated position for the driver is important for safe
and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent, we recommend the following setting:
• Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering
wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm ⇒ fig. 152.
• Position the driver seat in the forward/back direction so that you are
able to press the pedals with your legs at a slight angle .
• Adjust the backrest so that you are able to reach the highest point of
the steering wheel with your arms at a slight angle.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is
at the same level as the upper part of your head ⇒ fig. 153.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 186, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”.
Manual driver seat adjustment ⇒ page 83, “Adjusting the front seats”.
Electrical driver seat adjustment ⇒ page 84, “Adjusting front seats electri-
cally*”.
Fig. 152 The correct
distance of the driver
from the steering wheel
Fig. 153 The correct
head restraint adjust-
ment for the driver
.
,
,
Passive Safety180
WARNING
• The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted
to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts
must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal
protection for you and your occupants.
• The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the
steering wheel ⇒ page 179, fig. 152. Not maintaining this minimum
distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to prop-
erly protect you - hazard!
• When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on
the outer edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold
the steering wheel firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another
way (e.g. in the middle of the steering wheel or at the inner steering
wheel edge). In such cases, injuries to the arms, the hands and the
head can occur when the driver airbag is deployed.
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving
otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of
the airbag system - risk of injury!
• Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects
may get behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre.
You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or
accelerate.
Correct seated position for the front passenger
The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least
25 cm from the dash panel so that the airbag offers the
greatest possible safety when an airbag is deployed.
For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of an accident, we recommend the following setting:
• Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible to the rear.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is
at the same level as the upper part of your head ⇒ page 179, fig. 153.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 186, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”.
In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated
⇒ page 199, “Deactivating an airbag”.
Manual front passenger adjustment ⇒ page 83, “Adjusting the front seats”.
Electrical front passenger seat adjustment ⇒ page 84, “Adjusting front
seats electrically*”.
WARNING
• The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted
to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts
must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal
protection for you and your occupants.
• The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm
to the dash panel. Not maintaining this minimum distance will
mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you
- hazard!
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being
driven - never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the
window or on the surfaces of the seats. You will be exposed to
increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake
or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may
suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving
otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of
the airbag system - risk of injury!
.
,
,
Passive Safety 181
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear
seats
Occupants on the rear seats must sit upright, keep the feet
in the footwell and must have their seat belts correctly
fastened.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or
an accident, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following:
• Adjust the head restraints so that the top edge of the head restraints
are at the same level as the upper part of your head ⇒ page 179, fig. 153.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 186, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”.
• If you are transporting ⇒ page 202, “Transporting children safely” chil-
dren in the vehicle, please use a suitable child restraint system.
WARNING
• The head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body
size, in order to offer an optimal protection for you and your occu-
pants.
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being
driven - never put your feet out of the window or on the surfaces of
the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it
becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an acci-
dent. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when
adopting an incorrect seated position!
• If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk
of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt.
Examples of an incorrect seated position
An incorrect seated position can lead to severe injuries or
death for the occupants.
Seat belts offer their optimum protection only if the webbing of the seat
belts is properly routed. Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce
the protective functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of
injury due to an incorrect routing of the seat belt. The driver is fully respon-
sible for himself and the occupants, in particular for the children. Do not
permit an occupant to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is
moving.
The following list contains the examples of seated positions which are
dangerous for the occupants. This list is not complete, however we would
like you to get interested in this subject.
Therefore, while the car is moving never:
• stand up in the vehicle,
• stand up on the seats,
• kneel onto the seats,
• tilt the backrest fully to the back,
• lean against the dash panel,
• lie on the rear seats,
• only sit on the front area of the seat,
• sit to the side,
• lean out of the window,
• put the feet out of the window,
• put the feet on the dash panel,
• put the feet on the seat upholstery,
• occupy the footwell,
• have the seat belt not fastened,
.
,
,
Passive Safety182
• occupy the luggage compartment.
WARNING
• If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is
exposed to life-threatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed
airbag.
• Before setting off, please adopt the correct seated position and
do not change this seated position while the car is moving. Also
advise your occupants to adopt the correct seated position and not
to change this seated position while the car is moving.
.
,
,
Seat belts 183
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Seat belts
Why seat belts?
It is a proven fact that seat belts offer good protection in accidents
⇒ fig. 154. Thus wearing a seat belt is a legal requirement in most coun-
tries.
Seat belts which have been correctly fastened and adjusted hold the
occupants of the car in the correct seated position ⇒ fig. 154. The belts
reduce the kinetic energy (energy of motion) to a considerable extent.
They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well result
in severe injuries.
The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their
seat belt, profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is
optimally absorbed by the belts. The structure of the front end of the
vehicle and other passive safety measures, such as the airbag system,
also contribute to reducing the kinetic energy. The energy produced is
thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury.
Accident statistics prove that seat belts which are fastened and properly
adjusted reduce the risk of an injury and enhance the chance of survival
in a major accident ⇒ page 184.
It is important that you pay attention to safety measures, particularly when
transporting children in the vehicle ⇒ page 202, “What you should know
about transporting children!”.
WARNING
• Fasten your seat belt each time before setting off, also when
driving in town! This also applies to the people seated at the rear -
risk of injury!
• Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the
only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child
⇒ page 186, “Fastening a three-point seat belt”.
• It is important for the belt webbing to be properly routed if the
seat belts are to offer the maximum protection. You can see a
description of how safety belts should be fitted properly on the
next pages.
Note
Please comply with any differing legal requirements when using the seat
belts.
Fig. 154 Driver
wearing seat belt
.
,
,
Seat belts184
The physical principle of a frontal
collision
The physical principle of a frontal accident can be explained quite simply:
Motion energy, so-called kinetic energy, is produced as soon as the
vehicle is moving, both for the vehicle and its occupants. The magnitude
of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle and the occupants.
The greater the speed and weight increase, the greater the amount of
energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident.
The speed of the vehicle is, nevertheless, the most important factor.
Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour
increases the kinetic energy four times.
The common opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor
accident with your hands, is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low
speed, the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible
to support your body.
Even if you only drive at a speed within the range from 30 km/hour to 50
km/hour, the forces which are produced on your body in the event of an
accident can easily exceed 10,000 N (Newton). This equals a weight of
one tonne (1 000 kg).
In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the car not wearing a seat
belt, are thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the inte-
rior of the car, such as steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen,⇒ fig. 155.
The occupants of a vehicle who have not fastened their seat belts may
even be thrown out of the vehicle. This can result in fatal injuries.
It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they
will otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in
the event of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the
seat belt is a danger not only to himself but also for those seated at the
front ⇒ fig. 156.
Fig. 155 The driver is
thrown forward if not
wearing a belt
Fig. 156 The rear seat
occupant is thrown
forward if not wearing a
belt
.
,
,
Seat belts 185
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Important safety information regarding
the use of seat belts
The correct use of the seat belts considerably reduces the
risk of injury!
WARNING
• The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point
or twisted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
• It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat
belts are to offer their maximum protection ⇒ page 186, “How are
seat belts correctly fastened?”.
• No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat
belt together.
• The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only
achieved if you are correctly seated ⇒ page 179, “Correct seated
position”.
• The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects
(e.g. spectacles, ball-point pens, keys etc.) as this may be a cause
of injuries.
• Bulky, loose clothing (e.g. a winter coat over a jacket) does not
allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
• It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat
belts (e.g. for shortening the belts for smaller persons).
• The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is
the correct one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will
reduce its capacity to protect and the risk of injury increases.
• The backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the
rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
• The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt
webbing may impair proper operation of the inertia reel ⇒ page 240,
“Seat belts”.
• The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked by paper or
similar objects otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place prop-
erly.
• Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condi-
tion. If you find seat belts which have damage to the seat belt
webbing, seat belt connections, to the inertia reels or to the lock,
the relevant safety belt must be replaced by a specialist garage.
• The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do
not make an attempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
• Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an
accident and were therefore stretched, must be replaced - this is
best done by a specialist garage. The anchorage points of the belts
must also be inspected. The anchorage points for the belts should
also be checked.
• In certain countries it is possible to use seat belts which differ
in terms of their operation from the seat belts which are described
on the pages which follow.
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Seat belts186
How are seat belts correctly fastened?
Fastening a three-point seat belt
Fasten your seat belt before starting!
– Correctly adjust the front seat and the head restraint before
fastening your seat belt ⇒ page 82.
– Slowly pull the belt webbing at the tongue of the lock over your
chest and pelvis ⇒ .
– Insert the tongue of the lock into the seat belt buckle belonging
to the seat until it is heard to lock in place.
– Pull on the belt to check that it has also reliably engaged in the
lock.
Each three-point seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel. This inertia reel
offers you complete freedom of movement if the belt is unreeled slowly. If
the brakes are applied suddenly, the inertia reel will block. It also blocks
the belts when the car accelerates, when driving uphill and when
cornering.
Expectant mothers must also wear the seat belt ⇒ .
WARNING
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across your
neck but must run approximately over the middle of the shoulder
and fit snugly against the chest. The lap part of the belt must run
across the hip and must never be routed across the stomach. It
must always fit snugly ⇒ fig. 157. Adjust the belt webbing as
required.
• The lap part of the belt should be positioned as low as possible
at the pelvis of an expectant mother in order to avoid exerting any
pressure on the lower abdomen.
• Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly
routed. Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves
cause injuries even in minor accidents.
Fig. 157 Routing of
webbing over the
shoulders and the lap
belt
Fig. 158 Routing of
belt webbing for an
expectant mother
.
,
,
Seat belts 187
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as
your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an
accident and is then suddenly held firm by the belt.
• Only insert the lock tongue into the lock which is the correct one
for your seat. This will affect the protection which the belt offers
and increase the risk of an injury.
Seat belt height adjuster
The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible for you to adapt
the routing of the three-point seat belt in the area of the shoulder
to match your body size.
– Move the height adjuster in the desired direction up or down
⇒ fig. 159.
– Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height
adjuster has correctly locked in place.
WARNING
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of
the belt is positioned approximately across the middle of your
shoulder - on no account across your neck.
Note
It is also possible to adapt the routing of the belt webbing at the front seats
by adjusting the height of the seat.
Taking seat belts off
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 159 Front seat:
Seat belt height
adjuster
Fig. 160 Releasing
lock tongue from belt
lock
.
,
,
Seat belts188
– Press the red button in the belt lock ⇒ fig. 160. The spring
force causes the tongue of the lock to jump out.
– Guide the belt back with your hand to enable the inertia reel to
wind up the belt webbing more easily.
A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which
is easy to get hold of.
Three-point safety belt for the middle rear seat
Your car is equipped as standard with the three-point seat belt in the
middle rear seat. It is used in the same way as the three-point seat belts
on the left and right (at front and rear).
WARNING
The three-point safety belt for the rear middle seat can only fulfil its
function reliably when the backrests are correctly locked into posi-
tion ⇒ page 90.
Belt tensioners
Safety for the driver and passengers wearing their seat belts, is
enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front and
rear side three-point seat belts, in addition to the protection afforded by
the airbag system.
The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a
frontal collision of a certain severity. The belt tensioners can also be
deployed if the seat belts are not fastened.
The belt tensioner is deployed in the event of a frontal collision of major
severity. A powder charge is ignited in the inertia reels during deployment.
The belt webbing is pulled into the inertia reels by a mechanical system
and the belt is tensioned.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions,
side and rear-end collisions, in the case of a rollover and also not in acci-
dents in which no major forces are produced from the front.
WARNING
• The service life of seat belts and belt tensioners is 15 years from
the date of manufacture of the vehicle. It is then necessary to have
the seat belts replaced by a specialist garage.
• Any work on the system including removal and installation of
system components because of other repair work, must only be
carried out by a specialist garage.
• The protective function of the system is only adequate for a
single accident. If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then
necessary to replace the entire system.
• The Owner's Manual must also be handed over to the new
owner if the vehicle is sold.
Note
• Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not
an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
• It is essential to pay attention to relevant safety regulations if the
vehicle or individual parts of the system are scrapped. Specialist garages
are familiar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with
detailed information in this respect.
.
,
,
Seat belts 189
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• When disposing of vehicle or parts of the system, it is important to
comply with the national legal requirements.
.
,
,
Airbag system190
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
General information on the airbag system
The front airbag system is complementary to the three-point seat belts
and offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver
and passenger in the event of a frontal collision.
In the case of a violent side crash, the side* and head* airbags reduce the
risk of injuries to the occupants on the part of the body facing the side of
the accident ⇒ .
The airbag system is only functional after the ignition has been switched
on.
The operational readiness of the airbag system is monitored electroni-
cally. The airbag warning light comes on for a few seconds each time the
ignition is switched on.
The airbag system (according to vehicle equipment) essentially
consists of:
• an electronic control unit,
• front airbag for the driver and the front seat passenger*,
• side airbags*,
• head airbags*,
• an airbag warning light in the instrument cluster,
• a front passenger airbag switch* ⇒ page 200,
• an indicator light showing a switched-off front passenger airbag* in the
middle of the dash panel ⇒ page 200.
A fault in the airbag system exists if:
• the airbag indicator light does not light up when the ignition is switched
on,
• the warning light does not go out after about 4 seconds after the igni-
tion is switched on,
• the airbag indicator light goes out and comes on again after the ignition
is switched on,
• the airbag indicator light comes on or flickers when driving,
• an airbag indicator light showing a switched-off front passenger
airbag* in the middle of the dash panel flashes.
WARNING
• To enable the occupants of a car to be protected with the
greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed, the front
seats must be ⇒ page 179, “Correct seated position” correctly
adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
• If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far
forward or adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing
yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.
• Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist
garage if a fault exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not
being activated in the event of an accident.
• No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag
system.
• It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag
system as this might result in the airbag being deployed.
.
,
,
Airbag system 191
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for
only one accident. The airbag system must then be replaced if the
airbag has been deployed.
• The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working
life.
• The service life of the airbag system is 15 years from the date of
manufacture of the vehicle. Have the airbag system replaced by a
specialist garage after this period. If the modules of the system are
replaced before the expiry of the term (e.g. because of an accident),
the new change interval has to be entered in the service brochure.
• If you sell your car, please hand over the complete vehicle docu-
mentation to the new owener. Please note that the documents
relating to the possibility of deactivating the front passenger airbag
are also part of the vehicle documents!
• If the vehicle or individual parts of the airbag system are
scrapped, it is essential to observe the relevant safety precautions.
Škoda dealers are familiar with these regulations.
• When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is
important to comply with the national legal requirements.
When are the airbags deployed?
The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver airbag and the
front passenger airbag* are deployed in the event of a frontal collision of
major severity.
In the case of a violent side crash, the side airbag* on the side of the car
at which the collision occurs, is deployed together with the head airbag*.
In certain accident situations it is possible that both the front as well as the
side airbags and the relevant head airbag are deployed at the same time.
The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side colli-
sions, in the case of rear-end collisions and vehicle rollover.
Deployment factors
It is not possible to state globally which deployment conditions apply to the
airbag system in every situation as the circumstances which exist in the
case of accidents vary greatly. An important role in this case, for example,
is played by factors such as the type of object against which the vehicle
impacts (hard, soft), the angle of impact, the vehicle speed etc.
A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration
which occurs during a collision. The control unit analyses the nature of the
collision and activates the relevant restraint system. If the vehicle decel-
eration which occurs and is measured during the collision remains below
the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit, the airbags
are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to
the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The airbags are not deployed if:
• ignition off,
• a minor frontal collision,
• a minor side collision,
• a rear-end collision,
• rollover.
Note
• A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This
is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
• The dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has
been deployed.
• In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed:
− The interior lighting comes on (if the switch for the interior light is in
the door contact position),
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Airbag system192
− The hazard warning light is switched on,
− All the doors are unlocked,
− The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
Front airbags
Description of the front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belt!
The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel ⇒ fig. 161.
The front airbag for the front passenger* is housed in the dash panel
above the storage compartment ⇒ fig. 162. The installation positions are
each marked with the “AIRBAG” logo.
The front airbag system, in combination with three-point safety belts,
offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and
front passenger in the event of a frontal collision of major severity ⇒ in
“Important safety information regarding the front airbag system” on
page 194.
The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but is part of the complete
passive vehicle safety concept. Please note that an airbag can only
offer you optimal protection in combination with a seat belt which is
fastened..
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts
is to also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position
in the event of a frontal collision so as to enable the front airbags to offer
the maximum protection.
Fig. 161 Driver airbag
in the steering wheel
Fig. 162 Front
passenger airbag in the
dash panel
.
,
,
Airbag system 193
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
You should therefore always fasten ⇒ page 183, “Why seat belts?” the
seat belts, not only because this is required by law, but also for safety
reasons and for your own protection.
Note
The dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has
been deployed.
Function of the front airbags
Risk of injury to the head and chest area is reduced by fully
inflated airbags.
The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver and the front
passenger airbag* are deployed in the event of a frontal collision of major
severity.
In certain accident situations both the front airbags as well as the head
and side airbags may be deployed together.
If the airbags are deployed, the airbags are filled with a propellant gas and
inflated in front of the driver and front passenger ⇒ fig. 163. The airbags
inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to
offer that additional protection in the event of an accident. The forward
movement of the driver and of the front passenger is cushioned when they
make contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and
chest is thus reduced.
The specially developed airbag allows the gas to flow out of the inflated
airbag in a controlled manner (depending on the load of the particular car
occupant) in order to cushion head and chest areas. The airbag then
deflates subsequently to such an extent, after an accident, to again
provide a clear view forward.
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is
perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to
injuries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct ⇒ in
“Important safety information regarding the front airbag system” on
page 194.
Fig. 163 Inflated
airbags
.
,
,
Airbag system194
Important safety information regarding the front
airbag system
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the
risk of injury!
WARNING
• Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without
using a proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event
of an accident, the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!
• For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a
distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel
⇒ fig. 164. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that
the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
The front seats and the head restraints must always also be
correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 199, “Deactivating an
airbag” the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety
seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its
back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also when the
child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a
risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front
passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal
provisions also require that the side or head passenger airbags be
deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat,
please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding
the use of child safety seats.
• There must not be any further persons, animals or objects posi-
tioned between the front seated occupants and the deployment
area of the airbag.
• The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the
dash panel on the passenger side must not be stuck onto, covered
or modified in any other way. These parts should only be cleaned
with a dry cloth or a cloth moistened with water. No objects such
as cup holders, mobile phone mounts, etc. may be attached to the
covers of the airbag modules or be located within the immediate
area.
• No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag
system. Any work on the airbag system including installing and
removing system components because of other repair work (e.g.
removing the steering wheel) must only be carried out by a
specialist garage.
• Never carry out changes on the front bumper or on the body.
• Never place any objects on the surface of the front passenger
airbag in the dash panel.
Fig. 164 Safe distance
to steering wheel
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Airbag system 195
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The side airbag together with the head airbag offers
enhanced occupant protection in the event of a side colli-
sion.
The side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the backrests of the front
seats ⇒ fig. 165.
The side airbag system in combination with the three-point seat belts,
offers additional protection for the upper area of the body (chest, stomach
and pelvis) of the occupants of the car in the event of a side collision of
major severity ⇒ in “Important safety information on the side airbag” on
page 196.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts
is to also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position
in the event of a side collision so as to enable the side airbags to offer the
maximum protection.
You should therefore always fasten ⇒ page 183, “Why seat belts?” the
seat belts, not only because this is required by law, but also for safety
reasons and for your own protection.
Each time the side airbags are deployed, the head airbag* on the relevant
side is automatically deployed at the same time in order to provide the
occupant with enhanced protection ⇒ page 197.
Function of the side airbags
Risk of injury to the upper part of the body is reduced by
fully inflated side airbags.
In the case of a violent side crash the side airbag on the front seat on the
side on which the collision occurs is deployed ⇒ fig. 166.
Fig. 165 Installation
position of side airbag
in driver seat
Fig. 166 Inflated side
airbag
.
,
,
Airbag system196
In certain accident situations both the front airbags as well as the head
and side airbags may be deployed together.
If an airbag is deployed, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. The
airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be
able to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident.
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is
perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully
inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest,
stomach and pelvis) is reduced on the side facing the door.
Important safety information on the side airbag
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the
risk of injury!
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 199, “Deactivating an
airbag” the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety
seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its
back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also when the
child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a
risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front
passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal
provisions also require that the side or head passenger airbags be
deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat,
please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding
the use of child safety seats.
• Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of
the side airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an
accident. This applies in particular to children who are transported
without using a suitable child safety seat ⇒ page 205, “Child safety
and side airbags*”.
• If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling,
they may be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of
an accident. This can result in serious injuries ⇒ page 202, “What
you should know about transporting children!”.
• There must not be any further persons, animals as well as
objects positioned between the occupants and the deployment
area of the airbag. There must also be no accessories such as cup
holders, attached to the doors to enable the side airbags to activate
properly.
• The airbag control unit operates together with the pressure
sensors, which are attached in the front doors. For this reason no
adjustments must be carried out at the doors as well as at the door
panels (for example additional installation of loudspeakers).
Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of
the airbag system. All work on the front doors and their panels
must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
• In the event of a side collision, the side airbags will not function
properly, if the sensors cannot measure the increasing air pressure
inside the doors, because the air can escape through large, non-
sealed openings in the door panel.
− Never drive with removed inner door panels.
− Never drive, if parts of the inner door panel have been
removed and the remaining openings have not been properly
sealed.
− Never drive, if the loudspeakers in the doors have been
removed, only if the loudspeaker openings have been properly
sealed.
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Airbag system 197
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
− Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled, if
additional loudspeakers or other equipment parts are installed
in the inner door panels.
− Always work with a Škoda dealer or have it carried out by a
competent specialist workshop.
• Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the
vehicle. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets of the items of clothing.
• Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent
knocks, kicks etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise
the system may be damaged. The side airbags would not be
deployed in such a case!
• Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front
passenger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by
Škoda Auto. In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the
backrest of the seat, use of non-approved seat or protective covers
would considerably impair the protective function of the side
airbag.
• Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side
airbag module must be repaired without delay by your specialist
garage.
• The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any
damage, cracks or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force
in order to open the modules.
• Any work on the side airbag system including removing and
installing system components because of other repair work (e.g.
removing seats) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Head airbags*
Description of the head airbags
The head airbag together with the side airbag offers
enhanced occupant protection in the event of a side colli-
sion.
The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the inte-
rior of the car ⇒ fig. 167. The installation positions are each marked with
the “AIRBAG” logo.
The head airbag together with the three-point seat belts and the side
airbags, offers additional protection for the head and neck area of the
occupants in the event of a side collision of major severity ⇒ in “Impor-
tant safety information on the head airbag” on page 198.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts
is to also hold the driver and the occupants in a correct seated position in
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 167 Installation
position of the head
airbags
.
,
,
Airbag system198
the event of a side collision so as to enable the head airbags to offer the
maximum protection.
You should therefore always fasten ⇒ page 183, “Why seat belts?” the
seat belts, not only because this is required by law, but also for safety
reasons and for your own protection.
Together with other elements (such as cross bars in the seats, stable
vehicle structure) the head airbags are the consequent further develop-
ment of occupant protection in the case of side collisions.
Function of the head airbags
The risk of injury to the head and neck area is reduced in
the event of a side collision by fully inflated head airbags.
In the case of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with
the relevant side airbag on the side of the car on which the accident occurs
⇒ fig. 168.
If the head airbag is deployed, the airbag is filled with propellant gas and
extends over the entire area of the side window including the door pillars
⇒ fig. 168.
The protection offered by the head airbags is thus available simultane-
ously both to the front occupants of the car seated on the side on which
the accident occurs, as well as to the rear occupants. Any impact of the
head against parts of the interior or objects outside of the car, is cushioned
by the inflated head airbag. The reduction in any impact to the head and
the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head additionally reduce
the risk of injuries to the neck area. The head airbag also offers additional
protection in the case of an offset impact by covering the front door pillar.
In certain accident situations both the front airbags as well as the side and
head airbags may be deployed together.
The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to
be able to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident. A
grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is
perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
Important safety information on the head airbag
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the
risk of injury!
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 199, “Deactivating an
airbag” the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety
seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its
back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also when the
child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a
risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front
passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal
Fig. 168 Inflated head
airbag
.
,
,
Airbag system 199
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
provisions also require that the side or head passenger airbags be
deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat,
please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding
the use of child safety seats.
• There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the
head airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating prop-
erly.
• Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the
vehicle. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets of the items of clothing. In addition, it is not permitted to
use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing.
• The airbag control unit operates together with the sensors,
which are attached in the front doors. For this reason no adjust-
ments must be carried out at the doors as well as at the door panels
(for example additional installation of loudspeakers). Resulting
damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag
system. All work on the front doors and their panels must only be
carried out by a specialist garage.
• There must not be any other persons (e.g. children) or animals
between the car occupant and the deployment area of the head
airbag. In addition, none of the occupants should lean their head
out of the window when driving, or extend their arms and hands out
of the window.
• The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into
the deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as
ball-point pens etc. are attached to them. This might result in inju-
ries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed.
• Installing impermissible accessories in the area of the head
airbags may considerably impair the protection offered by the head
airbag in the event of it being deployed. When the deployed head
airbag is inflated, parts of the accessories fitted may in certain
circumstances be thrown into the interior of the car and cause inju-
ries to the occupants ⇒ page 270, “Accessories, changes and
replacement of parts”.
• Any work on the head airbag system including installing and
removing system components because of other repair work (e.g.
removing headliner) must only be carried out by a specialist
garage.
Deactivating an airbag
Deactivating airbags
If any airbags have been deactivated, switch them on
again as soon as possible so that they are able to again
provide their proper protection.
There is the technical means installed within your vehicle to switch off the
front, side* or head airbag* (take out of commission).
This is why you should have the deactivation of the airbags carried out by
a specialist garage.
On vehicles equipped with the switch for deactivation of the airbags, you
can deactivate the front and side passenger airbag by means of this
switch ⇒ page 200.
Deactivation of airbags is envisaged only for particular instances,
such as if:
• you must in exceptional cases use a child seat on the front
passenger seat where the child has its back to the direction of travel of the
vehicle (in some countries this must be in the direction of travel due to
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Airbag system200
other legal regulations applying) ⇒ page 202, “Important safety informa-
tion on using child safety seats”,
• you are not able to maintain the distance of at least 25 cm between
middle of steering wheel and chest, despite the driver seat being correctly
adjusted,
• special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel
because of a physical disability,
• you have installed other seats (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side
airbags).
Monitoring the airbag system
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically,
when one airbag has been switched off
If the airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment:
• The warning light for the airbag system lights up for 4 seconds after
switching on the ignition and then flashes for 12 seconds afterwards in 2
second intervals.
If the front passenger airbags were switched off using the switch for
front passenger airbags* in stowage compartment on the front
passenger side:
• The airbag warning light comes on in the instrument cluster for about
4 seconds each time the ignition is switched on.
• Switching off airbags is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the
lighting up of the indicator light   ⇒ fig. 170.
Note
Your Škoda dealer will be able to advise you whether national legislation
in your country allows airbags in your vehicle to be deactivated, and which
ones.
Switch for the front passenger airbag*
The front passenger airbag is deactivated with the switch.
Fig. 169 Storage
compartment: Switch
for the front passenger
airbag
Fig. 170 Indicator light
for the front passenger
airbag
.
,
,
Airbag system 201
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Deactivating airbags
– Switch off the ignition.
– Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the key in the position
(OFF) ⇒ page 200, fig. 169.
– Check whether the airbag indicator light
  in the
middle of the dash panel lights up ⇒ page 200, fig. 170 when
the ignition is turned on.
Switching on airbags
– Switch off the ignition.
– Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the key in the position
(ON) ⇒ page 200, fig. 169.
– Check whether the airbag indicator light
  in the
middle of the dash panel lights up ⇒ page 200, fig. 170 when
the ignition is turned on.
The airbags should only be switched off under exceptional circumstances
⇒ page 199.
Indicator light   (airbag switched off)
The airbag indicator light is located in the middle of the dash panel
⇒ page 200, fig. 170.
If the front passenger airbag is switched off, the airbag warning light
comes on about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on.
There is a system fault present in the airbag switch off ⇒ if the indicator
light flashes. Please have the car inspected immediately by a
specialist garage.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on
or switched off.
• Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off!
Otherwise a fault can occur in the system for the airbag deactiva-
tion.
• If the warning light   (airbag switched off) flashes:
− Front passenger airbag is not deployed in the event of an
accident!
− It is also important to have the system inspected without
delay by a specialist garage.
A
2
A
1
.
,
,
Transporting children safely202
Transporting children safely
What you should know about
transporting children!
An introduction to the subject
Accident statistics have revealed that children are gener-
ally more safely transported on the rear seats than on the
front passenger seat.
Children younger than 12 years of age should normally travel on the rear
seat of the vehicle (take note of any national legal provisions which differ
from this). They should be secured there by means of a child restraint
system or by using the existing seat belts depending on their age, body
size and weight. The child seat should be mounted behind the front
passenger seat for safety reasons.
The physical principle of an accident does, of course, also apply to chil-
dren ⇒ page 184, “The physical principle of a frontal collision”. They differ
from adults in that their muscles and bone structure of children are not yet
fully developed. Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury.
Children should be transported by using special child safety seats in order
to reduce this risk of injury.
Use only child safety seats which are officially approved and are suitable
for children and which comply with the ECE-R 44 Standard, which classi-
fies child safety seats into 5 groups ⇒ page 206, “Classification of child
seats into groups”. Child restraint systems which have been tested for
conformity with ECE-R 44 have a non-detachable test seal (a large E
within a circle and below this the test number) attached to the seat.
We recommend that you use child safety seats from the Škoda genuine
accessories. These child seats were developed and also tested for use in
Škoda vehicles. They fulfil the standard ECE-R 44.
WARNING
Always comply with legal provisions and instructions from the
relevant child safety seat manufacturer when installing and using
the child seat ⇒ in “Important safety information on using child
safety seats”.
Note
Any varying national legal regulations take priority over the information
provided in these instructions for use, or stated in this chapter.
Important safety information on using child safety
seats
Correct use of child safety seats considerably reduces the
risk of injury!
WARNING
• All the occupants of the car - in particular children - must wear
a seat belt when the car is moving.
• Children less than 1.50 m in height or younger than 12 years
must not use a normal seat belt without a child restraint system
.
,
,
Transporting children safely 203
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
otherwise this may result in injuries to the stomach and neck areas.
Comply with the national legal requirements.
• One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's
lap.
• You can transport a child safely in a suitable child safety seat
⇒ page 206, “Child seat”!
• Only one child may be fastened with a seat belt into a child
safety seat.
• Never leave the child sitting unattended in the seat.
• Certain outside climatic conditions can cause life-threatening
temperatures in the vehicle.
• Never allow your child to be transported in a vehicle without the
use of a suitable restraint system.
• Children should also never stand up in a vehicle or kneel on the
seats when the vehicle is moving. In the event of an accident the
child will be thrown through the vehicle and may as a result suffer
fatal injuries, and also injure other occupants.
• Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event
of an accident if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated
position when the vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to
children who are transported on the front passenger seat if the
airbag system deploys in the event of an accident. This can result
in severe or even fatal injuries.
• It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat
belts are to offer their maximum protection ⇒ page 186, “How are
seat belts correctly fastened?”. Pay particular attention to the
information provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat
regarding correct routing of the belt. Seat belts which are not
correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor
accidents.
• Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running
properly. One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by
sharp-edged fittings.
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 199 the front
passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in
direction of travel (in some countries also when the child is facing
the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a risk of the child
suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag
is deployed. In certain countries national legal provisions also
require that the side or head passenger airbags be deactivated.
When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please
comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use
of child safety seats.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Transporting children safely204
Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat
Child safety seats should always be attached to the rear
seats.
We recommend, for safety reasons, that you always mount a child
restraint systems on the rear seats whenever possible. If you still decide,
however, to use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat then you
must pay attention to the following warnings in connection with the use of
the airbag system on the front passenger seat.
WARNING
• Warning - particular hazard! Never use a child safety seat on the
front passenger seat in which the child is seated with its back
facing the direction of travel. This child safety seat is positioned in
the deployment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may
cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being
deployed.
• This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on the
centre column of the body on the front passenger side ⇒ page 204,
fig. 171. The sticker is visible upon opening the front passenger
door.
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 199, “Deactivating an
airbag” the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety
seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its
back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also when the
child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a
risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front
passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal
provisions also require that the side or head passenger airbags be
deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat,
please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding
the use of child safety seats.
• If the front passenger airbag has been switched off by a
specialist garage using the vehicle system tester, the side and
head passenger airbag* remains switched on. The national legal
provisions in certain countries require that both the front, side and
head airbags be deactivated. Please comply with any differing
national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
• If a child safety seat in which the child faces in the direction of
travel is used on the front passenger seat, the front passenger seat
must be moved back fully. For vehicles with height adjustable front
passenger seat, the seat must be put in the highest position.
• If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat
may suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger
airbag or airbags are deployed. Have the airbag (or airbags) deac-
tivated if necessary ⇒ page 199.
• You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reacti-
vated by your Škoda dealer just as soon as you no longer use a
child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Fig. 171 Sticker on the
centre column of the
body on the front
passenger side.
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Transporting children safely 205
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Child safety and side airbags*
Children must never be seated in the deployment area of
the side airbags and head airbags.
In the event of a side collision, the side airbags offer the vehicle occupants
enhanced protection.
The side airbags are inflated in fractions of a second in order to be able to
provide this protection ⇒ page 195, “Function of the side airbags”.
An airbag inflating develops such a strong force that an occupant who has
not adopted an upright seated position may suffer injuries from the airbag
or as a result of objects which are located within the deployment area of
the side airbag.
This applies particularly to children if they are not transported in
accordance with legal requirements.
The child must be protected when seated in a child safety seat matching
its age. Adequate room is available between the child and the deployment
area of the side airbag and head airbag. The airbag offers optimal protec-
tion.
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 199 the front
passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in
direction of travel (in some countries also when the child is facing
the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a risk of the child
suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag
is deployed. In certain countries national legal provisions also
require that the side or head passenger airbags be deactivated.
When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please
comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use
of child safety seats.
• When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please
comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use
of child safety seats.
• Children must never be seated with their head in the deploy-
ment area of the side airbag - risk of injury!
Fig. 172 Seated posi-
tion of an unprotected
child at risk from side
airbag
Fig. 173 Child properly
protected by safety
seat
.
,
,
Transporting children safely206
• Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side
airbag - risk of injury!
Child seat
Classification of child seats into groups
Only child safety seats which have an official approval and
are suitable for the child, may be used.
ECE-R 44 standard applies to child safety seats. ECE-R means:
Economic Commission of Europe - Regulation.
Child safety seats which have been tested for conformity with ECE-R 44
have a non-detachable test seal (a large E within a circle and below this
the test number) attached to the seat.
Child safety seats are classified in 5 groups:
Children of more than 150 cm in height may use the seat belts fitted to the
vehicle without a seat bolster.
Use of child seats
An overview of the usefulness of child seats on each of the seats
according to the EG guidelines 77/541 and ECE 44 standard:
Universal category - seat is suitable for all approved types of child
safety seats.
The seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the “ISOFIX system*”.
Group Weight
0 0 - 10 kg ⇒ page 207
0+ up to 13 kg ⇒ page 207
1 9 - 18 kg ⇒ page 207
2 15 - 25 kg ⇒ page 208
3 22 - 36 kg ⇒ page 209
WARNING (continued)
Child seat
groups
Front passenger
seat
Rear seat
outside
Rear seat
middle
0
0+
1
2 and 3
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
+
.
,
,
Transporting children safely 207
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Child seats of group 0/0+
The optimal solution for babies of up to about 9 months old weighing up
to 10 kg or babies up to about 18 months old weighing up to 13 kg is a
child safety seat which can be adjusted into the reclining position
⇒ fig. 174.
In view of the fact that such child seats are installed that the child is seated
with its back facing the direction of travel, they must not be used on the
front passenger seat⇒ page 204, “Use of child safety seats on the front
passenger seat”.
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag
(airbags) when attaching in exceptional circumstances a child
safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated
with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also
when the child is facing the direction of travel).
− in a specialist garage
− or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag*
⇒ page 200.
• In certain countries national legal provisions require that
besides the front airbag also the side or head airbags are deacti-
vated. Please comply with any differing national legal regulations
regarding the use of child safety seats.
• If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat
may suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger
airbag or airbags are deployed.
• You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reacti-
vated by your Škoda dealer just as soon as you no longer use a
child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Child safety seats in Group 1
Fig. 174 Child seats of
group 0/0+
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 175 Child seat
with padded table in
Group 1 installed on
rear seat bench facing
the direction of travel
.
,
,
Transporting children safely208
Child seats in Group 1 are for babies and small children up to 4 years of
age with a weight of between 9 and 18 kilograms. It is best for children in
the lower range of this group, to use a child seat which allows the child to
sit with its back to the direction of travel. It is best for children in the upper
range of the Group 0+, to use a child seat which allows the child to sit
⇒ page 207, fig. 175 in the direction of travel.
Child safety seats in which the child is seated with its back facing the
direction of travel, must not be used on the front passenger seat
⇒ page 204, “Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat”.
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag
(airbags) when attaching in exceptional circumstances a child
safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated
with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also
when the child is facing the direction of travel).
− in a specialist garage
− or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag*
⇒ page 200.
• In certain countries national legal provisions require that
besides the front airbag also the side or head airbags are deacti-
vated. Please comply with any differing national legal regulations
regarding the use of child safety seats.
• If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat
may suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger
airbag or airbags are deployed.
• You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reacti-
vated by your Škoda dealer just as soon as you no longer use a
child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Child safety seats in Group 2
For children up to about 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg
the optimal solution is a child safety seat in combination with the three-
point seat belt ⇒ fig. 176.
WARNING
• When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please
comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use
of child safety seats. If required, the airbag has to be deactivated,
− in a specialist garage
− or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag*
⇒ page 200.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately
across the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest.
It must on no account run across the neck. The lap part of the seat
belt must run across the pelvis and fits snugly; it must not run over
the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over your hip if necessary.
Fig. 176 Child seat in
Group 2 installed on
the rear seat facing the
direction of travel
.
,
,
Transporting children safely 209
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Please comply with any differing national legal regulations
regarding the use of child safety seats.
Child safety seats in Group 3
For children of about 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg and
of a height of less than 150 cm, the optimal solution is a child safety seat
(seat bolster) in combination with the three-point seat belt ⇒ fig. 177.
Children of more than 150 cm in height may use the seat belts fitted to the
vehicle without a seat bolster.
WARNING
• When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please
comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use
of child safety seats. If required, the airbag has to be deactivated,
− in a specialist garage
− or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag*
⇒ page 200.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately
across the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest.
It must on no account run across the neck. The lap part of the seat
belt must run across the pelvis and fits snugly; it must not run over
the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over your hip if necessary.
• Please comply with any differing national legal regulations
regarding the use of child safety seats.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 177 Child seat in
Group 3 installed on
the rear seat facing the
direction of travel
.
,
,
Transporting children safely210
Attaching child seat using the “ISOFIX”
system
There are two fixing eyes* between the backrest and the seat of
the front passenger for fixing the “ISOFIX” system child seat in
place. The locking eyes on the rear outside rear seats are located
below the upholstery. The places are marked with -ISOFIX-.
Install child seat
– Open the zip fasteners between the seat and the backrest of
the rear outside seat.
– Insert the mounting funnels onto the locking eyes
between the backrest and seat cushion ⇒ fig. 178.
– Push the notched arms of the child seat over the mounting
funnels into the locking eyes, until it is heard to lock ⇒ fig. 179.
– Pull on both sides of the child seat!
One can mount a child safety seat using the “ISOFIX” system quickly,
easily and reliably. Please pay close attention to instructions from the
manufacturer of the child safety seat when installing and removing the
seat.
Child seats fitted with the “ISOFIX” clamping system can only be mounted
and fixed in a vehicle fitted with an “ISOFIX system” when these child
seats have been released for this type of vehicle according to the ECE-R
44 standard.
You can obtain child seats with the “ISOFIX” attachment system from
specialist garages who will also installed it as well.
Complete installation instructions are enclosed with the child safety seat.
WARNING
• The locking eyes have just been developed for child safety
seats which use the “ISOFIX” system. You should therefore never
Fig. 178 Locking eyes
(ISOFIX system)
Fig. 179 The ISOFIX
child seat is pushed
into the mounting
funnels
A
A
A
B
.
,
,
Transporting children safely 211
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
attach other child safety seats, seat belts or objects to the locking
eyes - hazard!
• Ask a Škoda dealer whether a child seat which you bought for
another vehicle is recommended for use in a Škoda before using an
“ISOFIX” system.
• Certain child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system can be
attached with standard three-point seat belts. Please pay close
attention to instructions from the manufacturer of the child safety
seat when installing and removing the seat.
Note
Child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system are currently available for chil-
dren weighing from 9 up to 18 kg. This corresponds to an age range of
from 9 months to 4 years.
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Transporting children safely212
.
,
,
Intelligent Technology 213
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Driving Tips
Intelligent Technology
Electronic stability programme (ESP)*
General
General
The ESP aids you maintain control of your vehicle in situations in border-
line driving situations such as when negotiating a curve too fast. The risk
of skidding is reduced and your car thus offers greater driving stability
depending on the conditions of the road surface. This occurs at all speeds.
The following systems are integrated into the electronic stability
programme:
• Electronic Differential Lock (EDL),
• Traction control system (TCS),
• Driver-steering recommendation,
• Antilock brake system (ABS),
• Brake Assist,
• Uphill-Start off-Assist.
Operating principle
The ESP switches on automatically when the engine is started and then
conducts a self-test. The ESP control unit processes data from the indi-
vidual systems. It also processes additional measurement data which are
supplied by highly sensitive sensors: the rotational velocity of the vehicle
about its vertical axis, the lateral acceleration of the vehicle, the braking
pressure and the steering angle.
The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the
steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared
with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If differences exist, such as the
car beginning to skid, the ESP will automatically brake the appropriate
wheel.
The car is stabilised again by the forces which take effect when the wheel
is braked. Intervention into the brake system takes place primarily on the
outer front wheel of a vehicle which tends to oversteer (tendency for the
rear of the vehicle to break away) while occurs this is on the inner rear
wheel of a vehicle which tends to understeer (tendency to shift out of the
curve). This braking control cycle is accompanied by noises.
Fig. 180 ESP switch
.
,
,
Intelligent Technology214
The ESP operates in combination with the ABS ⇒ page 218, “Antilock
brake system (ABS)”. If there is a fault in the ABS system, the ESP also
does not operate.
The ESP warning light ⇒ page 40 lights up in the instrument cluster when
there is a fault on the ESP.
Switching off
You can switch the ESP off and on again as you wish, by pressing the
button ⇒ page 213, fig. 180. The ESP warning light ⇒ page 40 lights up in
the instrument cluster when the ESP is switched off.
The ESP should normally always be switched on. It may be good practice
in certain exceptional cases, such as when you wish to have wheel slip,
to switch off the system.
Examples:
• when driving with snow chains
• when driving in deep snow or on a loose surface
• when it is necessary to rock a car free when it has become stuck
then you should switch on the ESP again.
WARNING
It is also not possible for the ESP to overcome the physical limits
of the vehicle. Even if a vehicle fitted with ESP you should still
always adapt your style of driving to the condition of the road
surface and the traffic situation. This particularly applies when
driving on slippery and wet roads. The increased safety offered
must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an
accident!
Note
• All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve
problem-free operation of the ESP. Differing rolling circumferences of the
tyres can lead to an undesirable reduction in the engine output.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other
assignment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ESP
⇒ page 270, “Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock prevents an individual
wheel from slipping.
Models fitted with ESP are equipped with electronic differential lock (EDL).
General
The EDL makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off,
accelerate and climb a steep hill when the conditions of the road surface
are unfavourable.
Operating principle
The EDL is activated automatically, that is without any action on the part
of the driver. It monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the
ABS sensors. Should only one drive wheel begin spinning on a slippery
surface there will be an appreciable difference in the speed of the driven
wheels. The EDL function brakes the slipping wheel and the differential
transmits a greater driving force to the other driven wheel. This control
process is also accompanied by noises.
Overheating of the brakes
The EDL switches off automatically if unusually severe stresses exist in
order to avoid excessive heat generation in the disc brake on the wheel
.
,
,
Intelligent Technology 215
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
which is being braked. The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the
same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL.
The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled
down.
WARNING
• Depress the accelerator carefully when accelerating on
uniformly slippery road surfaces, such as ice and snow. The driven
wheels might still spin despite the EDL and affect the stability of
the vehicle - risk of an accident!
• You should always adapt your style of driving to the condition
of road surface and to the traffic situation even when your vehicle
is fitted with EDL. The increased safety offered must not tempt you
to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an accident!
Note
• If the ABS or ESP warning light comes on, this may also indicate a fault
in the EDL. Please have the car inspected as soon as possible by a
specialist garage.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other
assignment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the EDL
⇒ page 270, “Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels
from spinning when accelerating.
General
The TCS makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off,
accelerate and climb a steep hill when the conditions of the road surface
are unfavourable.
Operating principle
The TCS switches on automatically when the engine is started and then
conducts a self-test. The system monitors the speeds of the driven wheels
with the aid of the ABS sensors. If the wheels are spinning, the force trans-
mitted to the road surface is automatically adapted by reducing the engine
speed. This occurs at all speeds.
The TCS operates in combination with the ABS ⇒ page 218, “Antilock
brake system (ABS)”. The TCS will not function if a fault exists in the ABS
system.
Fig. 181 TCS switch
.
,
,
Intelligent Technology216
The TCS warning light ⇒ page 39 lights up in the instrument cluster when
there is a fault on the TCS.
Switching off
You can switch the TCS off and on again as you wish by pressing the
button ⇒ page 215, fig. 181. The TCS warning light ⇒ page 39 lights up in
the instrument cluster when the TCS is switched off.
The TCS should normally always be switched on. It may be good practice
in certain exceptional cases, such as when you wish to have wheel slip,
to switch off the system.
Examples:
• when driving with snow chains
• when driving in deep snow or on a loose surface
• when it is necessary to rock a car free when it has become stuck
then you should switch on the TCS again.
WARNING
You should always adjust your style of driving to the conditions of
the road surface and the traffic situation. The increased safety
offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise -
risk of an accident!
Note
• All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve
problem-free operation of the TCS. Differing rolling circumferences of the
tyres can lead to an undesirable reduction in the engine output.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other
assignment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the TCS
⇒ page 270, “Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
Driver-steering recommendation*
The driver-steering recommendation is an additional function of the elec-
tronic stability programme (ESP). This function indicates to the driver in
critical situations by means of slight steering wheel impulses the direction
evaluated by the system, in which the vehicle must be steered, so that it
stabilizes. The driver-steering recommendation is active when braking
sharply on different road surfaces and on the right and left vehicle side.
WARNING
Even with this additional function the vehicle cannot be steered
automatically! The driver is furthermore fully reponsible for the
steering of the vehicle!
Brakes
What has a negative effect on braking efficiency?
Wear-and-tear
Wear-and-tear to the brake pads is greatly dependent on the operating
conditions of the vehicle and your style of driving. Particularly if you drive
a great deal in towns and over short distances or if you adopt a sporty style
of driving, it may be necessary to have the thickness of the brake pads
inspected at a specialist garage between the service inspections.
Wet roads or road salt
There may be a certain delay before the brakes take full effect under
certain conditions such as when driving through water, during heavy rain
showers or after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic vehicle
wash, since the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or even have a
coating of ice on them in winter. You should dry the brakes as soon as
.
,
,
Intelligent Technology 217
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
possible (by applying and releasing the brakes several times, if the road
conditions and the traffic situation allows it).
There also may be a certain delay before the full braking efficiency is
available when driving on roads which have been treated with road salt if
you have not used the brakes for some considerable time beforehand.
The layer of salt on the brake discs and brake pads must first be rubbed
off when you apply the brakes.
Corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle
has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the
braking system.
We recommend cleaning the brake discs by firmly applying the brakes at
a fairly high speed if you do not make much use of the braking system or
if surface corrosion is present ⇒ .
Faults in the brake surface
If you notice that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and
that the brake pedal can be depressed further, it is possible that a brake
circuit of the dual-circuit brake system has failed. Drive, in such cases, to
the nearest specialist garage without delay in order to have the problem
rectified. Drive at a reduced speed while on your way to the dealer and
adapt your style of driving to the higher brake pedal pressure required.
Low brake fluid level
An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake
system. The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically ⇒ page 40,
“Brake system ”.
WARNING
• Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the
brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any
other road users in jeopardy.
• When retrospectively mounting a front spoiler, solid wheel hubs
etc. one must ensure that the air supply to the front wheel brakes
is not reduced otherwise the braking system could run too hot.
• Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full
braking efficiency until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake
pads must be first “run in” before they develop their optimal fric-
tion force. You can, however, compensate for this slightly reduced
braking force by increasing the pressure on the brake pedal. This
guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a future
date.
Caution
• Never allow the brakes to rub by applying slight pressure if you do not
wish to brake the vehicle. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also
result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear.
• Before negotiating a steep downhill section, please reduce your
speed, shift down into the next lower gear (manual gearbox) or select a
lower driving stage (automatic gearbox). This enables you to make full use
of the braking power of the vehicle and reduces the strain on the brakes.
Any additional braking should be done intermittently, not continuously.
Brake booster
The brake booster boosts the pressure which you generate with the brake
pedal. The necessary pressure is only generated when the engine is
running.
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Intelligent Technology218
WARNING
• Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary.
• The brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
Greater physical effort for braking is required when engine is
switched off. Because if you do not stop as normal, this can cause
an accident and severe injuries.
Antilock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking.
General
The ABS contributes significantly to enhancing the active safety of your
vehicle. Compared to a car not fitted with the ABS brake system, you are
able to retain optimal steering ability even during a full brake application
on a slippery road surface because the wheels do not lock up.
You must not expect, however, that the braking distance will be shorter
under all circumstances as a result of the ABS. The braking distance for
example on gravel and fresh snow, when you should anyway be driving
slowly and cautiously, will be longer.
Operating principle
The brake pressure will be reduced on a wheel which is rotating at a speed
which is too low for the speed of the vehicle and tending to lock. This
control cycle is noticeable from a pulsating movement of the brake
pedal which is accompanied by noises. This is consciously intended to
provide the driver with the information that the wheels are tending to lock
(ABS control range). You must always keep the brake pedal depressed to
enable the ABS to optimally control the brake application in this braking
range. Never interrupt the application of the brakes!
WARNING
• The ABS can also not overcome the physical limits of your
vehicle. Please do not forget this, particularly when driving on icy
or wet road surfaces. If the ABS is operating within the control
range, adapt your speed immediately to the conditions of the road
surface and the traffic situation. The increased safety offered by
the ABS must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise -
risk of an accident!
• The normal braking system is still fully functional if there is an
ABS fault. Visit a specialist garage as quickly as possible and
adjust your style of driving to take account of the ABS fault in the
meantime since you will not know how great the damage is.
Note
• A warning light comes on if a fault occurs in the ABS system
⇒ page 38.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other
assignment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ABS
⇒ page 270, “Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
Brake Assist*
During a severe brake application (e.g. if a hazard exists), the Brake
Assist increases the braking force and thus makes it possible to rapidly
produce the pressure required in the brake system.
The majority of drivers do apply the brakes in good time in dangerous situ-
ations, but do not depress the brake pedal with sufficient pressure. Conse-
quently, it is not possible for the car to achieve its maximum deceleration
and the car covers a greater distance than necessary.
.
,
,
Intelligent Technology 219
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The Brake Assist is activated by the very quick operation of the brake
pedal. In such cases, a much greater braking pressure exists than during
a normal brake application. This makes it possible, even with a relatively
low resistance of the brake pedal, to produce an adequate pressure in the
brake system in the shortest possible time, which is required for maximum
deceleration of the car. You must apply the brake pedal firmly and hold it
in this position in order to achieve the shortest possible braking distance.
The Brake Assist is able to help you achieve a shorter braking distance in
emergency situations by rapidly producing the pressure required in the
brake system. It fully exploits the attributes of the ABS. After you release
the brake pedal, the function of the Brake Assist is automatically switched
off and the brakes operate in the normal way.
The Brake Assist is part of the ESP system. If a fault occurs in the ESP,
the Brake Assist function is also not available. Further information on the
ESP ⇒ page 213.
WARNING
• The Brake Assist is also not able to overcome the physical
limits of your car in terms of the braking distance required.
• Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to
the traffic situation.
• The increased safety offered by the Brake Assist must not tempt
you to take a greater safety risk than otherwise.
Uphill-Start off-Assist*
The uphill-start off-assist makes it much easier to start off on steep hills.
The system assists a start off by holding the brake pressure produced by
the brake pedal actuation for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the brake
pedal. The driver can therefore move his foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal and start off on the slope, without having to actuate the
handbrake. The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the
accelerator pedal. If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds, it starts
to roll back.
The uphill-start off-assist is active in the event of a 5% slope, if the vehicle
door is closed. It is always active on slopes when in forward or reverse
start off. When driving downhill, it is inactive.
Electromechanical power steering
The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical
force.
With the electromechanical power steering, the steering assist is automat-
ically adapted to the speed and to the steering angle.
It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the
engine is not running (vehicle being towed in). The only difference is that
greater physical effort is required.
If there is a fault in the power steering, a red or yellow warning light
lights up in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 33.
WARNING
Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.
.
,
,
Intelligent Technology220
Tyre inflation pressure-control system*
The tyre inflation pressure-control system compares with the aid of the
ABS sensors the speed and also the rolling circumference of the individual
wheels. If the rolling circumference of a wheel is changed, the warning
light lights up in the dash panel insert ⇒ page 38. The rolling circumfer-
ence of the tyre can change if:
• the tyre inflation pressure is too low,
• the structure of the tyre is damaged,
• the vehicle is loaded on one side,
• the wheels of an axle are loaded heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
when driving uphill or downhill),
• snow chains are mounted,
• the temporary spare wheel is mounted,
• one wheel per axle was changed.
Basic setting of tyre inflation pressure-control system
After changing the tyre inflation pressures or after changing one or several
wheels, the button for the tyre inflation pressure-control system must be
pressed long enough until an acknowledegment tone sounds when the
ignition is switched on.
• Inflate all tyres to the specified inflation pressure ⇒ page 264.
• Switch on the ignition.
• Press the button  ⇒ fig. 182 long enough, until an acknowledg-
ment tone sounds, which confirms the storage of the basic values. As long
as the button  is pressed, the warning light lights up in the instru-
ment .
Warning light lights up
If the tyre inflation pressure of at least one wheel is insufficiently inflated
in comparison to the stored basic value, the warning light ⇒ lights
up.
Warning light flashes
If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Have the vehicle
inspected by your nearest specialist garage.
WARNING
• When the warning light lights up, immediately reduce the
speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Please
stop the vehicle without delay at the nearest possible stop and
inspect the tyres and their inflation pressures.
• The driver is responsible for the correct tyre inflation pressures.
For this reason, the tyre inflation pressures must be checked regu-
larly.
• Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry
or unpaved roads) the warning light can be delayed or does not
light up at all.
Fig. 182 Button for
setting the tyre infla-
tion pressure control
value
.
,
,
Driving and the Environment 221
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Driving and the Environment
The first 1 500 kilometres and then
afterwards
A new engine
The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilome-
tres.
Up to 1 000 kilometres
– Do not drive faster than 3/4 of the mamimum speed of the gear
in use, that is 3/4 of the maximum permissible engine speed.
– Do not use full throttle.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1 000 up to 1 500 kilometres
– Increase the power output of the engine gradually up to the
full speed of the gear engaged, that is up to the maximum
permissible engine revolutions.
During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than
later until all of the moving parts have harmonized. The driving style which
you adopt during the first approx.1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in
the success of running in your car.
You should not drive at unnecessarily high engine revolutions even
after the running-in period is complete. The maximum permissible engine
speed is marked by the beginning of the red zone on the scale of the revo-
lutions counter. Shift up into the next higher gear on a vehicle fitted with
manual gearbox before the red zone is reached. Extremely high engine
revolutions are automatically governed, by the way.
For a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the converse situation also
applies: Do not drive at engine revolutions which are too low. Shift down
as soon as the engine is no longer running smoothly.
Caution
All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is
at its normal operating temperature. Never rev up an engine which is cold,
neither when the vehicle is stationary nor when driving in individual gears.
For the sake of the environment
Not driving at unnecessarily high engine revolutions and shifting to a
higher gear as early as possible are ways to minimise fuel consumption
and operating noise levels and protects the environment.
New tyres
New tyres have to be “run in” since they do not offer optimal grip at first.
You should take account of this fact for the first 500 kilometres and drive
particularly carefully.
.
,
,
Driving and the Environment222
New brake pads
Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking effi-
ciency until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first
“run in” before they develop their optimal friction force. You can, however,
compensate for this slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pres-
sure on the brake pedal.
This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a future
date.
During the running-in period, you should avoid excessive stresses on the
brakes. This includes, for example, violent braking, particularly from very
high speeds, and also when crossing mountain passes.
Catalytic converter
Proper operation of the emission control system (catalytic
converter) is of major significance for driving your vehicle
in an environmentally conscious way.
Please refer to the following guidelines:
– For vehicles with petrol engine only refuel with unleaded petrol
⇒ page 242, “Grades of petrol”.
– Never run the fuel tank completely empty.
– Do not switch off the ignition while you are driving the vehicle.
– Do not pour too much oil into the engine ⇒ page 252, “Replen-
ishing engine oil”.
– Do not tow-start the vehicle over a distance of more than 50
metres ⇒ page 286, “Tow-starting a vehicle”.
If you drive your vehicle in a country in which unleaded petrol is not avail-
able, you must have the catalytic converter replaced later when driving the
vehicle into a country in which use of a catalytic converter is mandatory.
WARNING
• In view of the high temperatures which may be produced in the
catalytic converter, one should always park a vehicle in such a way
that the catalytic converter cannot come into contact with easily
flammable materials below the vehicle - a risk of fire!
• Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protec-
tion agents for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
shields. Such substances might ignite when driving - risk of fire!
Caution
• Vehicles fitted with catalytic converter should never be allowed to let
the fuel tank to run completely empty. An irregular fuel supply can result
in poor ignition or misfiring. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system
and damage the catalytic converter.
• Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the cata-
lytic converter being destroyed.
• If you detect misfiring, a drop in performance or irregular engine
running when driving, reduce your speed immediately and have the
vehicle inspected by the nearest specialist garage. The symptoms
described may be caused by a fault in the ignition system. Unburnt fuel
may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter.
.
,
,
Driving and the Environment 223
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
For the sake of the environment
Even if the exhaust system is operating properly, a sulphur-like exhaust
odour may be produced under certain operating conditions of the engine.
This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel. It is often sufficient to
refuel with unleaded premium-grade petrol of a different brand or at a
different filling station.
Driving in an economical and
environmentally conscious manner
General
Your personal style of driving is a major factor.
Your fuel consumption, any pollution of the environmental and the wear-
and-tear to the engine, brakes and tyres, depend essentially on three
factors:
• your personal style of driving,
• the conditions under which your vehicle is operated,
• technical aspects.
You can easily improve your fuel economy by 10 - 15 percent by driving
in an economical way with foresight. This section is intended to provide
you with a number of tips on how to protect the environment and at the
same time save money.
The fuel consumption can naturally also be influenced by factors which
are beyond the driver's control. It is, for example, normal for the fuel
consumption to increase in winter and under worsened conditions such as
poor road conditions, towing a trailer, etc.
The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of
the vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works. Special
attention has been given to minimising negative effects on the environ-
ment. It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in
order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their
effectiveness.
Looking ahead when driving
A vehicle's highest fuel consumption occurs when it accel-
erates.
Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily. If you drive with forsight
you will not need to brake so often and will also then not have to accel-
erate so much. Let your vehicle coast to a stop, for example, if this is
possible, when you see that the next set of traffic lights is at red.
.
,
,
Driving and the Environment224
Shifting gears and saving energy
Shifting up early saves on fuel.
Manual gearbox
– Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first
gear.
– Always shift up into the next higher gear at approx. 2 000 to 2
500 revs.
Automatic gearbox
– Depress the accelerator pedal slowly. Do not depress it
beyond the kickdown position, however.
An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early. You
will consume more fuel if you drive at unnecessarily high revolutions in
any given gear.
The ⇒ fig. 183 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your
vehicle for the individual gears. Fuel consumption in 1st gear is the
highest, while that in 5th or the 6th gear is the lowest.
Only depress the accelerator pedal slowly if your vehicle is fitted with an
automatic gearbox in order to automatically select an economic driving
programme. You will achieve good fuel economy by shifting up early and
shifting down late.
Note
Also use the information supplied by the multi-functional indicator*
⇒ page 18.
Avoiding full throttle
Driving more slowly means saving fuel.
Fig. 183 Fuel
consumption in
litres/100 km. and
speed in km/h.
Fig. 184 Fuel
consumption in
litres/100 km. and
speed in km/h.
.
,
,
Driving and the Environment 225
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel
consumption but also positively influence environmental pollution and
wear of your vehicle.
You should avoid fully exploiting the top speed of your vehicle wherever
possible. Fuel consumption, pollutant emissions and vehicle noises
increase disproportionally at high speeds.
The ⇒ page 224, fig. 184 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed
of your vehicle. You will cut your fuel consumption by half if you only make
use three-quarters of the possible top speed of your vehicle.
Reducing idling
Idling also costs fuel.
It is worthwhile switching off the engine in a traffic jam or when waiting at
a level crossing or at traffic lights with a lengthy red phase. Even after just
30 - 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when
you start the engine up again.
If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal
operating temperature. Wear-and-tear and pollutant emissions, though,
are particularly high in the warming-up phase. This is why you should
drive off right after starting the engine. Do avoid high engine revolutions
at this time, however.
Regular servicing
A poorly tuned engine consumes an unnecessarily high
amount of fuel.
Having your vehicle serviced regularly at a specialist garge enables you
to satisfy one of the requirements for economical motoring even before
you set off on your journey. Keeping your vehicle properly serviced not
only has a positive effect on the safety of your vehicle and maintaining its
value, but also saves on fuel.
A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10%
higher than normal.
The foreseen maintenance work should be undertaken exactly according
to the Service schedule by a specialist garage.
Also check the oil level after refueling. Oil consumption is dependent to
a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine. Oil consump-
tion could be as high as 0.5 litres/1 000 km depending on your style of
driving.
It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first,
and reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time. It is there-
fore not possible to correctly assess the oil consumption of a new vehicle
until after you have driven about 5 000 km.
For the sake of the environment
• You can achieve additional improvements in your fuel economy by
using high-lubricity oils.
• Check the ground below your car at regular intervals to detect any
leakages in good time. Please have your vehicle inspected by a specialist
garge if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the floor.
.
,
,
Driving and the Environment226
Avoid driving short distances
Short distances result in an above-average high fuel
consumption.
– Avoid driving a distance of no more than 4 km if the engine is
cold.
The engine and catalytic converter must first have reached their optimal
operating temperature in order to effectively reduce fuel consumption
and pollutant emissions.
The cold engine vehicle consumes approx. 15 - 20 litres/100 km of fuel
immediately after starting. Fuel consumption drops to 10 litres/100 km
after just 1 kilometre. The engine reaches its operating temperature
(outside temperature and engine dependent) only after about 4 to 10 kilo-
metres and the fuel consumption then stabilizes. You should therefore
avoid driving short distances whenever possible.
An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature.
The ⇒ fig. 185 shows the different fuel consumptions for the same
distance, on the one hand at +20°C and on the other hand at -10°C. Your
vehicle has a higher fuel consumption in winter than in summer.
Checking tyre inflation pressures
Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel.
Always ensure that your tyres are inflated to the correct pressure at all
times. The rolling resistance will be increased if the tyre filling pressure is
too low. This will not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear
and the driving behaviour will worsen.
Always check the inflation pressure of the tyres when cold.
Do not drive with winter tyres all year round for this costs about 10 %
more fuel. Winter tyres are also louder.
No unnecessary ballast
Transporting ballast costs fuel.
The fact that every kilogram of extra weight increases your fuel
consumption means that it is worth taking a look in the luggage compart-
ment to avoid transporting any unnecessary ballast.
It is particularly in town trafffic, when one is accelerating quite often, that
the vehicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption.
A rule of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will
cause an increase in fuel consumption of about 1 litre/100 kilometres.
You may frequently also leave a roof rack fitted on just out of conven-
ience, although you no longer need it. The increased aerodynamic drag of
Fig. 185 Fuel
consumption in
litres/100 km at
different temperatures
.
,
,
Driving and the Environment 227
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
your vehicle causes it to use about 10 % more fuel than normal at a speed
of 100 - 120 km/h, even when you are not carrying a load on the roof
rack.
Saving electricity
Generating electricity costs fuel.
– Switch off electrical components as soon as you no longer
need them.
When the engine is running, the alternator generates and supplies elec-
trical power. The greater the load on the alternator as a result of having a
large number of electrical components switched on, the more fuel will be
consumed for operating the alternator.
Keeping a log of your fuel consumption
If you really wish to keep a close check on your fuel consumption, it is
best to enter the figures in a logbook. This does not take much time but is
a very worthwhile exercise. It enables you to detect any change (positive
and negative) at an early stage and to take any appropriate action.
If you find that your fuel consumption is too high, you should reflect on
how, where and in what conditions you have driven the vehicle since you
last refuelled.
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection has played a major role in the design, selection
of materials and manufacture of your new Škoda. Particular emphasis has
been paid to a number of aspects, including:
Design measures
• joints designed to be easily detached
• simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system
• improved purity of different classes of materials
• identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommen-
dation 260
• reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO
2
• minimum fuel leakage during accidents
• reduced noise
Choice of materials
• extensive use of recyclable material
• air conditioning filled with CFC-free refrigerant
• no cadmium
• no asbestos
• reduction in the “vaporisation” of plastics
Manufacture
• solvent-free cavity protection
• solvent-free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the
production plant to the customer
• use of solvent-free adhesives
• no CFCs used in the production process
• without use of mercury
• use of water-soluble paints
.
,
,
Driving and the Environment228
Motoring abroad
General
Other circumstances may exist abroad.
It is also possible, in certain countries, that the Škoda dealership network
has not been established yet. This is the reason why obtaining certain
spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garage
personnel may only be able to make limited repairs. Škoda Auto in the
Czech Republic and relevant importers are happy to provide information
about technical aspects of the vehicle, required maintenance work and
possibilities for getting repairs done.
Unleaded petrol
A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with
unleaded petrol ⇒ page 222. The automobile associations can provide you
with information regarding the locations of filling stations which offer
unleaded petrol.
Headlights
The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the
side of the road on which you are driving to a greater extent. If you drive
abroad on the other side of the road, you will dazzle oncoming traffic.
It is necessary in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic to stick a sticker
over a certain part of the headlights.
Windscreen wiper stickers are available at Škoda dealers.
Headlights with Xenon lamps are designed for driving in countries with
traffic on the right or on the left. Have this done always at a Škoda dealer.
Note
You can obtain further information regarding masking over or converting
the headlights from your Škoda dealer.
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
When driving on poor roads and lanes or when driving over kerbstones,
steep ramps etc., you must pay particular attention to ensuring that any
low-slung parts of the vehicle, such as spoiler and exhaust, do not touch
the ground and get damaged.
This particularly applies to models with a lowered suspension (sport
suspension) and also when your vehicle is fully laden.
.
,
,
Towing a trailer 229
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Towing a trailer
Towing a trailer
Technical requirements
The towing device must satisfy certain technical require-
ments.
Your vehicle is designed primarily for transporting persons and luggage.
It can, however, also be used for towing a trailer - provided certain tech-
nical equipment is fitted.
If your vehicle has already been supplied with a factory-fitted towing
device then everything that is necessary for towing a trailer in technical
terms, and in terms of the law, has already been taken into account.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power socket for the electrical connec-
tion between the vehicle and trailer. If the trailer which you wish to tow has
a 7-pin connector, you can use a suitable adapter
10)
from Škoda original
accessories.
This work must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications if a towing device is retrofitted.
Škoda dealers are familiar with details relating to retrofitting a towing
device and for any necessary modifications to the cooling system.
WARNING
We recommend that you have the towing device from Škoda orig-
inal accessories installed by a Škoda dealer. He is familiar with all
the relevant details relating to retrofitting such equipment. There is
a risk of an accident if the towing device is not properly fitted!
General Maintenance
There are a number of points to pay attention to when
towing a trailer.
Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must on no account be exceeded.
You can negotiate appropriately steeper inclines and descents if you do
not make full use of the permissible trailer load.
The trailer loads specified only apply for altitudes up to 1 000 metres
above mean sea level. The fact that the engine power output drops with
increasing height due to a lowering of air pressure and thus the ability to
climb, means that the towed weight must be reduced by 10% for every
further increase of 1 000 metres in height above sea level. The towed
weight is the weight of the (laden) vehicle and the (laden) trailer together.
One should take this into account before driving up to higher altitudes.
The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the
towing device are merely test data for the towing device The data
relating to your vehicle, which is often less than this test data, can
be found in your vehicle registration documents or in the brochure -
Technical Data.
10)
In some countires the adapter is supplied with the towing device.
.
,
,
Towing a trailer230
Distribution of the load
Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that any heavy items are
located as close as possible to the axle. Secure the items to prevent them
slipping.
Tyre inflation pressure
Select the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for that of “fully laden”,
⇒ page 264. The inflation pressure of the tyres fitted to the trailer adjust in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
Exterior mirrors
You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see
the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. Both exte-
rior mirrors should be attached to folding arms. Adjust the mirrors so that
they provide you with an adequate field of view to the rear.
Headlights
Before starting off with a hitched trailer, also check the setting of the head-
lights. Alter the setting as necessary with the aid of the headlight beam
adjuster ⇒ page 67.
Detachable ball head
The ball rod is detachable on vehicles which feature a factory-fitted towing
device. It is stowed together with separate fitting instructions in the spare
wheel well in the luggage compartment of the vehicle.
Further information on the towing device ⇒ page 231.
Note
• We recommend that you also have your vehicle inspected between
service intervals if you tow a trailer frequently.
• The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling
and decoupling the trailer.
Driving Tips
Particular caution is required when towing a trailer.
– Do not, as far as possible, drive with your vehicle unladen and
the trailer laden.
– Do not make full use of the legal maximum speeds. This
applies in particular to downhill sections.
– Apply the brakes in good time.
– Keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if the outside
temperature is high.
Distribution of weight
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and
the trailer is laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid
driving with this combination.
Driving speed
Do not drive faster than 80 km/hour for safety reasons. This also applies
for countries in which higher speeds are allowed.
The fact that the driving stability of the vehicle + trailer combination
reduces with increasing speed means that the legally allowed speed
should not be used when there are unfavourable road, weather or wind
conditions, particularly near accident black spots.
You must always reduce your speed immediately as soon as you detect
even just the slightest swaying of the trailer. On no account attempt to
stop the trailer from “swaying” by accelerating.
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake,
apply the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts
resulting from the trailer wheels locking. Shift down gears in good time
.
,
,
Towing a trailer 231
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
before negotiating a downhill section to allow the engine to also act as a
brake.
Engine overheating
Please keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if you have to
negotiate a lengthy slope in a low gear at a high engine speed when the
outside temperature is very high ⇒ page 14.
If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right-hand
area or even the red area of the scale, reduce your speed immediately.
Stop and switch off the engine if the warning light in the instrument
cluster begins flashing. Wait a few minutes and check the level of coolant
in the coolant expansion bottle ⇒ page 254, “Inspecting the coolant level”.
Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ page 35, “Coolant tempera-
ture/coolant level ”.
The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating.
Any increase in the cooling effect of the coolant fan through shifting down
a gear and increasing the engine speed is not possible since the fan
speed is independent of the engine speed. One should also not drop a
gear for this reason when towing a trailer as long as the engine can
manage the slope without any drop in speed.
Detachable ball head*
The detachable ball head of the towing device is stowed in a box for the
car tool kit in the spare wheel well in the luggage compartment.
An instruction for correct installation and removal of the ball head of the
towing device is supplied with the ball head
Inspect the ball head to ensure that it is properly locked each time before
setting off. The inspection is performed by turning the closed locking lever
downwards. If the locking lever can only be turned around a small angle
(approx. 5°), the locking mechanism is O.K. After the inspection pull the
locking lever back again to its stop. The towing device must not be used,
if it does not wish to close or the locking lever turns slightly in the closed
position.
Fig. 186 Detachable
ball head
.
,
,
Towing a trailer232
WARNING
Do not use any aids or tools for installing or removing the ball
head. This might result in damage to the locking mechanism to the
extent that the safety of the towing device is no longer assured -
risk of an accident.
Note
• Do not carry out any modifications or repairs to the ball head or to any
other components on the towing device.
• Contact a specialist garage if you encounter any problems using the
device.
• Never unlock the ball head with a trailer coupled to it.
• You should take off the ball head if you drive without towing a trailer.
Inspect whether the end cover properly seals off the mounting shaft.
• Remove the ball head beforehand if you wish to clean your vehicle
using a steam jet. Ensure that the end cover properly seals the mounting
shaft.
• It is recommended to wear gloves when installing and removing.
.
,
,
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 233
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
General Maintenance
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle
General
Proper care retains the value of your vehicle.
Regular and proper care retains the value of your vehicle. It may also be
one of the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relating to
corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories
offered by your Škoda dealer. Please follow the instructions for use on the
package.
WARNING
• Care products may be harmful to your health if not used
according to the instructions.
• Always store care products in a safe place, out of the reach of
children - risk of poisoning!
For the sake of the environment
• Always select environmentally-friendly products when purchasing
vehicle care products.
• Do not dispose of the packages with residues of care products in
domestic waste.
Care of the exterior of vehicle
Washing the vehicle
Frequent washing protects your vehicle.
The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influ-
ences is frequent washing and wax treatment. How often you should
wash your vehicle depends on a wide range of factors, such as:
• Frequency of use,
• The parking situation (garage, below trees etc.),
• Season of the year,
• Weather conditions,
• Environmental influences.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial
dust, tar, soot particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain
adhering to the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their
destructive effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by
intensive sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect.
It may therefore be necessary, in certain circumstances, to wash the car
once a week. It may also be sufficient, however, to wash the car once a
month followed by appropriate wax treatment.
It is essential to also thoroughly wash the underside of your vehicle at
the end of the winter road salting and gritting period.
.
,
,
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle234
WARNING
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the brake
system can affect the braking efficiency - risk of accident.
Automatic vehicle wash systems
The paintwork of the vehicle is sufficiently resistant that the vehicle can be
washed normally in automatic vehicle wash plants without any problem.
The actual stress to which the paintwork is subjected, however, depends
greatly on the design of the vehicle wash system, the filtering of the water
and the type of washing and care products used. If the paintwork of your
vehicle appears mat after being washed or even has scratches, point this
out to the operator of the vehicle wash plant. Use a different vehicle wash
plant, if necessary.
There are no particular points to note before washing your vehicle in such
a plant other than the usual precautionary measures (closing windows
and sliding/tilting roof, moving any factory-fitted aerials down flat against
the bodywork, etc.).
If you have any particular attached parts fitted to your car - such as spoiler,
roof rack system, two-way radio aerial - it is best to first of all consult the
operator of the car wash plant.
It is important to degrease the lips of the windscreen wiper rubbers after
passing through the automatic vehicle wash system.
Caution
Do not screw the swivelling down roof aerial tight before washing the
vehicle in an automatic vehicle wash system - risk of damage!
Washing vehicle by hand
It is important to first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off as
thoroughly as possible before washing your vehicle by hand.
One should then clean the vehicle using a soft washing sponge,
washing glove or a washing brush and only slight pressure. Work from
the top to the bottom - beginning with the roof. Only place slight pressure
on the vehicle paintwork during cleaning Only use a shampoo for stub-
born dirt.
Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for
such areas.
Rinse off the vehicle well after giving it a wash and dry it off using a
chamois leather.
WARNING
• The ignition should always be switched off when you wash your
vehicle - risk of accident!
• Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts
when you are cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel hous-
ings or the wheel trims - risk of cuts.
Caution
• Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight - risk of paint damage.
• Ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locks or at the
door and panel joints if you spray your vehicle in winter down with a hose
- risk of freezing.
• Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar
cleaning products - risk of damage to the surface of paintwork.
.
,
,
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 235
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
For the sake of the environment
Only wash your vehicle at washing bays specifically reserved for this
purpose. This ensures that no water which may be contaminated by oil
flows into the sewage system. It is not even permitted to wash your vehicle
in certain areas except at such specific washing bays.
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
When you wash your vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, it is essential
to comply with the instructions for use of the cleaning equipment. This
applies in particular to the pressure used and to the spraying distance.
Maintain a sufficiently large distance to soft materials such as rubber
hoses or insulation material.
On no account use circular spray nozzles or so-called dirt cutters!
WARNING
It is particularly important that you do not clean tyres with circular
spray jets. Visible but also invisible damage to tyres may occur
even at a relatively large spraying distance and if sprayed only for
a short time - risk of accident!
Caution
The water must be no hotter than 60°C, otherwise the vehicle can be
damaged.
Wax treatment
Good wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from
harmful environmental influences and minor mechanical damage.
The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the
latest, when no more drops form on the clean paintwork.
A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean
bodywork after it has dried thoroughly. Even if you use a wax preserver
regularly we still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at
least twice a year with hard wax.
Caution
Never apply wax to the windows.
Polishing
Polishing is only necessary if the paintwork of your vehicle has become
unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax
preservers.
You must treat the paintwork with a wax preserver if the polish you use
does not contain any preserving elements ⇒ page 235, “Wax treatment”.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories
offered by your Škoda dealer.
Caution
• You must not treat mat painted parts or plastic with polishing products
or hard wax.
• Do not polish the paintwork of the vehicle in a dusty environment,
otherwise the paintwork can be scratched.
.
,
,
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle236
Chrome parts
First clean the chrome parts with a damp clotch and then polish them with
a soft, dry cloth. If it does not prove to be adequate, use a chrome care
product from Škoda original accessories.
Caution
Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment, otherwise they can
be scratched.
Paint damage
Slight damage to paintwork such as scratches, scuffs or traces of chip
damage must be touched up immediately with paint (Škoda painting pen)
before any corrosion can result. You can of course have this work carried
out by a Škoda dealer.
Škoda dealers have a range of matching touch-up pens or spray cans
available in the colour of your vehicle.
The paint number of the original paintwork of your vehicle is indicated on
the vehicle data sticker ⇒ page 303.
Any corrosion which has already have formed must be removed thor-
oughly. Apply a corrosion protection primer and then the paint to the
affected point. You can of course have this work carried out by a Škoda
dealer.
Plastic parts
External plastic parts are cleaned by normal washing. Plastic parts and
synthetic leather can also be treated with special solvent-free plastic
cleaning agents if a damp cloth is not sufficient. Paint care products are
not suitable for plastic parts.
Caution
Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.
Windows
Only use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the
windows and mirrors. You should not move the ice scraper forward and
backward but in one direction on the window which you are cleaning in
order to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass.
You can best remove residues of rubber, oil, grease, wax or silicone by
using a special window cleaner or a special silicone remover.
You should also clean the windows regularly from the inside.
Do not use window leathers which you have used to polish the vehicle
body to dry off the windows. Residues of preservatives in the window
leather can dirty the window and reduce visibility.
Do not affix any stickers over the inside of the rear window to avoid
damage to the heating elements of the rear window heater.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories
offered by your Škoda dealer.
.
,
,
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 237
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Caution
Never remove snow or ice from the glass parts with warm or hot water -
risk of formation of cracks in the glass!
The headlight lenses
Please do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products
- risk of damage to the plastic lenses Please use soap and clean warm
water.
Caution
Never wipe the headlights dry and do not use any sharp objects for
cleaning the plastic lenses, this may result in damage to the protective
paintwork and consequently in formation of cracks on the headlight
lenses, e.g through effect of chemical products.
Door and window seals
The rubber seals on the doors, boot lid, bonnet, sliding roof and windows
remain supple and last longer if you treat them from time to time with a
rubber care product (e.g. silicone spray). You also avoid premature wear
of the seals and prevent leakages in this way. It is also easier to open the
doors. Rubber seals which are well cared for also do not stick together in
cold winter weather.
Locks
We recommend that you use the spray from Škoda original accessories
with regreasing and anticorrosive effect for de-icing locks.
Note
When washing your vehicle, ensure that as little water as possible gets
into the locks.
Wheels
Steel wheels
You should also thoroughly wash the wheels and wheel trims when giving
your vehicle its regular wash. This prevents any brake dust, dirt and road
salt from sticking to the wheel hubs. You can remove stubborn brake abra-
sion adhering to the wheels with an industrial cleaner. Touch up any
damage to the paintwork on the wheels before rust is able to form.
Light alloy wheels
Regular care of light alloy wheels is necessary in order to retain their
decorative appearance over long periods. It is particularly important to
remove any road salt and brake abrasion from light alloy wheels every two
weeks, otherwise the surface will suffer. Wash thoroughly and then treat
the wheels with a protective product for light alloy wheels which does not
contain any acidic components. You should provide the wheel hubs with
a hard wax layer every three months. You must not use any products
which cause abrasion when treating the wheel hubs. Any damage to the
paint layer on the wheel hubs must be touched up immediately.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories
offered by your Škoda dealer.
.
,
,
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle238
WARNING
One should remember when cleaning the wheels that moisture, ice
and road salt may adversely affect braking efficiency - risk of an
accident!
Note
Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance.
This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted
to the steering wheel which, in certain circumstances, can cause prema-
ture wear of the steering. This means it is necessary to remove the dirt.
Underbody protection
The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and
mechanical influences.
One cannot, however, completely rule out damage to the protective layer
when driving so we recommend that you inspect the protective layer on
the underside of your vehicle and on the chassis at certain intervals - this
is best done at the beginning and end of the winter - and to touch up any
damaged areas.
Škoda dealers have suitable spray products available as well as the
necessary equipment and are familiar with the instructions for its use. It is
therefore best to have such touch-up work or additional corrosion protec-
tion measures carried out by a Škoda dealer.
WARNING
Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection
agents for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat shields.
Such substances might ignite when driving - risk of fire!
Protection of hollow spaces
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are
protected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
This wax protection does not require to be inspected or re-treated. Please
remove any small amount of wax which flows out of the cavities at high
temperatures with a plastic scraper and clean the spot using petroleum
cleaner.
WARNING
Safety and environmental protection regulations should be
observed when using petroleum cleaner to remove wax - a risk of
fire!
Engine compartment
Good corrosion protection is very important, particularly in winter when
one often drives over its salt-strewn roads. One should therefore clean the
engine compartment before and after the salt spreading period and treat
with preservative in order to prevent the salt from being destructive.
Škoda dealers have the cleaning agents and preservatives recommended
by the manufacturer and also the required equipment.
WARNING
• It is necessary to observe the guidelines given in the chapter
before working on the engine compartment ⇒ page 248.
• Let the engine cool down before cleaning the engine compart-
ment.
.
,
,
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 239
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Caution
• Engine cleaning may only be undertaken when the ignition is off.
• It is recommended to cover the generator before washing the engine
compartment.
For the sake of the environment
The dirty water produced by washing the engine has washed away petrol,
and residues of grease and oil and should therefore be cleaned by an oil
separator. This is why engine washing should only be undertaken in a
specialist garage or at a fueling station (when these are fitted with the
required equipment).
Care of the interior of vehicle
Plastic parts, artificial leather and cloths
You can clean plastic parts and artificial leather with a moist cloth. You
should only treat such parts with special solvent-free plastic cleaning
and care products it does prove to be adequate.
Upholstery cloth and cloth trim on the doors, luggage compartment cover,
headliner etc. are best treated with special cleaning products, using if
necessary a dry foam and a soft sponge or brush.
We recommend using a cleaning product from Škoda genuine accesso-
ries offered by your Škoda dealer.
Caution
Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.
Fabric covers of electrically heated seats
Do not clean the seat covers wet as this may result in damage to the seat
heating system.
Clean such covers using special agents, for example dry foam.
Natural leather
Natural leather requires quite particular care and attention.
Leather should be treated from time to time according the
following guidelines depending on how much it is used.
Normal cleaning
– Clean soiled areas of the leather with slightly moistened
cotton or woollen cloth.
Severe soiling
– Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth dipped in a mild
soapy solution (2 spoonfuls of pH-neutral soap to 1 litre of
water).
– Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point and
that no water gets into the stitching of the seams.
– Dry off the leather with a soft, dry cloth.
.
,
,
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle240
Removing stains
– Remove fresh stains which are water-based (e.g. coffee, tea,
juices, blood etc.) with an absorbent cloth or household paper
or use the cleaner from the care set for a stain which has
already dried in.
– Remove fresh stains on a fat base (e.g. butter, mayonnaise,
chocolate etc.) with an absorbent cloth or household cleaning
paper or with the cleaner from the care set if the stain has not
yet penetrated into the surface.
– Use a grease dissolver for grease stains which have dried
in.
–Eliminate special stains (e.g. ball-point pens, felt pen, nail
varnish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.) with a special stain
remover suitable for leather.
Leather care
– Treat the leather every six months with the leather care
product available from Škoda dealers.
– Apply only a small amount of the care product.
– Dry the leather off with a soft cloth
It is best to consult your Škoda dealer if you have any questions regarding
cleaning and care of the leather interior.
Caution
• You must on no account treat the leather with solvents (e.g. gasoline,
turpentine), floor wax, shoe cream or such like.
• Avoid leaving your vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight in order
to avoid bleaching the leather. If you leave your vehicle parked in the open
for lengthy periods, protect the leather from the direct rays of the sun by
covering it over.
• Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets,
sharp-edged belts may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on
the surface.
Note
• Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect regularly
and each time after cleaning the leather. The cream nourishes the leather,
allows it to breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture. It also
creates surface protection.
• Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months, remove fresh soiling each time
this occurs.
• Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick,
shoe cream etc., as quickly as possible.
• Care also for the leather dye. Refreshen areas which have lost their
colour with a special coloured leather cream as required.
Seat belts
– Keep the seat belts clean!
– Wash seat belts which have become soiled using a mild soapy
solution.
– Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good
condition.
.
,
,
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 241
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Belt webbing which has become severely soiled may prevent the inertia
reel from reeling up the belt properly.
WARNING
• The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.
• Never clean the seat belts chemically as dry cleaning may
destroy the fabric. The seat belts must also not be allowed to come
into contact with corrosive liquids (such as acids etc.).
• Seat belts which have damage to the webbing, the connections,
the inertia reel or the lock should be replaced by a Škoda dealer.
• Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being reeled
up.
.
,
,
Fuel242
Fuel
Petrol
Grades of petrol
There are various grades of petrol. Please read the brochure “Technical
Data” in order to know which grade of petrol your vehicle requires. You will
also find the same information affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap of
your vehicle ⇒ page 245, fig. 188.
A distinction is made between unleaded and leaded petrol. All Škoda vehi-
cles with petrol engines are equipped with a catalytic converter and must
therefore be only driven with unleaded petrol. Unleaded petrol complies
with the standard EN 228.
The individual grades of petrol are distinguished by their octane number
(RON). Please adopt the following procedure if the grade of petrol which
you normally use is not be available in exceptional circumstances:
• Engines which need unleaded premium petrol 95 RON can also be
run on unleaded petrol 91 RON. This does, however, result in a slight loss
in performance.
• Engines which need unleaded premium plus petrol 98 RON can
also be run on unleaded regular petrol 95 RON. This does, however,
result in a slight loss in performance. You can in exceptional circum-
stances also use unleaded petrol of 91 RON in the event that no
unleaded premium plus petrol of 98 RON or premium plus petrol of 95
RON is available. Refuel as soon as possible with unleaded premium plus
of 98 RON or unleaded premium petrol of 95 RON.
If, in an emergency, the only fuel available is one which has a lower octane
number than that required by the engine then only drive at medium engine
speeds and lower engine loadings.
You can make unlimited use of fuel which has a higher octane number
than that required by the engine. There will, however, be no advantages
gained by this in terms of engine performance and fuel consumption!
The handling, performance and life of your engine are determined to a
significant extent by the quality of the fuel. Do not use any petrol additives.
Use a fuel complying with the standard.
You can find further information on refuelling ⇒ page 245, “Refuelling”.
Caution
• Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the cata-
lytic converter being destroyed.
• Operating the engine with petrol of a low octane number can result in
engine damage at high revolutions or severe engine loading.
Diesel
Diesel fuel
Grades of diesel fuel
Your vehicle can be driven with the following grades of diesel fuel:
Diesel fuel with a cetane number of at least CN 49. (The cetane
number CN is a measure of the ignition performance of the diesel fuel.)
Diesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 590.
Biofuel (RME rape oil methyl ester fuel) must comply with the DIN
EN 14 214. Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ page 243.
.
,
,
Fuel 243
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Diesel fuel mixture according to standard CSN 65 6508 from
02/2003 contains diesel fuel according to standard DIN EN 590 and a
concentration of biofuel (rape oil methyl ester) according to standard
DINEN14214 in the following two concentrations:
5% share of biofuel RME according to the standard DINEN14214
- Denomination SMN 5,
30% share of biofuel RME according to the standard
DINEN14214 - Denomination SMN 30.
The same principles apply for the diesel fuel mixture as for the biofuel
⇒ page 243.
Fuel additives
You must not use fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and
similar products) in diesel fuel.
It is then necessary to have the fuel filter drained of water by a Škoda
dealer more often than stated in the Service schedule if the quality of the
diesel fuel used is poor.
You can find information on refuelling ⇒ page 245, “Refuelling”.
Caution
• Use a fuel complying with the standard. Filling the tank even only once,
which does not comply with the standard, can result in damage to the fuel
system.
• Water which has collected in the fuel filter can result in engine
problems.
Biofuel*
The possibility to refuel with biofuel only applies to vehi-
cles, which have been adapted at the factory for its use.
Biofuel (RME rape oil methyl ester fuel) must comply with the DIN EN
14 214 ⇒ .
Biofuel (methyl ester from rape oil) is manufactured from vegetable oil by
means of a chemical process.
Biofuel does not contain sulphur. This means that no sulphur dioxide
(SO
2
) is produced when it is burnt.
The exhaust gases contain less:
• carbon monoxide (CO),
• hydrocarbons (HC),
• particles (soot).
than when operating with conventional diesel fuel.
The Biofuel is more biodegradable.
When using biofuel pay attention to the following points:
• The Performance may be reduced slightly if you switch to driving with
biofuel.
• The fuel consumption may increase slightly if you switch to driving
with biofuel.
We recommend refuelling with diesel fuel at temperatures below -10°C.
Biofuel conforming to DIN EN 14 214 can be mixed in any desired ratio
with diesel fuel conforming to the standard DIN EN 590.
.
,
,
Fuel244
Caution
• Filling the tank even only once with biofuel, which does not comply with
the standard DIN EN 14 214, can result in damage to the fuel system.
• The possibility to refuel with biofuel only applies to vehicles, which
have been adapted at the factory for its use. Filling the tank even only
once with biofuel, which does comply with the standard DIN EN 14 214,
can otherwise result in damage to the fuel system.
• Water which has collected in the fuel filter can result in engine prob-
lems.
• It is prohibited to use biofuel and diesel fuel mixture (RME) for diesel
vehicles which are fitted with diesel particle filter.
Note
• On the inside of the fuel filler flap you will find the information whether
your vehicle can be driven with biofuel.
• When using biofuel certain maintenance work must be carried out
earlier than when using diesel fuel according to DINEN590 - see Service
schedule.
Operation in winter
Winter-grade diesel fuel
A different grade of diesel fuel is available at filling stations in winter than
during the summer. Using “summer-grade diesel fuel” at temperatures
below 0°C can result in operational problems because the diesel becomes
viscous as a result of paraffin separation.
It is therefore the case that DIN EN 590 prescribes diesel fuel class for
certain periods of the year which can also be purchased at the corre-
sponding time during the year. “Winter-grade diesel fuel” will still operate
properly even at a temperature of -20°C.
It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel
fuels available have a different temperature characteristic. Škoda dealers
and filling stations in the country concerned will be able to provide you with
information regarding the diesel fuels available.
Prewarming fuel
The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter prewarming system. This secures
operation of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temper-
ature of -25°C.
Caution
It is not permitted to add the various fuel additives on the market, including
petrol, to diesel fuel in order to improve its flow properties.
.
,
,
Fuel 245
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Refuelling
The filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked* with the central
locking.
Opening the fuel filler cap
– Press onto the left side of the fuel filler flap ⇒ fig. 187.
– The fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube must be unlocked to the
left using the vehicle key (only valid for vehicles which do not
have automatic unlocking of the fuel filler flap).
– Unscrew the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and place the fuel
filler cap from above on the fuel filler flap ⇒ fig. 188.
Closing fuel filler cap
– Screw on the cap by turning it to the right until it is heard to
lock.
– The fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube must be locked to the
right using the vehicle key (only valid for vehicles which do not
have automatic locking of the fuel filler flap).
– Press the fuel tank flap closed.
The correct grade of fuel for your vehicle as well as the tyre size and infla-
tion pressures are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside of the fuel filler
flap. Further information on fuel ⇒ page 242, “Fuel”.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres.
WARNING
Pay attention to any legal requirements if you do carry a spare
canister in the vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel
canisters in your vehicle for safety reasons. The canister can be
damaged in the event of an accident and fuel may leak out.
Fig. 187 Right rear
side of the vehicle: Fuel
filler flap
Fig. 188 Filler flap with
cap unscrewed
.
,
,
Fuel246
Caution
• Remove any fuel which has spilled onto the paintwork of your vehicle
immediately - risk of paint damage!
• Vehicles fitted with catalytic converter should never be allowed to let
the fuel tank to run completely empty. An irregular supply of fuel to the
engine can result in misfiring and unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust
system, which may result in overheating and damage to the catalytic
converter.
For the sake of the environment
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the
first time, provided the nozzle has been operated properly. You should not
continue refuelling - otherwise the expansion chamber in the fuel tank will
also be filled with fuel. Fuel might flow out of the tank when it heats up.
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing 247
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Inspecting and Replenishing
Engine compartment
Bonnet remote release
Bonnet remote release
– Pull the unlocking lever below the dash panel on the driver's
side ⇒ fig. 189.
The bonnet jumps out of its lock as a result of the spring force. A handle
appears at the same time in the radiator grille.
Opening and closing the bonnet.
Fig. 189 Bonnet
release lever
Fig. 190 Radiator
grille: handle
Fig. 191 Securing the
bonnet with the bonnet
support
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing248
Opening the bonnet
– Unlock the bonnet ⇒ page 247, fig. 189.
– Ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in
place against the windscreen before opening the bonnet
otherwise damage could occur to the paintwork.
– Pulling on the handle ⇒ page 247, fig. 190 will lock the bonnet
fully.
– Grip with the hand under the radiator grille and lift up the
bonnet.
– Take the bonnet support out of its holder and set it in the
opening designed for it ⇒ page 247, fig. 191.
Closing the bonnet
– Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the bonnet support. Press
the bonnet support into the holder designed to hold it.
– Allow the bonnet to drop from a height of about 30 cm into the
lock - bonnet do not press down on it!
WARNING
• Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is
flowing out of the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long
enough until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping.
• For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be properly closed
when driving. One should therefore check that the lock has in fact
engaged properly after closing the bonnet.
• Stop your vehicle immediately while driving if you notice that
the lock is not properly engaged and close the bonnet properly -
risk of an accident!
Caution
Never open the bonnet using the handle - danger of causing damage.
Working in the engine compartment
Particular care is required when carrying out any work in
the engine compartment!
There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working
in the engine compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and
other fluids. For this reason, it is essential to comply with the
warning instructions stated below and with the general applicable
rules of safety. The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous
area ⇒ .
WARNING
• Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is
flowing out of the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long
enough until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping.
• Switch off the engine and pull out the ignition key.
• Apply the handbrake firmly.
• If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gear-
shift lever into Neutral, or if it is fitted with automatic gearbox,
move the selector lever into position P.
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing 249
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Allow the engine to cool down.
• Keep children clear of the engine compartment.
• Never spill oil and other fluids over the hot engine. Such fluids
(e.g. the antifreeze contained in the coolant) may ignite!
• Avoid short circuits in the electrical system - particularly on the
battery.
• Never place your hand into the radiator fan as long as the
engine is still warm. The fan might suddenly start running!
• Never open the cap of the coolant expansion bottle as long as
the engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized!
• Cover over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir with a
large cloth when opening it as protection for your face, hands and
arms from hot steam or hot coolant.
• Do not let objects, such as e.g cleaning cloth or tools lie in the
engine compartment.
• If you wish to work under the vehicle, you must secure the
vehicle from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting
blocks: the car jack is not sufficient for this - risk of injury!
• In cases where it be necessary to carry out inspection work
when the engine is running there is an additional risk from rotating
parts (e.g. the V-ribbed belt, alternator, radiator fan) and from the
high-voltage ignition system. Please observe in addition the
following:
− Never touch the electrical cables of the ignition system.
− Absolutely avoid any jewellery, loose items of clothing or
long hair from getting into the rotating parts of the engine -
Hazard! Therefore remove any jewellery beforehand, tie up your
hair and wear tight fitting clothing.
• Please also comply with the warning instructions stated below
when carrying out any essential work on the fuel system or on the
electrical system:
− Always separate the car battery from the electrical system.
− Do not smoke.
− Never carry out any work close to naked flames.
− Always keep a working fire extinguisher at hand.
Caution
When replenishing fluids in the engine, always ensure that the fluids are
on no account mixed up. This may result in major operating problems and
also vehicle damage!
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing250
Overview of the engine compartment
The main inspection points
Fig. 192 1.6 ltr./85 kW Petrol engine
Coolant expansion bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil filler opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery (below a cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note
The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol
and diesel engines is practically identical.
Engine oil
Engine oil specifications
The grade of engine oil should be selected in accordance
with precise specifications.
The engine of your vehicle has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil
which you can use throughout the year - except in extreme climatic
regions.
You can mix various oils together with each other when refilling with oil.
This does not, however, apply for models with flexible service intervals
(QG1).
Engine oils are, of course, undergoing continuous further development.
Thus the information stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the
time of publication.
Škoda dealers are informed by Škoda Auto about current changes. This
why you should always have engine oil changed by your Škoda dealer.
The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following must be indi-
cated separately or together with other specifications on the bottle.
Engine oil specifications for vehicles with fixed service intervals
(QG0, QG2)
A
1
254
A
2
262
A
3
252
A
4
251
A
5
256
A
6
258
Engine oil specifications
Petrol engines VW 501 01
VW 502 00
VW 504 00
Diesel engines
VW 507
01
a)
VW 505
0
0
b)
a)
Only for engines without diesel particle filter ⇒ page 33.
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing 251
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Engine oil specifications for models with flexible service intervals
(QG1)
Caution
Only the above-mentioned oils may be used on vehicles with flexible
service intervals (QG1). We recommend always refilling with oil of the
same specification since this will maintain the properties of the oil. In
exceptional cases, you must top up only once engine oil complying with
Specification VW 502 00 (only for petrol engines) or Specification VW 505
01 (only for diesel engines) to maximum 0.5 litres. You must not use other
engine oils - risk of engine damage!
Note
• Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with
you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle.
Consequently, you will always have the correct engine oil for refilling.
• We recommend using a preservative from the Škoda original accesso-
ries offered by your Škoda dealer.
• For further information - see Service shedule.
Inspecting the engine oil level
The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine.
Checking the oil level
– Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet ⇒ in “Working in the engine compart-
ment” on page 248.
– Wait a few minutes and pull out the oil dipstick.
– Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again fully.
– Then withdraw the dipstick again and read off the oil level.
Oil level within range
– You must not top up the oil.
b)
Only for engines with diesel particle filter ⇒ page 33.
Engine oil specifications
Petrol engines VW 503 00
VW 504 00
Diesel engines
VW 506 01
a)
VW 507 00
a)
Only for engines without diesel particle filter ⇒ page 33.
Fig. 193 Dipstick
A
a
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing252
Oil level within range
– You may top up the oil. It is possible that the oil level may then
be within range after doing this.
Oil level within range
– You must top up the oil ⇒ page 252. It is sufficient, once this
is done, to keep the oil level is within range .
It is normal for the engine to consume oil. The oil consumption may be as
much as 0.5 l/1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the condi-
tions under which you operate your vehicle. The oil consumption may be
slightly higher than this during the first 5 000 kilometres.
One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably
every time after the fuel tank is filled or after driving for long stretches.
We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range if the engine
has been operating at high loads, for example during a lengthy motorway
trip during the summer months, towing a trailer or negotiating a high
mountain pass, but not above this.
The warning light in the instrument cluster* will indicate ⇒ page 38,
“Engine oil level* ” whether the oil level is too low. In this case, check
the oil level as soon as possible. Top up with an appropriate quantity of oil.
Caution
• The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range . Danger
of damaging the catalytic converter.
• Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible
under the conditions prevailing to top up with oil. Switch of the engine
and contact and obtain professional assistance from a specialist
garage.
Replenishing engine oil
– Inspecting the engine oil level ⇒ page 251.
– Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening.
– Pour in a suitable grade of oil in portions of 0.5 litres
⇒ page 250, “Engine oil specifications”.
– Inspect the oil level ⇒ page 251.
– Carefully screw on the cap of the filler opening and push the
dipstick in fully.
WARNING
• Avoid dripping oil onto hot parts of the engine when topping up
will oil - a risk of fire!
• Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 248, “Working in
the engine compartment” before working in the engine compart-
ment.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must on no account be above the range ⇒ page 251. Oil
will otherwise be drawn in through the crankcase ventilation and may pass
through the exhaust system to atmosphere. The oil may combust in the
catalytic converter and damage it.
A
b
A
a
A
c
A
b
A
a
A
a
A
a
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing 253
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service
schedule or according to the service interval indicator ⇒ page 16.
WARNING
• Only carry out the engine oil change, if you have the required
professional knowledge!
• Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 248, “Working in
the engine compartment” before working in the engine compart-
ment.
• Let the engine cool down - risk of burning from hot oil.
• Wear an eye protection - risk of caustic burns due to oil
splashes.
• Oil is toxic! Store old oil in a safe place out of the reach of chil-
dren and unauthorized persons until you dispose of it properly.
Caution
You must not pour any additives into the engine oil - risk of engine
damage! Damage, which results from such product, are excluded from the
warranty.
For the sake of the environment
• You must on no account pour oil into the ground or into the sewage
system.
• In view of the problems involved in properly disposing of old oil, the
material, equipment and the knowledge required for such work, we recom-
mend that you have the oil and oil filter change carried out by your Škoda
dealer.
Note
After your skin has come in contact with the oil, you must thoroughly wash
your skin.
Cooling system
Coolant
The job of the coolant is to cool the engine.
The cooling system does not require any maintenance under normal oper-
ating conditions. The coolant consists of water with a concentration of
coolant additive of 40 %. This mixture not only provides antifreeze protec-
tion down to -25°C but also protects the cooling and heating system from
corrosion. It also prevents the formation of scale and significantly
increases the boiling point of the coolant.
You must therefore not reduce the concentration of antifreeze agent in the
coolant by adding water, also not during the summer months or in coun-
tries with a warm climate. The concentration of coolant additive in the
coolant must be at least 40%.
You can increase the amount of antifreeze in the coolant iIf a higher
concentration of antifreeze is necessary for climatic reasons but only up
to 60% (antifreeze protection down to approx. -40°C). The antifreeze
protection tails off above that concentration.
Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate (e.g. Sweden, Norway,
Finland) are already factory-filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze
protection down to about -35°C. In these countries the concentration of
coolant additive should be at least 50 %.
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing254
Coolant
The cooling system is filled at the works with coolant (purple in colour),
which complies with the specification TL-VW 774 F.
We recommend that you use the same coolant additive - G12 PLUS
(purple in colour).
Please contact your Škoda dealer if you have any questions regarding the
coolant or if you wish to fill up with a different coolant.
Your Škoda dealer can also supply you with the correct coolant additives.
Caution
• Other coolant additives may cause operational problems which,
in particular, involves significantly reducing the anticorrosion effect.
• Any faults or problems resulting from corrosion may cause a loss
of coolant and, as a consequence of this, result in major engine
damage.
Inspecting the coolant level
The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compart-
ment on the right.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet ⇒ in “Working in the engine compart-
ment” on page 248.
– Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle
⇒ fig. 194. The coolant level when the engine is cold must lie
between the (MIN) and (MAX) markings. The level may
also rise slightly above the (MAX) marking when the
engine is warm.
If the coolant level in the reservoir is too low, this is indicated by the
warning light in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 35. We nevertheless
Fig. 194 Engine
compartment: Coolant
expansion bottle
A
b
A
a
A
a
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing 255
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time
to time.
Loss of coolant
A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the
system. You should not merely top up the coolant in the reservoir. It is also
important to have the cooling system inspected without delay by a
specialist garage.
Losses can only occur through the pressure relief in the cap of the coolant
expansion bottle which is completely free of leaks if the coolant boils as a
result of overheating and is forced out of the cooling system.
WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 248, “Working in the
engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
Caution
One should contact a specialist garage as soon as possible if the source
of overheating itself cannot be determined and removed, since there may
be grave damage to the engine.
Replenishing the coolant
– Switch the engine off.
– Allow the engine to cool down.
– Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir
⇒ fig. 194 and unscrew the cap carefully by turning it to the
left ⇒ .
– Top up the coolant.
– Screw the cap tight until it is heard to lock.
The coolant which you use for replenishing the system, must comply with
one specific specification ⇒ page 253, “Coolant”. Do not use an alternative
additive if the coolant additive G12 PLUS is not available in exceptional
cases. Just top up the system with water and as soon as possible arrange
adjustment to correct the mixing ratio of water and coolant additive again
by a specialist garage.
Only use fresh coolant for topping up the system.
Do not fill up over the “MAX” marking! Excess coolant which is heated up
is forced out of the cooling system through the pressure relief valve in the
cap of the coolant compensation bottle.
Wait until the engine has cooled down for a system which has suffered a
major loss of coolant before pouring in coolant. This is necessary to avoid
engine damage.
WARNING
• The cooling system is pressurized! Do not open the cap of the
coolant expansion bottle if the engine is still hot - risk of scalding!
• The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to
your health. Avoid contact with the coolant. Coolant vapours are
also harmful to the health. It is important, therefore, to always
safely store any coolant additive in its original container out of the
reach of children - risk of poisoning!
• If any splashes of coolant get into your eyes, rinse out your eyes
immediately with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as
possible.
• You should also consult a doctor without delay if you have inad-
vertently swallowed coolant.
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing256
Caution
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible
under the conditions prevailing to top up with coolant. Switch of the
engine and contact and obtain professional assistance from a specialist
garage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not re-use coolant if it is necessary to drain the coolant in the system.
It should be collected and disposed of in compliance with environmental
protection regulations.
The radiator fan
The radiator fan may switch on suddenly.
The radiator fan is driven by an electric motor and controlled according to
the coolant temperature.
The radiator fan may continue running for up to 10 minutes after the
engine has been switched off - even if the ignition is also off. It may also
switch on suddenly after a certain time, if
• the coolant temperature has risen because of an accumulation of heat
or
• the warm engine compartment is heated up additionally by strong
sunlight.
WARNING
You must therefore be aware when working in the engine compart-
ment that the fan may switch on suddenly - risk of injury!
Brake fluid
Inspecting the brake fluid level
The brake fluid reservoir is located on the left of the engine
compartment. The brake fluid reservoir on right-hand steering
models is positioned on the other side of the engine compart-
ment.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet ⇒ in “Working in the engine compart-
ment” on page 248.
– Inspect the brake fluid level in the reservoir ⇒ fig. 195. The
level must be between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings.
Fig. 195 Engine
compartment: Brake
fluid reservoir
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing 257
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear-and-
tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads, and is perfectly normal.
There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the
fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the
“MIN” marking. A situation where the brake fluid level is too low is indi-
cated by the warning light lighting up in the instrument cluster
⇒ page 40. In this case stop the car immediately and do not drive any
further! Contact a Škoda Dealer to obtain professional assistance.
WARNING
• Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 248, “Working in
the engine compartment” before working in the engine compart-
ment.
• If the fluid level has dropped below the “MIN” marking, do not
drive any further - risk of accident! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain
professional assistance.
Replacing brake fluid
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. This causes the fluid to absorb moisture
from the surrounding air over a period of time. Excessive water in the
brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake system. The water
content also lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. This is why brake
fluid must be replaced every two years.
One may only use new genuine brake fluid from Škoda Auto. The specifi-
cation for the brake fluid is “FMVSS 116 DOT 4”.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid replaced by a Škoda dealer
as part of an Inspection Service.
WARNING
• Using old brake fluid can result in severe stress on the brakes
because of the formation of vapour bubbles in the brake system.
This greatly impairs the braking efficiency and thus also the safety
of your vehicle.
• Brake fluid is toxic! It must therefore be kept safely in closed
original containers and well away from children and unauthorized
persons.
Caution
Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
In view of the problems involved with proper disposal of brake fluid, the
special tools and the professional knowledge required, you should have
the brake fluid replaced by a Škoda dealer.
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing258
The battery
Working on the battery
The battery is located in the engine compartment below a plastic
cover*.
– Press the interlock on the side of the battery cover ⇒ fig. 196,
fold the battery cover out and pull it out.
– The installtion of the battery cover takes place in the reverse
order.
Removal and installation of the battery is not recommended since it can,
under certain circumstances, lead to major damage. Contact a specialist
garage.
There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and burns when carrying out
any work on the battery and on the electrical system. It is essential to
comply with the warning instructions stated below ⇒ and with the
general applicable rules of safety.
WARNING
• The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be
handled with the greatest of care. Always wear protective gloves,
eye and skin protection when handling batteries. Corrosive fumes
in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and
inflammation of the air passages in the lungs. Battery acid
corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds after contact
with the skin which take a long time to heal. Repeated contact with
diluted acids causes skin diseases (inflammations, ulcers, slin
cracks). Acids coming into contact with water are diluted accompa-
nied by significant development of heat.
• Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out
of the battery vent openings. Protect the eyes with safety glasses
or a shield! There is the danger of suffering blindness! If any
battery electrolyte gets into your eye, rinse out your eye immedi-
ately with clear water for several minutes. Contact a doctor without
delay.
• Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised
as soon as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty
of water. Contact a doctor immediately if you swallow battery elec-
trolyte.
• Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
• Hydrogen is released when you charge a battery and a highly
explosive gas mixture is produced. An explosion can be caused
through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the
cable plug while the ignition is on.
• Bridging of the poles will create a short circuit (e.g. through
metal objects, cables). Possible consequences of a short circuit:
Melting of lead struts, explosion and burning of the battery, jets of
acid spurting out.
Fig. 196 Engine
compartment: The
battery
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing 259
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• It is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light, to smoke or
to carry out any activities which produce sparks. Avoid creating
sparks when working with cables and electrical devices. Strong
sparking represents a risk of injury.
• Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch
off the engine, the ignition as well as all electrical components and
disconnect the negative cable (-) on the battery. If you wish to
replace a bulb it is sufficient to switch off the appropriate light.
• Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and
caustic burns! Replace a frozen battery.
• Never use a battery which is damaged - risk of explosion! Imme-
diately replace a damaged battery.
Caution
• You must only disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on,
otherwise the electrical system (electronic components) of the vehicle
may be damaged. When disconnecting the battery from the electrical
system of the vehicle, first disconnect the negative terminal (-) of the
battery. Then disconnect the positive terminal (+).
• When reconnecting the battery, first connect the positive terminal (+)
and only then the negative terminal (-) of the battery. You must on no
account connect the cables wrongly - risk of a cable fire.
• Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the vehicle
body otherwise damage could occur to the paintwork.
• Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the battery
housing from the effects of ultra-violet light.
For the sake of the environment
A removed battery is a special type of waste which is harmful to the envi-
ronment - contact your specialist garage regarding disposing of the
battery.
Note
Please also refer to the guidelines ⇒ page 261, “Disconnecting and recon-
necting the battery”, also after connecting the battery.
Battery with a charge level indicator, the so-called
magic eye
There is a so-called magic eye ⇒ fig. 197 located on the top of the battery.
The “magic eye” changes its colour in line with the charge state of and
electrolyte level in the battery.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 197 Battery with a
charge level indicator
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing260
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the “magic eye”. For this reason
carefully knock on the “magic eye” before carrying out the check.
• Green colour - the battery is adequately charged.
• Dark colour - the battery has to be charged
• Colourless or yellow colour - have the battery checked by a Škoda
dealer.
Batteries, which are more than 5 years old, must be replaced. We recom-
mend you have the electrolyte level inspected and adjusted to the correct
level or the battery replaced if necessary by a Škoda dealer.
Caution
If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery
will discharge because certain electrical components consume electricity
(e.g. control units) also in idle state. You can prevent the discharging of
the battery by disconnecting the negative terminal or charging the battery
constantly with a very low charging current. Please also refer to the notes
when working on the battery ⇒ page 258, “Working on the battery”.
Inspecting the electrolyte level
The battery is practically maintenance-free under normal operating
conditions. We do, however, recommend that you have the electrolyte
level inspected from time to time by a Škoda dealer when outside temper-
atures are high or when driving on long trips. You should also check the
electrolyte level ⇒ page 260 each time the battery is charged.
The battery acid level will also be checked as part of the Inspection
Service.
Operation in winter
The battery has to provide greater amounts of electricity during the winter.
It also has only part of the initial power output at low temperatures that it
has at normal temperatures.
A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below
0°C.
We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked by a Škoda
dealer before the start of the winter, and recharged if necessary.
WARNING
Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and
caustic burns. Replace a frozen battery.
Charging the battery
A properly charged battery is essential for reliably starting
the engine.
– Read the warning notes ⇒ in “Working on the battery” on
page 258 and ⇒ .
– Switch the ignition and all electrical components off.
– Only for “quick-charging”: Disconnect both battery cables (first
of all “negative”, then “positive”).
– Carefully attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the
battery terminals (red = “positive”, black = “negative”).
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing 261
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– You can now plug the mains cable of the charger into the
power socket and switch on the charger.
– When charging is completed: switch the charger off and
unplug the mains cable from the power socket.
– Only then should you disconnect the terminal clamps of the
charger.
– Reconnect the cables to the battery (first of all “positive”, then
“negative”).
It is not normally necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you
recharge the battery using low amperages (as for example from a mini-
charger). Please also refer to the instructions from the charger manufac-
turer.
A charging current of 0.1 of the total battery capacity (or lower) is that
which should be used until full charging is achieved.
It is, however, necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the
battery with high amperages, so-called “quick-charging”.
“Quick-charging” a battery is dangerous ⇒ in “Working on the battery”
on page 258. It requires a special charger and appropriate knowledge. We
therefore recommend that you have your battery quick-charged only by
your Škoda dealer.
A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C
⇒ . We recommend that you no longer use a battery which has thawed
out because the casing of the battery may be cracked through the forma-
tion of ice and this would allow battery electrolyte to flow out.
The vent plugs of the battery should not be opened for charging.
WARNING
Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and
caustic burns. Replace a frozen battery.
Disconnecting and reconnecting the battery
On disconnecting and reconnecting the battery the following functions are
initially deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault-free:
We recommend having the vehicle checked by a Škoda dealer to ensure
full functionality of all electrical systems.
Replacing the battery
You should only replace a battery with a new battery of the same capacity,
voltage (12 V), amperage and of the same size. Škoda dealers have a
range of suitable batteries available.
Operation Operating measure
Electrical power window (operational
faults)
⇒ page 59
Enter radio code number see Radio Operating Instruc-
tions
Set hours ⇒ page 17
Data in the multi-functional indicator* are
deleted.
⇒ page 18
.
,
,
Inspecting and Replenishing262
We recommend that you only have an old battery disposed of by your
Škoda dealer since it does require special disposal.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain poisonous substances such as sulphuric acid and lead.
They must be disposed of in accordance with local environmental protec-
tion regulations and on no account as domestic waste.
Windscreen Wiper and Washer System
The windshield washer reservoir contains the cleaning fluid for the wind-
screen or rear window and for the headlamp cleaning system*. The reser-
voir is located at the front right of the engine compartment ⇒ fig. 198.
The filling level of the container is 3 litres, 5.5 litres on vehicles which also
have a headlight washing system.
Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and head-
lights. We therefore recommend using clean washing water together with
the screen cleaner from Škoda genuine accessories (in winter additionally
with antifreeze) which is capable of removing stubborn dirt. Follow the
instructions for use on the packaging when using screen cleaning prod-
ucts.
You should always add antifreeze to the cleaning water in winter even if
your vehicle is fitted with heated windscreen washer nozzles*.
It is also possible in exceptional cases to use methylated spirits when no
screen cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methyl-
ated spirits must not be more than 15 %. Please note, however, that the
antifreeze protection at this concentration is only adequate down to -5°C.
WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 248, “Working in the
engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
Caution
• On no account should you add radiator antifreeze or other additives to
the windscreen washer fluid.
• If the vehicle is fitted with headlight cleaning system, you should only
add cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of
the headlights to the windscreen washer fluid. Please contact your Škoda
dealer, who will tell you which cleaning agent you can use.
Note
Do not take the filter out of the windscreen wash container when filling it
up again with liquid otherwise dirt can get into the liquid transportation
system and can lead to faults in operation of the windscreen wash
system.
Fig. 198 Engine
compartment: Wind-
shield washer fluid
reservoir
.
,
,
Wheels and Tyres 263
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Wheels and Tyres
Wheels
General comments
• New tyres do not offer optimal grip at first and should therefore be run
in for about 500 km at a moderate speed and an appropriately cautious
style of driving. You will also profit from longer tyre life.
• The tread depth of new tyres may differ because of design features
and the configuration of the tread (depending on the type of tyre and the
manufacturer).
• Drive over curbs on the side of the road and other such obstacles
slowly and, where possible, at a right angles in order to avoid damage to
tyres and wheel trims.
• Inspect your tyres from time to time for damage (punctures, cuts, splits
and bulges). Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile.
• Damage to tyres and wheels is frequently not visible. Unusual vibra-
tions or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage.
Please reduce your speed immediately and stop if you suspect that
a wheel is damaged. Inspect the tyres for signs of damage (bulges,
splits, etc.) If no visible damage is present, please drive at an appropri-
ately slow speed and carefully to the nearest specialist garage in order to
have your vehicle inspected.
• Also protect your tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuel.
• Immediately replace any dust caps of the valves which have got lost.
• Mark wheels before removing them so that their previous direction of
running can be maintained when mounted them again.
• Always store wheels or tyres which been removed in a cool, dry and,
where possible, dark place. Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim
should be stored upright.
Unidirectional tyres*
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the
tyre. This indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential
that the tyres are fitted on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres
able to provide the optimal properties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-
and-tear and aquaplaning.
Further information concerning the use of unidirectional tyres ⇒ page 268.
WARNING
• New tyres during the first 500 km do not offer optimal grip and
should therefore be run appropriately - risk of accident!
• Never drive with damaged tyres - risk of accident!
Note
Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.
.
,
,
Wheels and Tyres264
Tyre life
The life of your tyres very much depends on the following points:
Tyre pressure
The working life of tyres will be shortened considerably if the tyres are
insufficiently or over-inflated and this will have an adverse effect on the
handling of your vehicle.
Correctly inflated tyres are of particular importance when travelling at high
speeds. It is therefore good to check the pressure at least once a month
and also before setting off on a long trip. Please do not forget the spare
wheel when checking the tyres.
The tyre inflation pressures for summer tyres are indicated on the inside
of the fuel filler flap ⇒ fig. 199. The inflation pressures for winter tyres are
20 kPa (0.2 bar) higher than those for summer tyres ⇒ page 268.
The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your
vehicle at all times.
The tyre inflation pressure of the emergency spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa
(4.2 bar).
Always check the inflation pressure of tyres when cold. Do not reduce the
higher pressure of warm tyres. Adapt the inflation pressure of the tyres
accordingly if your vehicle is carrying a significantly higher payload.
Driving style
Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking (squealing tyres) increase
wear-and-tear on your tyres.
Balancing wheels
The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. There are a wide range of influ-
ences when driving which may result in an imbalance and which makes
themselves felt through vibration in the steering.
You should have the wheels rebalanced since any imbalance increases
wear-and-tear on the steering, the suspension and tyres. A wheel must
also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted and each time a tyre is
repaired.
Wheel alignment errors
Incorrect wheel alignment at the front and rear will not only increase wear-
and-tear on the tyres but will also has an adverse effect on vehicle safety.
Contact your specialist garage if you notice any unusual tyre wear.
WARNING
If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre must perform a greater
flexing work. At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of
this. This can result in tread separation and even a tyre blowout.
• Immediately replace the damaged rims or tyres.
For the sake of the environment
Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.
Fig. 199 An opened
fuel filler flap with the
tyre inflation pressure
table
.
,
,
Wheels and Tyres 265
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Wear indicators
The base of the tread of the original tyres has wear indicators 1.6 mm
high, installed at right angles to the direction of travel. These wear indica-
tors are located at 6 - 8 points depending on the make and are evenly
spaced around the circumference of the tyre ⇒ fig. 200. Markings on the
walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI”, triangular symbols or other
symbols identify the position of the wear indicators.
A remaining tread of just 1.6 mm, measured in the grooves of the tread
next to the wear indicators, means that your tyres have reached their
legally permissible minimum tread depth.
WARNING
• You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest
when the wear indicators have been worn down. The legally
permissible minimum tread depth should be observed.
• Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road
surface at high speeds on wet roads. One could experience “aqua-
planing” (uncontrolled movements of the vehicle - “swimming” on
a wet road surface).
Changing wheels around
If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres, we recommend
changing the front wheels around with the rear wheels as shown in the
diagram ⇒ fig. 201. You will then obtain approximately the same life for all
the tyres.
It may be advantageous to swap the tyres over “crosswise” when certain
types of wear characteristic arise on the running surface of the tyres (but
not in the case of unidirectional tyres). Škoda dealers can provide you with
details.
We recommend that you change the wheels around every 10 000 km in
order to achieve even wear on all wheels and to obtain optimal tyre life.
Fig. 200 Tyre tread
with wear indicators
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 201 Changing
wheels around
.
,
,
Wheels and Tyres266
New tyres and wheels
Tyres and wheel rims are important design elements. One should there-
fore use the tyres and wheel rims which have been released for use by
Škoda Auto. They are exactly matched to the vehicle type and therefore
contribute significantly to good road holding and safe driving characteris-
tics ⇒ .
Only fit radial tyres of the same type on all 4 wheels, size (rolling circum-
ference) and, if possible, the same tread pattern on one axle.
Škoda dealers have access to the most current information about which
tyres we have released for use.
We recommend that you have any work relating to tyres or wheels carried
out by your Škoda dealer. Your dealer has all of the necessary special
tools and replacement parts available plus the required specialist knowl-
edge and is also in a position to properly dispose of the old tyres. A large
number of Škoda dealers also have an attractive range of tyres and
wheels available.
The tyre/wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indi-
cated in your vehicle documents. Approval and licensing may differ
according to the legislation prevailing in individual countries.
Proper knowledge of the tyre data makes it easier for you to select the
correct type of tyre. Tyres do, for example, have the following inscription
on their walls:
195 / 65 R 15 91 T
What this means is:
The following speed restrictions apply to tyres.
The date of manufacture is also stated on the tyre wall (possibly only on
the inside of wheel):
DOT ... 40 04...
means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 40th week of
the year 2004.
Any spare wheel which differs from the tyres fitted to the vehicle (e.g.
winter tyres or low-profile tyres) should only be used only for a short time
in the event of a puncture and when adopting an appropriately cautious
style of driving. It should be replaced as quickly as possible by a normal
wheel.
WARNING
• Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved
for your model of Škoda Auto vehicle. Failure to observe this
instruction will adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle -
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Code letter for the type of tyre - Radial
15 Diameter of wheel in inches
91 Load index
T Speed symbol
Speed symbol Permissible maximum speed
S 180 km/h
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
.
,
,
Wheels and Tyres 267
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
risk of accident! Approval and licencing of your vehicle on public
roads may also become void as a result.
• You must on no account drive at a higher speed than is permis-
sible for your tyres - risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage
and loss of control over your vehicle.
• Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in
exceptional cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious
style of driving.
• Never fit tyres which have already been used without having
adequate knowledge of their previous history. Tyres age even if
they have not been used at all or only very little. A spare tyre must
only be used in exceptional cases and only then when adopting an
appropriately cautious style of driving.
• Do not, where possible, replace individual tyres but at least
replace them on both wheels of a given axle at the same time.
Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of in conformity with the appropriate regula-
tions.
Note
It is not normally possible to fit wheels from other models of cars for tech-
nical reasons. This may also apply in certain circumstances to the wheels
of the same type of vehicle.
Wheel bolts
Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design.
Each time you fit other wheels - e.g. light alloy wheels or wheels with
winter tyres - you must therefore also use the matching wheel bolts of the
correct length and shape of spherical cap. This is essential to ensure that
the wheels are tightly fitted and that the brake system operates properly.
If you retrofit wheel trims (or have this done), please also ensure that an
adequate flow of air remains assured for cooling the brake system.
Škoda dealers are instructed in the technical possibilities which exist
regarding converting or retrofitting wheels, tyres and wheel trim.
WARNING
• In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can
loosen when the car is moving - risk of accident!
• The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. However,
they must never be treated with grease or oil.
• If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque,
the rim can lossen when the car is moving - risk of accident! A tight-
ening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads
and this can result in permanent deformation of the contact
surfaces on the rims.
Caution
The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy
wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Wheels and Tyres268
Winter tyres
The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on
wintry roads and at temperatures below 7 °C if you fit winter tyres.
Summer tyres do not offer the same grip on ice and snow at a temperature
below 7 °C because of their construction (width, rubber blend, tread
pattern). This particularly applies to vehicles which are equipped with low-
profile tyres or high-speed tyres (code index H or V on wall of tyre).
Winter tyres must be mounted on all four wheels to obtain the best
handling characteristics.
You must only fit those types of winter tyre which are approved for your
vehicle. The permissible sizes of winter tyres are stated in your vehicle
documents. Approvals may differ because of national legislation.
Please remember that the tyres should be inflated to 20 kPa (0.2 bar)
more than is the case for summer tyres ⇒ page 264, fig. 199.
Winter tyres no longer offer the same winter performance once the tyre
tread has worn down to a depth of about 4 mm.
Ageing also causes winter tyres to lose most of their winter performance
properties - even in cases where the remaining tread depth is still clearly
more than 4 mm.
Speed restrictions apply to winter tyres as well as to summer tyres
⇒ page 266, ⇒ .
You can fit winter tyres of a lower speed category to your vehicle provided
that you also do not drive faster than the permissible maximum speed for
such tyres, even if the possible maximum speed of your vehicle is higher.
The corresponding tyre category can damage the tyres when exceeding
the permissible maximum speed.
Please pay attention to the notes if you decide to fit winter tyres
⇒ page 263.
You can also fit so-called “all-weather tyres” instead of winter tyres.
Please contact your specialist garage if there are any points which are not
clear who will be able to provide you with information regarding the
maximum speed for your tyres.
WARNING
You must on no account drive your car at more than the permis-
sible maximum speed for your winter tyres - risk of an accident
resulting from tyre damage and loss of control over your car.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres on again in good time since summer tyres offer you
better grip and handling on roads which are free of snow and ice as well
as ar temperatures below 7 °C - the braking distance is shorter, there is
less tyre noise, tyre wear is reduced and fuel consumption is reduced.
Note
Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.
Unidirectional tyres*
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of
the tyre. This indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essen-
tial that the tyres are fitted on to run in this direction. Only then are the
tyres able to provide the optimal properties in terms of grip, low noise,
wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.
Should it be necessary to fit on a spare wheel in exceptional cases with a
tyre not dedicated to the running direction or in opposite running direction,
please adopt a cautious style of driving as the tyre is no longer able to
provide optimal grip and handling in such a situation. This particularly
.
,
,
Wheels and Tyres 269
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
important on wet roads. Please refer to the notes ⇒ page 275, “Spare
wheel”.
You should have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible and
restore the correct direction of rotation on all tyres
Snow chains
Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.
When driving on wintry roads, snow chains improve not only traction, but
also the braking performance.
For technical reasons, it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the
following wheel/tyre combinations:
Only use fine-link snow chains. They must not project more than 15 mm
- including the chain lock.
Remove the full wheel trims if you wish to fit snow chains to the wheels.
Observe the national legal requirements relating to the maximum vehicle
speed with snow chains.
WARNING
Please pay attention to the information in the supplied fitting
instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.
Caution
You must take the chains off as soon as you drive on roads which are free
of snow. They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle, damage the
tyres and are rapidly destroyed.
Note
We recommend that you use snow chains from the Škoda genuine
accessories.
Wheel size Depth (D) Tyre size
6J x 15 47 mm 195/65
6.5J x 15 50 mm 195/65
6J x 16 50 mm 205/55
.
,
,
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts270
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts
Accessories and replacement parts
Škoda vehicles have been built according to the latest discoveries in
safety engineering. Thus one should not change the condition in which the
vehicle was delivered from the manufacturer without some thought.
The following guidelines should be observed when a vehicle is to be retro-
fitted with accessories, have technical changes made to it or a part has to
be replaced at some time in the future:
• Advise should always be obtained from a Škoda dealer before buying
any accessories and before making any technical changes ⇒ .
• This is particularly the case when accessories are bought in a foreign
country.
• Škoda Genuine Accessories which have been released for use and
Skoda original parts can be obtained from Škoda dealers. They will install
them professionally and correctly.
• All Škoda original accessory which is listed in the catalogue such as
tilting roofs, spoilers, wheels etc. must have an official stamp of approval.
• Radios, aerials and other electrical accessories should only be
installed by an authorised workshop.
• The guidelines issued by Škoda Auto must be observed when making
technical changes.
• This is to ensure that no technical damage occurs to the vehicle, that
travelling and operating safety are maintained and that the chnages are
permissible. Škoda dealers undertake this work professionally or refer it
to an specialist company in special cases.
Any damage which is done caused by technical changes made
without consulting a Skoda dealer is excluded from the guarantee.
WARNING
• We advise you, in your own interest, to only use Škoda Genuine
Accessories and Škoda original parts which have been expressly
approved for use on your Škoda. Reliability, safety and suitabiliity
have been established for these Škoda original parts.
• We cannot guarantee suitability of installation into your vehicle
of other products despite keeping a constant eye on market devel-
opments (also not in the case where there is an attestation or
permission can be produced).
Technical changes
Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to
operational faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected
systems because of the networking of the electronic components. This
means that the operating safety of your vehicle can be considerably jeop-
ardized, a greater wear of vehicle parts can occur and finally the vehicle
registration documents expire.
We trust that you will understand that your Škoda dealer cannot be liable
for damage resulting from unprofessional work.
We therefore recommend that you have all work carried out with Škoda
original parts at your authorised Škoda dealer.
.
,
,
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts 271
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
Work or modifications on your vehicle, which have been carried out
unprofessionally, can cause operational faults - risk of accident!
.
,
,
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts272
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance 273
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
First-aid box* and warning triangle*
(Octavia)
The first-aid box* is attached by a strap to the right-hand side of the
luggage compartment
The warning triangle can be attached with rubber straps to the trim panel
of the rear wall ⇒ fig. 202.
If you wish to equip your vehicle additionally with a warning triangle,
please contact a specialist garage.
Note
Pay attention to the use-by-date of the contents of the first-aid box.
First-aid box* and warning triangle*
(Estate car)
For vehicles of the type estate car the first-aid box and the warning
triangle are housed in a compartment on the right side in the luggage
Fig. 202 Placing of the
warning triangle
(Octavia)
Fig. 203 Placing of the
warning triangle
(Estate car)
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance274
compartment. You can open the compartment by turning the locks in the
direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 203.
If you wish to equip your vehicle additionally with a warning triangle,
please contact a specialist garage.
Note
Pay attention to the use-by-date of the contents of the first-aid box.
Fire extinguisher*
The fire extinguisher is attached with straps in a holder under the driver
seat.
Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire
extinguisher.
The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person or
company annually (please observe the differing legal equirements).
WARNING
If the fire extinguisher is not correctly attached, in case of sudden
manoeuvres or an accident it can be “thrown” through the interior
compartment and cause injuries.
Note
• The fire extinguisher must comply with the relevant and valid legal
requirements.
• Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. If the fire
extinguisher is used after the expiration date, its proper function is no
longer assured.
• The fire extinguisher is only supplied in certain countries within the
scope of delivery.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack are stored in a locable box in the
spare wheel ⇒ fig. 204. There is also space here for the removable ball for
the trailer towing device*. The box is attached with a strap on the spare
wheel.
The vehicle tool kit contains the following parts (depending on equipment
fitted):
• Hook for pulling off a full wheel trim,
• Plastic clip for a wheel bolt cover,
• Wheel wrench,
• Towing eye,
Fig. 204 Luggage
compartment: Storage
compartment for
vehicle too kit
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance 275
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Adapter for the wheel bolts lock,
After using the lifting jack, screw in the arm of the lifting jack fully before
placing it back in its stowage area.
WARNING
• The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model
of vehicle. On no account attempt to lift a heavier vehicle or other
loads - risk of injury!
• Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely attached in the luggage
compartment.
Note
Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap.
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit is intended for the repair of minor tyre defects. The tyre
repair kit contains a compressor, inflation bottle, operating instructions
and accessories.
The repair with the tyre repair kit is not at all intended to replace a
permanent repair on the tyre, this repair only serves to reach the next
specialist garage. The repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immedi-
ately. Please read the attached instructions carefully before the
repair.
The tyre repair kit is located in a well under the floor covering in the
luggage compartment.
Spare wheel
The spare wheel lies in a well under the floor covering of the luggage
compartment and is fixed in place using special screws ⇒ fig. 205.
Before removing the spare wheel, you must take out the box with the
vehicle tool kit box ⇒ page 274, fig. 204.
One should check the inflation pressure in the spare wheel (at best when
generally checking the tyre air pressures - see sign on the fuel filler flap
⇒ page 264) to ensure that the spare wheel is always ready to use.
Temporary spare wheel
A warning label displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel indi-
cates that your vehicle is equipped with a temporary spare wheel.
Please observe the following notes when driving with a temporary spare
wheel:
• After fitting on the wheel, the warning sticker must not be concealed
(e.g. by the wheel trim).
Fig. 205 Luggage
compartment: Spare
wheel
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance276
• Do not drive with this spare wheel at more than 80 km/h - risk of acci-
dent. Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
• The inflation pressure for this spare wheel is identical to the inflation
pressure of the standard tyres. The temporary spare wheel R 18 must
have an inflation pressure of 420 kPa (4.2 bar)!
• Use this spare wheel only to reach the nearest specialist garage as it
is not intended for continuous use.
• No other summer or winter tyres must be mounted on the rim of the
spare wheel R 18.
Changing a wheel
Preliminary work
The following steps should be carried out before actually
changing the wheel.
– If it is necessary to change a wheel, park the vehicle as far
away as possible from the traffic flow. The place you choose
should be level.
–Have all the occupants get out. While changing a wheel, the
occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road (it is
better behind a crash barrier).
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Engage 1st gear or if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic
gearbox, position the selector lever into position P.
– If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.
– Take the vehicle tool kit ⇒ page 274 and the spare wheel
⇒ page 275 out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
• If you find yourself in flowing traffic switch on the hazard
warning lights system and place the warning triangle on the side of
the road at the prescribed distance from your vehicle while
observing all national legal provisions. In this way you are
protecting not only yourself but also other road users.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack
- danger of suffering injury!
Caution
If you have to change a wheel on a slope first block the opposite wheel
with a stone or similar object in order to secure the vehicle from unexpect-
edly rolling away.
Note
Comply with the national legal regulations.
Changing a wheel
Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible.
– Take off the full wheel trim* ⇒ page 278 or the caps
⇒ page 278.
– In the case of light alloy wheels remove the wheel trim cap
⇒ page 279.
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance 277
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Slacken the wheel bolts ⇒ page 279.
– Jack up the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is clear of
the ground ⇒ page 280.
– Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface
(cloth, paper etc.).
– Take off the wheel.
– Fit on the spare wheel and tighten the wheel bolts slightly.
– Lower the car.
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly, alternately and diagonally using
the wheel wrench ⇒ page 279.
– Mount the full wheel trim/wheel trim cap or the caps.
Note
• All bolts must be clean and must turn easily.
• You must never grease or oil the wheel bolts!
• When fitting on unidirectional tyres, ensure that the tyres rotate in the
correct direction ⇒ page 263.
Subsequent steps
After changing the wheel, you must perform the following steps.
– Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well.
– Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided.
– Check the tyre pressure on the spare wheel just mounted as
soon as possible.
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with
a torque wrench as soon as possible. Steel and light alloy
wheels must be tightened to a tightening torque of 120 Nm.
– Have the defective tyre repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING
It is necessary to observe the guidelines given on ⇒ page 266, “New
tyres and wheels” if the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres
which are different to those it was fitted with at the works.
Note
• If you find, when changing the wheel, that the wheel bolts are corroded
and difficult to turn, the bolts must be replaced before checking the tight-
ening torque.
• Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed to a workshop where
the tightening torque can be checked.
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance278
Full wheel trim*
Removing
– Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced
edge of the full wheel trim.
– Push the wheel key through the clamp, support the wheel key
on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim ⇒ fig. 206.
Installing
– First press the full wheel trim onto the wheel at the valve
opening provided. Then press the full wheel trim into the
wheel in such a way that its entire circumference locks
correctly in place.
Caution
• Use the pressure of your hand, do not knock on the full wheel trim!
Heavy knocks mainly on the points where the full wheel trim has not been
inserted into the wheel, can result in damage to the guide and centering
elements of the full wheel trim.
• First check for yourself that the theft-deterrent wheel bolt is located
⇒ page 281, “Securing wheels against being stolen*” in the hole in the
area of the valve before fitting the full wheel trim onto a steel wheel which
is attached with a theft-deterrent wheel bolt.
Wheel bolts with caps*
Removing
– Push the plastic clip sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner
catches of the clip are positioned at the collar of the cap and
detach the cap.
Fig. 206 Removing the
full wheel trim
Fig. 207 Removing the
cap.
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance 279
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Installing
– Push the caps fully onto the wheel bolts.
The caps are located in the well of the luggage compartment.
Wheel trim caps*
Removing
– Carefully remove the wheel trim cap using the removal hook
⇒ fig. 208.
Slackening and tightening wheel bolts
Slacken the wheel bolts before jacking up the vehicle.
Slackening wheel bolts
– Push the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt
11)
.
– Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn
to the left ⇒ fig. 209.
Tightening wheel bolts
– Push the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt
11)
.
– Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt to the right until
it is tight.
Fig. 208 Pulling off
wheel trim cap on light
alloy wheels
11)
Use the appropriate adapter for slackening and tightening the safety wheel bolts
⇒ page 281.
Fig. 209 Changing a
wheel: Slackening
wheel bolts
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance280
WARNING
Slacken the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) as long as the
vehicle has not yet been jacked up - risk of an accident!.
Note
apply pressure carefully with your foot to the end of the wheel wrench if it
proves difficult to slacken the wheel bolts. Hold tight on the vehicle when
doing this and ensure that you have a steady position.
Raise vehicle
You have to raise the vehicle with a lifting jack in order to
be able to take off the wheel.
Position the lifting jack by selecting the jacking point which is
closest to the wheel to be removed ⇒ fig. 210. The jacking point
is located directly below the engraving in the lower sill. The
engraving is only visible after opening the door.
– Position the lifting jack below the jacking point and move it up
until its claw is positioned directly below the vertical web of the
lower sill.
– Align the car jack so that its claw grasps the web of the lower
sill and the base plate is resting flat on the floor.
– Turn the lifting jack up further until the wheel is just clear of the
ground.
Ground below the lifting jack which is soft and slippery can cause the
vehicle to slip off the jack. It is therefore always necessary to place the
lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base. Use a non-
slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat) if the surface is smooth, such as
cobbled stones, a tiled floor,etc.
WARNING
• Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed - risk of injury!
• Take suitable measures to prevent the base of the lifting jack
from slipping off - risk of injury!
• Not positioning the lifting jack at the specified points can result
in damage to the vehicle. The jack can also slip off if it does not
have sufficient grip - risk of injury!
• It is important to support the vehicle with suitable supporting
blocks if you wish to work under the lifted vehicle - risk of injury!
Fig. 210 Changing a
wheel: Points for posi-
tioning car jack
A
A
A
B
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance 281
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Securing wheels against being stolen*
You need a special adapter for slackening the safety
wheel bolts.
– Pull off the full wheel trim/cap from the wheel hub or cap from
the safety wheel bolt.
– Push the adapter with its toothed side into the inner
toothing of the safety wheel bolt right down in such a way
that only the outer hexagon is jutting out ⇒ fig. 211.
– Push the wheel wrench fully onto the adapter .
– Slacken the wheel bolt, or tighten it firmly ⇒ page 279.
– Reinstall the full wheel trim/wheel cap after removing the
adapter or place the cap onto the safety wheel bolt.
– Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as
soon as possible. Steel and light alloy wheels must be tight-
ened to a tightening torque of 120 Nm.
The safety wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with them (one safety wheel bolt
per wheel) can only be loosened or tighten up by using the adapter
provided.
It is meaningful to note the code number hammered into the rear side of
the adapter or the rear side of the safety wheel bolts. You can obtain a
replacement adapter from a Škoda dealer, if necessary, by quoting this
number.
We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with
you in the vehicle. It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit.
Caution
Damage can occur to the adapter and safety wheel bolt if the safety wheel
bolt is tightened up too much.
Note
The set of safety wheel bolts can be obtained from your Škoda dealer.
Jump-starting
Initial steps
You can use the battery of another vehicle for jump-starting yours if the
engine does not start because the battery on your vehicle is flat. You will
require jump-start cables for this purpose.
Fig. 211 Safety wheel
bolt with adapter
A
B
A
A
A
B
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance282
Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the
battery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the
capacity of the discharged battery in your vehicle.
Jump-start cables
Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section
and insulated terminal clamps. Please pay attention to the manufacturer's
instructions.
Positive cable - colour coding in the majority of cases red.
Negative cable - colour coding in the majority of cases black.
WARNING
• A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just
below 0°C. In case of frozen battery carry out no jump-starting - risk
of explosion!
• Please pay attention to the warning instructions relating to
working in the engine compartment ⇒ page 248.
Note
• There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise
current may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected.
• The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of
the vehicle.
• Switch off any mobile phone, pay attention to the instructions for use
of the mobile phone in such a situation.
• We recommend purchasing jump-start cables from a Škoda dealer as
a Škoda original accessory or from retailers who sell branded batteries.
Starting engine
It is important to connect the jump-start cables in the correct
order:
Connecting positive terminals
– Attach one end to the positive terminal ⇒ fig. 212 of the
discharged battery .
– Attach the other end to the positive terminal of the battery
supplying the power .
Connecting negative terminal and engine block
– Attach one end to the negative terminal of the battery
supplying the power .
Fig. 212 Jump-starting
using the battery from
another vehicle: A - flat
vehicle battery, B -
battery providing
current
A
1
A
A
A
2
A
B
A
3
A
B
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance 283
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Attach the other end to a solid metal part which is
connected firmly to the engine block, or to the engine block
itself.
Starting engine
– Start the engine of the vehicle providing current and run the
engine at idling speed.
– Now start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
– Interrupt the attempt at starting an engine after 10 seconds if
it does not start right away and wait for about 30 seconds
before repeating the attempt.
– Disconnect the cables on the engine in exactly the reverse
order they were connected up.
WARNING
• The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never
make contact with each other. Furthermore, the cable connected to
the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with
electrically conducting parts of the vehicle - risk of a short circuit!
• Do not affix the jump starting cables to the negative terminal of
the discharged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping
out the battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from
the engine being started.
• Run the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any
rotating parts in the engine compartment.
• Do not bend over the batteries - risk of caustic burns!
• The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.
• Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering ciga-
rettes etc.) away from the battery - risk of an explosion!
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
General
Please pay attention to the following instructions if you are going
to use a tow rope:
Driver of the towing vehicle
– Do not drive off until the tow rope is taught.
– Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or
depress the accelerator particularly gently if your vehicle is
fitted with an automatic gearbox.
Driver of the towed vehicle
– Switch the ignition on so that the steering wheel is not blocked
and you can also operate the turn signal lights, the headlight
flasher, the windscreen wipers and windscreen washer
system.
– Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into
position N if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
A
4
WARNING (continued)
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance284
– Note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate
if the engine is running. You will require significantly greater
physical force to depress the brake pedal and to steer the
vehicle if the engine is not running.
– Ensure that the tow rope is always kept taught.
Tow rope or tow bar
A tow bar is safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimizes any
shocks. You can use a tow rope only if a suitable tow bar is not available.
The tow rope must be elastic to protect the vehicle. Thus one should only
use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a similarly elastic material.
Only attach the tow rope to the towing eyes provided for this purpose
⇒ page 285, “Front towing eye” and ⇒ page 286, “Rear towing eye”.
Driving style
Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice. Both drivers
should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle.
Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be
towed in.
One should be constantly vigilant not to allow impermissibly high towing
forces or jerky loadings. There is always a risk of excessive stresses and
damage resulting at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar
when you attempt to tow a vehicle which is not standing on a paved road.
Caution
If the gearbox of your vehicle no longer contains any oil because of a
defect, your vehicle must only be towed in with the driven wheels raised
clear of the ground, or on a special vehicle transporter or trailer.
Note
• Please comply with any legal requirements particularly regarding the
switched on signal systems, when towing in or tow-starting another
vehicle.
• The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances
result in the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle.
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance 285
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Front towing eye
The towing eye is stored in the box for the vehicle tool kit.
Remove the protective grille carefully as follows.
– Press the grille together with the hand at the top and bottom
close to the licence plate and swivel out in the direction of
arrow ⇒ page 285, fig. 213.
– Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise down to the stop
⇒ page 285, fig. 214 and tighten up using the wheel wrench
(push the wheel wrench through eye).
– Put the protective grille in place after screwing out the towing
eye again and press into place. The protective grille must
engage firmly.
Fig. 213 Front
bumper: Protective
grille
Fig. 214 Front
bumper: Installing the
towing eye
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance286
Rear towing eye
– Take the cover out of the bumper ⇒ fig. 215.
– Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise down to the stop
⇒ fig. 216 and tighten up using the wheel wrench (push the
wheel wrench through eye).
– Put the cover in place after screwing out the towing eye again
and press into place. The cover must engage firmly.
Tow-starting a vehicle
If the engine does not start, we generally do not recommend to
tow-start your vehicle. One should attempt to start the engine
using jump start cables ⇒ page 281 or call on the services of the
SERVICE mobile.
If your vehicle has to be towed:
– Engage 2nd or 3rd gear with the vehicle stationary.
– Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep it depressed.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Wait until both vehicles are moving then release the clutch
pedal slowly.
– Depress the clutch pedal fully when the engine fires and take
the vehicle out of gear.
For technical reasons it is not possible to tow-start a car fitted with an
automatic gearbox.
Fig. 215 Rear bumper:
Removing cover
Fig. 216 Rear bumper:
Installing the towing
eye
.
,
,
Breakdown assistance 287
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
There is high risk of having an accident when tow-starting a
vehicle, when for example the towed vehicle runs into the towing
vehicle.
Caution
Vehicles which are fitted with a catalytic converter should not be tow-
started over a distance of more than 50 metres. Unburnt fuel may get into
the catalytic converter and damage it.
Towing in a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox
Please refer to the notes ⇒ page 283.
The car can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or
rear wheels raised. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
Towing of a vehicle with an automatic gearbox
Please refer to the notes ⇒ page 283.
The car can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope. Refer at the same
time to the following guidelines:
• Move selector lever into N.
• The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
• The maximum permissible towing distance is 50 km. The gear oil
pump does not operate when the engine is not running and the gear would
not be adequately lubricated at higher speeds and over longer towing
distance.
Caution
If the vehicle is towed in by a recovery vehicle, it should only be towed in
with the front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the automatic
gearbox is damaged! (Does not apply to the automatic gearbox DSG).
Note
The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not
possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance
is greater than 50 km.
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs288
Fuses and light bulbs
Electric fuses
Replacing fuses
Defect fuses must be replaced.
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are
located on the left side of the dash panel behind the safety cover
and under the cover in the engine compartment on the left.
– Switch the ignition off and also the electrical component
affected.
– Use a screwdriver to take off the fuse cover on the side of the
dash panel ⇒ fig. 217 or the fuse cover in the engine compart-
ment ⇒ page 289.
– Find out which fuse belongs to the relevant component
⇒ page 293, “Fuse assignment in the dash panel” or
⇒ page 290, “Fuse assignment in engine compartment -
version 1” or ⇒ page 291, “Fuse assignment in engine
compartment - version 2”.
– Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the fuse cover, insert it
onto the respective fuse and pull out this fuse.
– Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips.
Replace the defect fuse by a new fuse of the same ampere
number.
– Fit on the fuse cover again.
We recommend that you carry the box of replacement fuses with you
which was delivered in your vehicle. Replacement fuses
12)
are available
at Škoda dealers.
Colour coding of fuses
Fig. 217 Fuse cover:
left side of the dash
panel
12)
Replacement fuses are, on the other hand, part of the basic equipping of the ve-
hicle in some countries.
Colour Maximum amperage
light brown 5
brown 7,5
red 10
blue 15
yellow 20
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs 289
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Caution
• Never attempt to “repair” fuses and also do not replace them with a
fuse of a higher amperage - risk of fire! This may also cause damage at
another part of the electrical system.
• Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a
specialist garage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time.
Fuse cover in engine compartment
The fuse box in the engine compartment exists in two
different versions. You can determine which version your
vehicle is fitted with after removing the fuse cover at the
location of the fuses.
For particular model versions, the battery must be removed
before removing the fuse cover ⇒ page 258.
Removing fuse cover
– Move the circlips ⇒ fig. 218 as far as the stop, the symbol
appears behind the circlip and remove the cover.
Installing fuse cover
– Position the fuse cover on the fuse box and push the circlips
as far as the stop - the symbol
is visible behind the
circlip.
white 25
green 30
orange 40
red 50
Colour Maximum amperage
Fig. 218 Fuse cover in
engine compartment
A
A
A
A
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs290
Caution
• When unlocking and locking the fuse cover, it must be pressed on the
sides to the box, otherwise damage can occur to the locking mechanism.
• Carefully position the fuse cover in the engine compartment. If the
cover was not correctly positioned, water can get into the fuses and this
results in a damage to the vehicle!
Fuse assignment in engine compartment - version 1
Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model
versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
Fig. 219 Schematic
representation of fuse
box in engine compart-
ment - version 1
No. Power consumer Amperes
F1 Pump for ABS 30
F2 Valves for ABS 30
F3 Control unit for convenience functions 20
F4 Measuring circuit 5
F5 Horn 15
F6 Valve for fuel dosing 15
F7 Not assigned
F8 Not assigned
F9 Activated charcoal filter, exhaust gas recirculation
valve
10
F10 Leakage diagnosis pump 10
F11 Lambda probe upstream of catalytic converter,
engine control unit
10
F12 Lambda probe downstream of catalytic converter 10
F13 Control unit for automatic gearbox 15
F14 Not assigned
F15 Coolant pump 10
F16 Windshield wiper lever and turn signal light lever 5
F17 Instrument cluster 5
F18 Audio amplifier (sound system) 30
F19 Radio 15
F20 Phone 5
F21 Not assigned
F22 Not assigned
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs 291
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fuse assignment in engine compartment - version 2
F23 Engine control unit 10
F24 Control unit for CAN databus 5
F25 Not assigned
F26 Not assigned
F27 Not assigned
F28 Engine control unit 25
F29 Actuation for coolant pump after-running 5
F30 Control unit for auxiliary heating 20
F31 Front window wiper 30
F32 Not assigned
F33 Not assigned
F34 Not assigned
F35 Not assigned
F36 Not assigned
F37 Not assigned
F38 Radiator fan, valves 10
F39 Clutch pedal switch, brake pedal switch 5
F40 Ignition coils 20
F41 Not assigned
F42 Actuation of fuel pump 5
F43 Not assigned
F44 Not assigned
F45 Not assigned
F46 Not assigned
No. Power consumer Amperes
F47 Central control unit, Left main headlights 40
F48 Central control unit, Right main headlights 40
F49 Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on) 40
F50 Not assigned
F51 Not assigned
F52
Power supply relay - terminal X
a)
40
F53 Accessory equipment 50
F54 Not assigned
a)
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the elec-
trical components of this terminal are automatically switched off.
No. Power consumer Amperes
Fig. 220 Schematic
representation of fuse
box in engine compart-
ment - version 2
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs292
Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model
versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
No. Power consumer Amperes
F1 Control unit for convenience functions 20
F2 Windshield wiper lever and turn signal light lever 5
F3 Measuring circuit 5
F4 Valves for ABS 30
F5 Control unit for automatic gearbox 15
F6 Instrument cluster 5
F7 Not assigned
F8 Radio 15
F9 Phone 5
F10 Engine control unit, Main relay 5
F11 Control unit for auxiliary heating 20
F12 Control unit for CAN databus 5
F13 Engine control unit 25/30
F14 Ignition 20
F15 Lambda probe, NO
x
-sensor, Fuel pump relay 15
F16 Pump for ABS 30
F17 Horn 15
F18 Amplifier for digital sound processor 30
F19 Front window wiper 30
F20 Not assigned 5
F21 Lambda probe 15
F22 Clutch pedal switch, brake pedal switch 5
F23 Secondary air pump
Air mass meter
Fuel high pressure pump
5
10
15
F24 Activated charcoal filter, exhaust gas recirculation
valve
10
F25 Right lighting system 40
F26 Left lighting system 40
F27 Secondary air pump
Preglowing
40
50
F28 Power suppy terminal 15, Starter 40
F29 Power supply terminal 30 50
F30
Ter mina l X
a)
40
a)
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the elec-
trical components of this terminal are automatically switched off.
No. Power consumer Amperes
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs 293
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fuse assignment in the dash panel
Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model
versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
No. Power consumer Amperes
1 Diagnostic socket 10
2 Control unit for ABS, ESP 5
3 Airbag 5
4 Heating, Air conditioning system, Reversing lights 5
5 Control unit for headlamp beam adjustment 5
6
Instrument cluster, Control unit for automatic
gearbox, Control unit for electromechanical
power steering
5
7 Telephone preinstallation 5
8 Towing device 5
Fig. 221 Schematic
representation of the
fuse carrier in the dash
panel
9 Not assigned
10 Not assigned
11 Parking aid 5
12 Central locking control unit 10
13 Diagnostic socket, Light switch, Brake light 10
14
Control unit for automatic gearbox, Selector lever
lock
5
15 Central control unit - interior lights 7,5
16 Climatronic 10
17 Not assigned
18 Parking aid 5
19 Not assigned
20 Uphill-Start off-Assist 5
21 Not assigned
22 Air blower for Climatronic 40
23 Front power window 30
24 Cigarette lighter 25
25 Rear window heater, Auxiliary heater 25
26 Power socket in the luggage compartment 20
27 Fuel pump relay 15
28 Not assigned
29 Engine control unit, Crankcase ventilation heater 10
30 Injection valves (diesel engine) 10
No. Power consumer Amperes
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs294
Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit
breakers, which switch on again automatically after a few seconds after
the overload has been eliminated.
Bulbs
Changing bulbs
The relevant lamp must always be switched off before a light bulb is
replaced.
Defect light bulbs should only be replaced with light bulbs of the same
type. The designation is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
Changing certain bulbs is not something which you can do yourself, but
requires to be done by a specialist. Other parts of the vehical must be
removed in order to change the light bulbs. This applies, in particular, to
bulbs which can only be reached from the engine compartment.
We therefore recommend that you have any bulbs changed by a Škoda
dealer or, in exceptional cases, by calling on other professional assist-
ance.
Please note that the engine compartment is a hazardous area ⇒ page 248.
We recommend that you carry the set of light bulbs with you which was
delivered in your vehicle. Replacement light bulbs
13)
are available at
specialist garages.
The set of light bulbs is stowed in the locable box in the spare wheel.
Fitted with a xenon headlight
Change of light bulbs on Xenon lights (low beam lights, parking lights and
main beam lights) should be undertaken by a specialist garage.
Overview of bulbs
31
Vacuum pump
Control unit for Haldex coupling (4x4)
20
5
32 Rear power window 30
33 Electric sliding/tilting roof 25
34 Not assigned
35 Anti-theft alarm system 5
36 Headlight cleaning system 20
37 Front seat heating 30
38 Not assigned
39 Control unit for automatic gearbox 20
40 Air blower for heating and air conditioning 40
41 Rear window wiper 15
42 Wipe wash pump for windscreen 15
43 Towing device 15
44 Towing device 20
45 Towing device 15
46 Heated windscreen washer nozzles 5
47 Relay for auxiliary heating 5
48 Not assigned
49 Light switch 5
No. Power consumer Amperes
13)
Replacement light bulbs are, on the other hand, part of the basic equipping of the
vehicle in some countries.
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs 295
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• Bulbs H7 and H1 are pressurised and may burst when changing
the bulb - risk of injury!
• It is recommended to wear gloves and eye protection when
changing a light bulb.
• Gas discharge bulbs* (xenon bulbs) operate with a high voltage,
professional knowledge is required - danger to life!
Caution
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
serviette or something similar.
Note
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is
assumed that no major complications will arise. Other light bulbs should
be changed by your specialist garage.
Front headlight Halogen headlight Xenon headlight
Low beam H7 D1S
Main beam H1
Parking lights W5W
Turn signals PY21W
Fog lights H8
Light unit (Octavia) Bulb
Reversing light P21W
Turn signals PY21W
Twin filament light bulb for the brake lights and
tail lights
P21/4W
Twin filament light bulb for the rear fog lights
and tail lights
P21/4W
Parking lights W3W
Rear light unit (estate car) Bulb
Reversing light, brake lights, tail lights and rear
fog light
P21W
Turn signals PY21W
Parking lights W3W
Others Bulb
Side turn signal lights LED
Licence plate light C5W
3. Brake light LED
Entry light W5W
front interior lighting C10W
Reading lights W5W
Rear interior lighting C10W
Luggage compartment light W5W
Door warning light C5W
Storage compartment light - front passenger
side
C3W
Others Bulb
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs296
Removing the headlight
The headlight must be removed in order to change the light bulb
of the parking lights, low beam lights and main beam lights as
well as the turn signal lights.
Removing the headlight
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Open the bonnet ⇒ page 247.
– Unscrew the plastic nut ⇒ fig. 222
– Pull the locking lever of the headlight as far as the stop in the
direction of arrow .
– Unplug the plug connector and carefully take out the headlight
in the direction of arrow .
Installation takes place in the reverse order.
Note
We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a
specialist garage after installing the headlight.
Fig. 222 Removing the
headlight
A
A
A
1
A
2
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs 297
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Parking light at the front
Removing the light bulb for the parking light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the headlight ⇒ page 296.
– Press the wire clamps in the direction of arrow to the side and
remove the cover ⇒ fig. 223.
– Press the contact studs in the direction of arrow and remove
the holder with the light bulb of the parking light ⇒ fig. 224.
– Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one.
Installation takes place in the reverse order.
Note
We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a
specialist garage after installing the headlight.
Fig. 223 Removing the
cover for the parking
and low beam light
Fig. 224 Removing the
light bulb for the
parking light
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs298
Low beam
Removing the light bulb for the low beam light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the headlight ⇒ page 296.
– Press the wire clamps in the direction of arrow to the side and
remove the cover ⇒ page 298, fig. 225.
– Unplug plug ⇒ fig. 226.
– Press the wire clamps in the direction of the headlight and
then unhook them to the side.
– Remove the light bulb and insert the new light bulb in such
a way that the fixing lugs of the light bulb socket fit into the
recesses at the reflector.
Installation takes place in the reverse order.
Note
We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a
specialist garage after installing the headlight.
Fig. 225 Removing the
cover for the parking
and low beam light
Fig. 226 Removing the
light bulb for the low
beam light
A
A
A
B
A
C
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs 299
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Main beam
Removing the light bulb for the main beam light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the headlight ⇒ page 296.
– Remove the protective cover at the rear of the headlight
⇒ page 299, fig. 227.
– Unplug plug ⇒ fig. 228.
– Press the wire clamps in the direction of the headlight and
then unhook them to the side.
– Remove the light bulb and insert the new light bulb in such
a way that the fixing lugs of the light bulb socket fit into the
recesses at the reflector.
Installation takes place in the reverse order.
Note
We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a
specialist garage after installing the headlight.
Fig. 227 Protective
cap of the light bulb of
the main beam light
Fig. 228 Removing the
light bulb for the main
beam light
A
A
A
B
A
C
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs300
Turn signal light (at the front)
Changing light bulb for turn signal light (at the front)
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the headlight ⇒ page 296.
– Turn the socket in the direction of arrow OPEN (open) and
take it out together with the light bulb for the turn signal light
⇒ fig. 229.
– Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left
and remove.
– Press a new light bulb into the socket and turn the light bulb to
the right as far as the stop.
– Insert the socket with the changed light bulb into the headlight
and secure it by turning in the direction of arrow CLOSE
(close) to the right.
Note
We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a
specialist garage after installing the headlight.
Fig. 229 Removing the
light bulb for the turn
signal light
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs 301
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Light unit (Octavia)
Changing light bulbs in the lamp holder
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Unlock the locking button and open the cover of the lamp
holder ⇒ fig. 230.
– Press the catches in the direction of arrow and take out the
lamp holder ⇒ fig. 231.
– Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left
and remove.
– Press a new light bulb into the socket and turn the light bulb to
the right as far as the stop.
– Insert the lamp holder in such a way that the catches lock in
place in the housing.
– Close and lock the cover of the lamp holder.
Changing light bulb for tail light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Unlock the locking button and open the cover of the lamp
holder ⇒ fig. 230.
– Take the defective light bulb (arrow or ⇒ fig. 231) out of
the housing and replace it with a new one.
– Close and lock the cover of the lamp holder.
Fig. 230 Luggage
compartment: Cover
for the lamp holder
Fig. 231 Removing the
lamp holder
A
1
A
2
.
,
,
Fuses and light bulbs302
Rear light unit (estate car)
Changing light bulbs in the lamp holder
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the side compartment cover by turning the locks in
the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 232.
– Take out the cover of the lamp holder on the luggage compart-
ment side.
– Take out the light bulbs of the tail light (arrow and )
⇒ fig. 233.
– Press the catches in the direction of arrow and take out the
lamp holder.
– Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left
and remove.
– Press a new light bulb into the socket and turn the light bulb to
the right as far as the stop.
Changing light bulb for tail light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the side compartment cover by turning the locks in
the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 232.
– Take out the cover of the lamp holder on the luggage compart-
ment side.
– Take the defective light bulb (arrow or ⇒ page 301,
fig. 231) out of the housing and replace it with a new one.
– Remove the lamp holder cover on the luggage compartment
side and close the side compartment.
Fig. 232 Luggage
compartment: Side
compartment
Fig. 233 Removing the
lamp holder
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
.
,
,
General 303
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Technical Data
General
Identification data
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker ⇒ fig. 234 is located on the floor of the luggage
compartment and is also stated in the Service schedule.
The vehicle data sticker contains the following data:
Vehicle identification number
Vehicle type
Gearbox code, paint number, interior equipment number, engine
output, engine code
Partial description of the vehicle
Fig. 234 Vehicle data
sticker
Fig. 235 Windscreen:
The last 11 digits of the
vehicle identification
number
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
.
,
,
General304
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped
into the engine compartment on the right hand shock absorber dome. This
number is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the
windscreen.
To enhance the anti-theft alarm protection, the last 11 digits of the vehicle
identification number are applied with laser onto all the windows
⇒ page 303, fig. 235.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the engine block.
Type plate (production plate)
The type plate is located in the lower area of the left centre column.
Homologation sign
The homologation sign is located on the inside of the bonnet next to the
lock. Vehicles for certain countries do not have an homologation sign.
Stickers on inside of fuel filler flap
The stickers are affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap and contain the
following information:
• The prescribed types of fuel,
• Tyre size,
• Tyre pressure
Note
• You will find the technical data of your vehicle in the separate brochure
"Technical Data".
• Please note that the information stated in the official vehicle regis-
tration documents always takes priority.
.
,
,
Index 305
Index
A
Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 179
electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Head airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
An overview
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Antilock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Antilock brake system (ABS)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Auto Check Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Auto Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Automatic driving lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Emergency programme . . . . . . . . . 154, 161
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . 154
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Automatic gearbox DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . 162
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Automatic seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Automatic vehicle wash systems . . . . . . . . . 234
Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . 228
B
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Biofuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Bluetooth™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Boot lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Brake
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Brake pads
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Bulbs
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Buttons for central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Buttons on the driver's door
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
C
Car jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274, 280
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Changing the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Changing wheels around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
.
,
,
Index306
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Child safety seats
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Classification into groups . . . . . . . . . . . 206
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . 204
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Use of child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Children and safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Climatronic
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Setting temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) . . . 128
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Clothes hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Cockpit
An overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Convenience operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Converting/masking over headlights . . . . . . 228
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Coolant level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Coolant quantity
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Coolant temperature/coolant level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Cup holder
at the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
at the rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
D
Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Defrosting rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
De-icing the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Detachable towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Diesel engines
Starting engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Diesel particle filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Door
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Driver-steering recommendation . . . . . . . . . 216
Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Dynamo
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
E
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Electric sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Electrically adjustable exterior mirrors . . . . . . 80
Electronic Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Electronic immobiliser
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Electronic stability programme . . . . . . . . . . 213
Electronic stability programme (ESP)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Engine
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Engine compartment
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Engine electronics
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
.
,
,
Index 307
replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . 223, 227
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Exhaust gas inspection
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Exhaust gases
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
F
First-aid box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fixing net
Estate car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Octavia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
For the first 1 500 kilometres . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Biofuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Saving energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fuel reserve
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Full wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
G
Gearbox
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Hazard warning light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Hazard warning lights system . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Head airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Headlights
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Heated windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . 75
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Heating of the external mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Heating the front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
I
Identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Inspecting the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Interior light
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Interior lighting
at the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
at the rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Interior rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Intermittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
.
,
,
Index308
J
Jacking points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 282
K
Keeping windows demisted
The air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . 125
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
L
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Leather care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
light
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Lighting of the interior of the vehicle . . . . . . . 70
Lights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Converting/masking over . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
switching them on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Lights and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Liquid in reservoir for windscreen washer system
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
locking
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Locking and unlocking from inside . . . . . . . . 48
Low beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lugagge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 92
Folding double hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Folding hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 68
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Manual shifting of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Memory for the on-board computer . . . . . . . 18
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 175
Bluetooth™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Multi-functional indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
N
Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
O
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Open door
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Opening a single door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Opening for skis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Operation in winter
De-icing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
The battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Overview of the engine compartment . . . . . 250
P
Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Parking aid
at the rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
front and rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Petrol engines
Starting engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
.
,
,
Index 309
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Power windows
Buttons on the driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Operational problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Switches in front passenger door and in rear
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
R
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear window
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Rear-view mirror
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Interior rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Recharge battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Running in the car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
S
Safe securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Safety instructions
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Safety wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Saving electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Seat belt height adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 188
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
fasten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
taking off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 157
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 157
Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . . . . 154
Selector lever-emergency unlocking (DSG) 162
Service Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Interval Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Setting temperature
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Shifting of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Stability system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Starting engine
after fuel tank has run empty . . . . . . . . . 141
Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Steering
Driver-steering recommendation . . . . . . 216
Steering force assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Storage compartment
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Storage facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Sun screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Switching lights on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
T
Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Temperature
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
.
,
,
Index310
The air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
The armrest at the rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
The automatic wiper/washer system . . . . . . 75
The battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 258
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Inspecting the electrolyte level . . . . . . . 260
Operation in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
The CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
The electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 45
The outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
The roof luggage rack system . . . . . . . . . . 102
Thickness of brake pads
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
automatic gearbox DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Towing a vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Towing protection monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tow-starting a vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 162
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Traction control system (TCS)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Two-way radio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
U
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Uphill-Start off-Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Vehicle condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Vehicle data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Vehicle immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Ventilation
Auxiliary ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
W
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
with high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Washing vehicle by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Wax treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Wheel
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
De-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Window lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Windows
De-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Windscreen Wiper and Washer System . . . 262
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . 262
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
.
,
,
Index 311
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Wiper blades
Replacing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . 77
X
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
.
,
,
s3sk
.
4
.
book
Seite
292
Freitag
,
27
.
August
2004
8:44
08
Škoda Auto is constantly working on the further development of all types and models. Please understand that, for this reason, changes
to the scope of supply in terms of shape, equipment and engineering may be introduced at any time. It is therefore not possible to derive
any claims from the information, illustrations and descriptions contained in this Owner ´s Manual .
Reprinting, reproduction, translation or any other use of this document, in whole or in parts, is not permitted without the written consent
of Škoda Auto.
Škoda Auto expressly reserves all rights in respect of copyright.
Subject to modification.
Published by ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 200
5
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaService
ŠkodaGenuine Parts
ŠkodaGenuine Accessories
A5_19_01_06.indd 2A5_19_01_06.indd 2 3.7.2006 14:26:343.7.2006 14:26:34
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaOctavia
OWNER´ S MANUAL
How you can contribute to a cleaner environment
The fuel consumption of your Škoda - and thus the level of pollutants contained
in the exhaust - is also determined by how you drive.
The noise level and wear and tear are also influenced by how you personally
handle your vehicle. This Owner ´s Manual tells you how to drive your Škoda to
achieve the minimum impact on the environment, and how to save money at
the same time. Look up „Environment“ in the Index to find out more.
Please also refer to all the texts identified with a ❀
in this Owner ´s Manual.
Make your contribution - for the sake of the environment.
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Octavia anglicky 05.05
S64.5610.03.20
1Z0 012 003 AL
Octavia anglicky 05.05 S64.5610.03.20
A5_19_01_06.indd 1A5_19_01_06.indd 1 3.7.2006 14:25:423.7.2006 14:25:42
… 316


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules
1

Forum

skoda-octavia

  • voyant allume à cote du voyant des vitesse : une clé Submitted on 10-3-2022 at 08:08

    Reply Report abuse


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Skoda Octavia at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Skoda Octavia in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 13,41 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Skoda Octavia

Skoda Octavia User Manual - German - 236 pages

Skoda Octavia User Manual - Dutch - 240 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info